e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 Service Manual

SERVICE MANUAL
MULTIFUNCTIONAL DIGITAL SYSTEMS
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850
File No. SME040039B0 R04102168700-TTEC Ver02_2005-07
2005 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS REGARDING THE SERVICE FOR e-STUDIO520/600/720/850

The installation and service should be done by a qualified service technician.
1) Transportation/Installation - When transporting/installing the equipment, employ four persons and be sure to move it by the casters while lifting the stoppers. The equipment is quite heavy and weighs approximately 210 kg (463 lb), therefore pay full attention when handling it. - Be sure not to hold the movable parts or units (e.g. the RADF) when transporting the equipment. - Be sure to use a dedicated outlet with AC 115 V / 16 A, 127 V / 16 A, 220 V or 220-240 V / 9 A for its power source. - The equipment must be grounded for safety. - Select a suitable place for installation. Avoid excessive heat, high humidity, dust, vibration and direct sunlight. - Provide proper ventilation since the equipment emits a slight amount of ozone. - To insure adequate working space for the copying operation, keep a minimum clearance of 80 cm (32) on the left, 80 cm (32) on the right and 10 cm (4) on the rear. - The equipment shall be installed near the socket outlet and shall be accessible. - Be sure to fix and plug in the power cable securely after the installation so that no one trips over it.
2) General Precautions at Service - Be sure to turn the power OFF and unplug the power cable during service (except for the service should be done with the power turned ON). - Unplug the power cable and clean the area around the prongs of the plug and socket outlet once a year or more. A fire may occur when dust lies on this area. - When the parts are disassembled, reassembly is the reverse of disassembly unless otherwise noted in this manual or other related documents. Be careful not to install small parts such as screws, washers, pins, E-rings, star washers in the wrong places. - Basically, the equipment should not be operated with any parts removed or disassembled. - The PC board must be stored in an anti-electrostatic bag and handled carefully using a wristband since the ICs on it may be damaged due to static electricity. Caution: Before using the wristband, unplug the power cable of the equipment and make sure that there are no charged objects which are not insulated in the vicinity. Avoid expose to laser beam during service. This equipment uses a laser diode. Be sure not to expose your eyes to the laser beam. Do not insert reflecting parts or tools such as a screwdriver on the laser beam path. Remove all reflecting metals such as watches, rings, etc. before starting service. Be sure not to touch high-temperature sections such as the exposure lamp, fuser unit, damp heater and areas around them. Be sure not to touch high-voltage sections such as the chargers, transfer belt, IH control circuit, developer, high-voltage transformer, exposure lamp control inverter, inverter for the LCD backlight and power supply unit. Especially, the board of these components should not be touched since the electric charge may remain in the capacitors, etc. on them even after the power is turned OFF. Make sure that the equipment will not operate before touching potentially dangerous places (e.g. rotating/operating sections such as gears, belts pulleys, fans and laser beam exit of the laser optical unit). Be careful when removing the covers since there might be the parts with very sharp edges underneath. When servicing the equipment with the power turned ON, be sure not to touch live sections and rotating/operating sections. Avoid exposing your eyes to laser beam. Use designated jigs and tools. Use recommended measuring instruments or equivalents. Return the equipment to the original state and check the operation when the service is finished.
3) Important Service Parts for Safety - The breaker, door switch, fuse, thermostat, thermofuse, thermistor, IC-RAMs including lithium batteries, etc. are particularly important for safety. Be sure to handle/install them properly. If these parts are short-circuited and their functions become ineffective, they may result in fatal accidents such as burnout. Do not allow a short-circuit or do not use the parts not recommended by Toshiba TEC Corporation. 4) Cautionary Labels - During servicing, be sure to check the rating plate and cautionary labels such as Unplug the power cable during service, CAUTION. HOT, CAUTION. HIGH VOLTAGE, CAUTION. LASER BEAM, etc. to see if there is any dirt on their surface and if they are properly stuck to the equipment.
5) Disposal of the Equipment, Supplies, Packing Materials, Used Batteries and IC-RAMs - Regarding the recovery and disposal of the equipment, supplies, packing materials, used batteries and IC-RAMs including lithium batteries, follow the relevant local regulations or rules.
Caution: Dispose of used batteries and IC-RAMs including lithium batteries according to this manual. Attention: Se dbarrasser de batteries et IC-RAMs uss y compris les batteries en lithium selon ce manuel. Vorsicht: Entsorgung des gebrauchten Batterien und IC-RAMs (inclusive der Lithium-Batterie) nach diesem Handbuch.
CONTENTS
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850
1. SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES ......................................... 1-1

1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 Specifications....................................................................................................................... 1-1 Accessories ......................................................................................................................... 1-9 Options .............................................................................................................................. 1-10 Supplies ............................................................................................................................. 1-11 System List ........................................................................................................................ 1-12 Sectional View ..................................................................................................................... 2-1 Electric Parts Layout............................................................................................................ 2-7 Symbols and Functions of Various Components............................................................... 2-32 System Block Diagram ...................................................................................................... 2-42 Installation and Replacement of Covers ............................................................................ 2-43 Installation and Separation of PC Boards.......................................................................... 2-48 Removal and Installation of Options .................................................................................. 2-52
2. OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE ....................................................................................... 2-1
3. COPY PROCESS .......................................................................................................... 3-1

3.1 General Description ............................................................................................................. 3-1 3.2 Details of Copy Process ...................................................................................................... 3-2 3.3 Comparison of Copy Process to e-STUDIO550/650/810 .................................................. 3-11
4. GENERAL OPERATION............................................................................................... 4-1

4.1 Overview of Operation ......................................................................................................... 4-1 4.2 Description of Operation ...................................................................................................... 4-2 4.2.1 Warming-up .............................................................................................................. 4-2 4.2.2 Ready state (ready for copying) ............................................................................... 4-2 4.2.3 Drawer feed copying with the [START] button ......................................................... 4-3 4.2.4 Bypass feed copying ................................................................................................ 4-7 4.2.5 Interruption copying .................................................................................................. 4-7 4.3 Detection of Abnormality...................................................................................................... 4-8 4.3.1 Types of abnormality ................................................................................................ 4-8 4.3.2 Description of abnormality ........................................................................................ 4-8 4.4 Flowchart ........................................................................................................................... 4-12 4.4.1 Power ON to ready ................................................................................................. 4-12 4.4.2 Automatic feed copying .......................................................................................... 4-14
5. CONTROL PANEL........................................................................................................ 5-1

5.1 Operation Area and Display Area ........................................................................................ 5-1 5.2 Items Shown on the Control Panel ...................................................................................... 5-2 5.2.1 Display...................................................................................................................... 5-4 5.3 Relation between the Equipment State and Operators Operation...................................... 5-9 5.4 Operation ........................................................................................................................... 5-13 5.4.1 Dot matrix LCD circuit ............................................................................................ 5-13 5.4.2 LED display circuit .................................................................................................. 5-16 5.5 Disassembly and Replacement ......................................................................................... 5-17
6. SCANNING SECTION................................................................................................... 6-1

6.1 Function ............................................................................................................................... 6-1 6.2 Construction......................................................................................................................... 6-2 6.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................. 6-4 6.3.1 Scanner motor (M1) ................................................................................................. 6-4 6.3.2 Two-phase motor drive circuit (fixed-current type) ................................................... 6-4 6.4 Control for Exposure Lamp.................................................................................................. 6-6 6.4.1 General description .................................................................................................. 6-6
March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 CONTENTS
6.4.2 Exposure lamp ......................................................................................................... 6-7 6.4.3 Control circuit for exposure lamp.............................................................................. 6-8 6.5 CCD Control ........................................................................................................................ 6-9 6.5.1 Opto-electronic conversion....................................................................................... 6-9 6.5.2 Shading correction ................................................................................................... 6-9 6.6 Automatic Original Size Detection Circuit .......................................................................... 6-10 6.6.1 Principle of original size detection .......................................................................... 6-10 6.6.2 Process of original size detection ........................................................................... 6-11 6.7 Disassembly and Replacement ......................................................................................... 6-15
7. IMAGE PROCESSING .................................................................................................. 7-1

7.1 General Description ............................................................................................................. 7-1 7.2 Configuration ....................................................................................................................... 7-3 7.3 Scanning Section Control PC Board (SLG) ......................................................................... 7-4 7.3.1 Features ................................................................................................................... 7-4 7.3.2 Functions of image processing................................................................................. 7-4 7.4 Laser Control PC Board (PLG) ............................................................................................ 7-8 7.4.1 Features ................................................................................................................... 7-8 7.4.2 Functions of image processing................................................................................. 7-8 7.5 Laser Driving PC Board (LDR) ............................................................................................ 7-9
8. LASER OPTICAL UNIT ................................................................................................ 8-1

8.1 General Description ............................................................................................................. 8-1 8.2 Structure .............................................................................................................................. 8-4 8.2.1 Laser optical unit ...................................................................................................... 8-4 8.2.2 Polygonal motor unit................................................................................................. 8-5 8.2.3 f lenses 1 and 2 ...................................................................................................... 8-7 8.2.4 H-sync detection PC board (SNS board) ................................................................. 8-7 8.2.5 Laser driving board (LDR1/LDR2 board).................................................................. 8-7 8.2.6 Slit glass ................................................................................................................... 8-8 8.3 Laser Diode Control Circuit.................................................................................................. 8-9 8.4 Polygonal Motor Control Circuit ......................................................................................... 8-10 8.5 Laser Unit Cooling Fan Control Circuit .............................................................................. 8-11 8.6 Disassembly and Replacement ......................................................................................... 8-12
9. PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM.......................................................................................... 9-1

9.1 General Description ............................................................................................................. 9-1 9.2 Functions ............................................................................................................................. 9-4 9.3 Operation ............................................................................................................................. 9-6 9.3.1 Operation of bypass pickup roller ............................................................................. 9-6 9.3.2 Operation of drawer pickup roller ............................................................................. 9-7 9.3.3 Paper separation ...................................................................................................... 9-7 9.3.4 Driving ...................................................................................................................... 9-9 9.3.5 General operation................................................................................................... 9-10 9.3.6 Description of Tandem LCF Operation................................................................... 9-12 9.4 Tray-up motor control circuit .............................................................................................. 9-15 9.5 Feed motor control circuit .................................................................................................. 9-16 9.6 Transport motor control circuit ........................................................................................... 9-17 9.7 Registration motor control circuit ....................................................................................... 9-18 9.8 Tandem LCF tray-up motor / end fence motor .................................................................. 9-19 9.9 Disassembly and Replacement ......................................................................................... 9-20
10. PROCESS RELATED SECTION ................................................................................ 10-1

10.1 Construction....................................................................................................................... 10-1 10.2 Functions ........................................................................................................................... 10-2 10.3 Charger Wire Cleaner Control Circuit ................................................................................ 10-3 10.3.1 General description ................................................................................................ 10-3
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 CONTENTS March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC
10.3.2 Configuration .......................................................................................................... 10-3 10.4 High-voltage Transformer Control Circuit .......................................................................... 10-4 10.4.1 General description ................................................................................................ 10-4 10.4.2 Description of operation ......................................................................................... 10-5 10.5 Drum Surface Potential Sensor Control Circuit ................................................................. 10-6 10.5.1 General description ................................................................................................ 10-6 10.5.2 Configuration .......................................................................................................... 10-6 10.5.3 Description of operation ......................................................................................... 10-7 10.6 Temperature/humidity detection circuit.............................................................................. 10-8 10.6.1 Outline .................................................................................................................... 10-8 10.6.2 Construction ........................................................................................................... 10-8 10.7 Disassembly and Replacement ......................................................................................... 10-9
11. DRUM/CLEANER UNIT .............................................................................................. 11-1

Construction....................................................................................................................... 11-1 Functions ........................................................................................................................... 11-2 Drum Temperature Detection Circuit ................................................................................. 11-3 Image Quality Control ........................................................................................................ 11-4 11.4.1 Outline .................................................................................................................... 11-4 11.4.2 Construction ........................................................................................................... 11-4 11.4.3 Principle of Image Quality Sensor .......................................................................... 11-5 11.4.4 Flow of control ........................................................................................................ 11-5 11.5 Drum motor control circuit.................................................................................................. 11-6 11.6 Disassembly and Replacement ......................................................................................... 11-7 11.1 11.2 11.3 11.4
12. DEVELOPER UNIT ..................................................................................................... 12-1

12.1 12.2 12.3 12.4 Construction....................................................................................................................... 12-1 Functions ........................................................................................................................... 12-2 Developer Unit Drive.......................................................................................................... 12-7 Motor Control Circuit.......................................................................................................... 12-8 12.4.1 New toner supply motor control circuit ................................................................... 12-8 12.4.2 Developer unit motor control circuit ........................................................................ 12-9 12.5 Auto-toner Circuit............................................................................................................. 12-11 12.5.1 General description .............................................................................................. 12-11 12.5.2 Operation of auto-toner sensor ............................................................................ 12-13 12.6 Disassembly and Replacement ....................................................................................... 12-15
13. TRANSFER/TRANSPORT UNIT ................................................................................ 13-1

13.1 13.2 13.3 13.4 13.5 14.1 14.2 14.3 14.4 General Description ........................................................................................................... 13-1 Functions ........................................................................................................................... 13-2 General Description of Transfer Belt Unit Operation ......................................................... 13-4 Transfer belt motor control circuit ...................................................................................... 13-5 Disassembly and Replacement ......................................................................................... 13-6
14. FUSER UNIT ............................................................................................................... 14-1

Outline ............................................................................................................................... 14-1 Operation ........................................................................................................................... 14-2 Functions ........................................................................................................................... 14-3 Fuser Control Circuit.......................................................................................................... 14-5 14.4.1 Configuration .......................................................................................................... 14-5 14.4.2 Heating principle of IH coil...................................................................................... 14-6 14.4.3 IH control circuit interface ....................................................................................... 14-7 14.4.4 Abnormality in the IH control circuit ........................................................................ 14-7 14.4.5 Temperature detection section ............................................................................... 14-9 14.5 Fuser Motor Control Circuit.............................................................................................. 14-15 14.6 Disassembly and Replacement ....................................................................................... 14-17
March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 CONTENTS
15. EXIT/REVERSE SECTION.......................................................................................... 15-1

15.1 15.2 15.3 15.4 15.5 15.6 15.7 16.1 16.2 16.3 16.4 16.5 General Description ........................................................................................................... 15-1 Functions ........................................................................................................................... 15-2 Driving of Exit/Reverse section.......................................................................................... 15-3 Operation ........................................................................................................................... 15-4 Exit motor control circuit .................................................................................................... 15-9 Reverse motor control circuit ........................................................................................... 15-10 Disassembly and Replacement ....................................................................................... 15-11
16. REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (RADF) ...................................... 16-1

General Description ........................................................................................................... 16-1 Operation ........................................................................................................................... 16-2 Drive System ..................................................................................................................... 16-3 Signal Block Diagram ........................................................................................................ 16-6 Operations ......................................................................................................................... 16-7 16.5.1 A4 single-sided feeding (Operational condition: A4 original/Reproduction ratio: 100%)............................... 16-7 16.5.2 A4 two-sided feeding (Operational condition: A4 original/Reproduction ratio: 100%)............................. 16-12 16.5.3 A4 single-sided feeding (Operational condition: A3 original/Reproduction ratio: 100%)............................. 16-20 16.5.4 A3 two-sided feeding (Operational condition: A3 original/Reproduction ratio: 100%)............................. 16-24 16.5.5 Single-sided feeding at mixed-original mode (Operational condition: A4-R and FOLIO originals/Reproduction ratio: 100%) .... 16-32 16.6 Jams ................................................................................................................................ 16-37 16.6.1 Jams at feeding section........................................................................................ 16-37 16.6.2 Jams at transporting section ................................................................................ 16-37 16.6.3 Jams at large original exit section ........................................................................ 16-38 16.6.4 Jams at small original reverse section.................................................................. 16-39 16.6.5 Jams at small original exit section ........................................................................ 16-40 16.6.6 Jams at intermediate transport section ................................................................ 16-40 16.6.7 Jams when the cover is open ............................................................................... 16-41 16.6.8 Jams when 24V power is OFF ............................................................................. 16-41 16.6.9 Jams when paper remains ................................................................................... 16-41 16.7 Errors ............................................................................................................................... 16-42 16.8 Original Size Detection .................................................................................................... 16-43 16.8.1 Original size detection method ............................................................................. 16-43 16.8.2 Original size detection chart ................................................................................. 16-44 16.9 Flow Chart ....................................................................................................................... 16-46 16.10Timing Chart ................................................................................................................... 16-62 16.11Circuits ............................................................................................................................ 16-74 16.12Input/Output Signals ....................................................................................................... 16-80 16.13Disassembly and Replacement ...................................................................................... 16-85
17. POWER SUPPLY UNIT .............................................................................................. 17-1

17.1 17.2 17.3 17.4 17.5 17.6 17.7 Construction....................................................................................................................... 17-1 Operation of DC Output Circuit.......................................................................................... 17-2 Output Channel ................................................................................................................. 17-3 Fuse................................................................................................................................... 17-5 Configuration of Power Supply Unit................................................................................... 17-7 Power Supply Sequence ................................................................................................... 17-8 AC Wire Harness ............................................................................................................... 17-9
18. PC BOARDS ............................................................................................................... 18-1
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 CONTENTS
1.
1.1
SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
Specifications
Destinations (machine versions) of e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 The machine versions of e-STUDIO600/720/850 are as follows (e-STUDIO520 is for NAD, AUD and MJD only): NAD: North America / Central and South America TWD: Taiwan SAD: Saudi Arabia ASD: Asia / Central and South America / Other ASU: Asia / Other AUD: Australia MJD: Europe CND: China KRD: Korea The drawer configuration of each model differs depending on its destination (machine version). NAD, SAD and TWD (e-STUDIO600/720) models have 4 drawers. Other models have 2 drawers and a tandem LCF. In this manual, a standard LCF is called the Tandem LCF (T-LCF), and MP-4004A/L is called the Option LCF (O-LCF).
Accepted originals........................ Sheet, book and 3-dimensional object. The reversing automatic document feeder (RADF) only accepts paper which are not pasted or stapled. (Single-sided originals: 50 to 127 g/m / 13 to 34 lb. Bond, Double-sided originals: 50 to 105 g/m / 13 to 28 lb. Bond) Carbon paper are not acceptable either. Maximum size: A3/LD Copy speed (Copies/min.)
e-STUDIO520
Paper size A4, B5, A5-R, LT, ST-R A4-R, B5-R, LT-R Top side discharging Back side discharging Top side discharging Back side discharging Top side discharging Back side discharging Top side discharging Back side discharging 1st 52 52 42 42 37 37 33 31 Drawer 3rd 2nd (*1) 52 52 52 42 42 37 37 33 31 52 42 42 37 37 33 31 4th (*1) 52 52 42 42 37 37 33 31 Tandem LCF(*2) 52 52 Bypass feed Size Size not specified specified 45 28 45 37 37 32 32 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 Option LCF(*3) 52 52 -
B4, FOLIO, LG, COMPUTER A3, LD
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
1-1
e-STUDIO600
e-STUDIO720
1-2
e-STUDIO850
*1 : The 3rd drawer and 4th drawer are standard equipments for NAD, SAD and TWD (e-STUDIO600/ 720) versions. *2 : The Tandem LCF is a standard equipment for ASD, ASU, AUD, MJD, CND, TWD (e-STUDIO850) and KRD versions. Only A4/LT can be used for the Tandem LCF. *3 : Only A4, B5 and LT can be used for the Option LCF. * * * * * Each copy speed has been measured in the Continuous Copy Mode, using single-sided originals placed on the original glass manually. Accuracy: Within 2 sheets (Bypass feed) / Within 1 sheet (Other paper sources) A hyphen ("-") indicates that the combination is invalid for the subject paper source. Values may vary depending on its use condition and environment. When the RADF is used, each copy speed per minute of e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 has reached 52/60/72/85 sheets. These copy speeds can be realized only in the following conditions. Original: A4/LT / 1 sheet Copy mode: A4/LT / Plain paper / Automatic Paper Selection - OFF / Automatic Copy Density OFF Number of copy set: 52 or more / 60 or more / 72 or more / 85 or more Reproduction ratio: 100%
1-3
Copy speed for thick paper (Copies/min.) Thick 1 (Paper weight: From over 80 g/m (21.3 lb. Bond) to 105 g/m (28 lb. Bond)) Paper source: Drawers / Tandem LCF / Option LCF
A4, B5, A5-R, LT, ST-R Top side discharging Back side discharging Top side discharging Back side discharging Top side discharging Back side discharging Top side discharging Back side discharging e-STUDIO520 52 52 42 42 37 37 33 31 e-STUDIO600 60 60 46 46 41 38 36 32 e-STUDIO720 72 72 52 50 44 41 37 34 e-STUDIO850 85 85 61 56 52 45 43 37
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R
* *
Tandem LCF - A4/LT only / Option LCF -A4/B5/LT only Tolerance: Within -0.5 from +1
Thick 1 (Paper weight: From over 80 g/m (21.3 lb. Bond) to 105 g/m (28 lb. Bond)) Paper source: Bypass feed
Size specified A4, B5, A5-R, Top side LT, ST-R discharging Back side discharging A4-R, B5-R, Top side LT-R discharging Back side discharging B4, FOLIO, Top side LG, discharging COMPUTER Back side discharging A3, LD Top side discharging Back side discharging e-STUDIO520 Yes No 45 28 45 37 37 32 32 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 e-STUDIO600 Yes No 46 30 46 38 38 34 34 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 e-STUDIO720 Yes No 46 30 46 38 38 34 34 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 e-STUDIO850 Yes No 50 34 50 42 42 38 38 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34
Tolerance: Within -0.5 from +1
1-4
Thick 2 (Paper weight: From over 105 g/m (28 lb. Bond) to 163 g/m (90 lb. Index)) Paper source: Drawers / Tandem LCF / Option LCF
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R
* *
Thick 2 (Paper weight: From over 105 g/m (28 lb. Bond) to 163 g/m (90 lb. Index)) Paper source: Bypass feed
1-5
Thick 3 (Paper weight: From over 163 g/m (90 lb. Bond) to 209 g/m (115.7 lb. Index)) Paper source: Drawers / Tandem LCF / Option LCF
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R
* *
Thick 3 (Paper weight: From over 163 g/m (90 lb. Bond) to 209 g/m (115.7 lb. Index)) Paper source: Bypass feed
1-6
System copy speed

Copy mode Single-sided originals Single-sided copies Single-sided originals Double-sided copies Double-sided originals Double-sided copies Double-sided originals Single-sided copies 1 set 3 sets 5 sets 1 set 3 sets 5 sets 1 set 3 sets 5 sets 1 set 3 sets 5 sets e-STUDIO520 20.17 43.13 65.20 23.79 46.44 69.30 41.18 87.04 132.36 37.00 82.38 128.19 Sec. e-STUDIO600 e-STUDIO720 18.11 17.20 38.30 32.95 57.72 49.56 21.83 20.56 41.78 37.03 62.37 54.52 35.14 35.57 68.23 75.26 101.34 114.96 31.28 30.88 70.87 63.86 110.63 97.23 e-STUDIO850 14.89 29.86 43.93 18.63 32.59 46.65 33.96 61.79 89.88 30.54 58.79 86.92
* * *
The system copy speed, including scanning time, is available when 10 sheets of A4/LT size original are set on RADF and one of the copy modes in the above table is selected. The period of time from pressing [START] to the paper exit completely out of the equipment based on the actually measured value. 1st drawer is selected and copying is at the sort mode. Finisher, hole punch unit and inserter are installed. Automatic copy density, APS/AMS are turned off. Copy paper
Size A3 to A5-R, LD to ST-R, FOLIO, COMPUTER, 13"LG, 8.5"x8.5", 8K, 16K, 16K-R (Non-standard or user-specified sizes can be set.) 64 to 209g/m ( 17 lb. Bond to 115.7 lb. Index) Tab paper Tracing paper (75g/m only), (2nd drawer is Labels, OHP film, Tab paper, recommended) Duplex copy A3 to A5-R, LD to ST-R, FOLIO, COMPUTER, 13"LG, 8.5"x8.5", 8K, 16K, 16K-R Drawer Tandem LCF A4, LT Bypass copy Remarks
Weight Special paper
These special papers recommended by Toshiba Tec
First copy time ..............e-STUDIO520/600/720: Approx. 4.0 sec. or less e-STUDIO850: Approx. 3.5 sec. or less (A4/LT, 1st drawer, 100%, original placed manually, Top side discharge) Warming-up time ..........e-STUDIO520: Approx. 130 sec. e-STUDIO600: Approx. 130 sec. (Approx. 160 sec : TWD) e-STUDIO720: Approx. 130 sec. (Approx. 160 sec : TWD) e-STUDIO850: Approx. 130 sec. (temperature: 20C or over, rated voltage / rating current) Multiple copying ............Up to 9999 copies; Key in set numbers Reproduction ratio...........Actual ratio: 1000.5% Zooming: 25 to 400% in increments of 1% (25 to 200% when using RADF) Resolution/Gradation ....Scanning: 600 dpi x 600 dpi Printing: Equivalent to 2400 dpi x 600 dpi Gradation: 256 steps
1-7
Eliminated portion .........Leading edges: 3.02.0 mm, Side/trailing edges: 2.02.0 mm (copy) Leading / trailing edges: 5.02.0 mm, Side edges: 5.02.0 mm (print) Paper feeding ...............Drawers: 2 drawers + Tandem LCF or 4 drawers (Depends on versions) - Drawer: Stack height 55 mm, equivalent to 500 sheets; 80 g/m (22 lb. Bond) - Tandem LCF: Stack height 137 mm x 2, equivalent to 2500 sheets; 80 g/m (22 lb. Bond) Bypass feeding: Bypass tray Stack height 11 mm: equivalent to 100 sheets; 80 g/m (22 lb. Bond) Option LCF: MP-4004 Stack height 428 mm: equivalent to 4000 sheets; 80 g/m (22 lb. Bond) Capacity of originals in the reversing automatic document feeder ........................................A3 to A5-R, LD to ST-R: Stack height 16 mm or less / 100 sheets; 80 g/m (22lb. Bond) Automatic duplexer .......Stackless, Switchback type Toner supply .................Automatic toner density detection/supply Toner cartridge replacing method (There is a recycle toner supplying mechanism.) Density control ..............Automatic density mode and manual density mode selectable in 11 steps Weight...........................Approximately 210 kg (463 lb.): NAD, TWD, SAD Approximately 204 kg (450 lb.): ASD, ASU, AUD, MJD, CND, KRD Power requirements......AC 115 V / 16 A, 127 V / 16 A, 220 V or 220-240 V / 9 A (50/60 Hz) * The acceptable value of each voltage is 10% Power consumption ......2.0 kW or less * The electric power is supplied to the options through the equipment. * 1.5 kW or less: TWD version of e-STUDIO520/600/720 only Dimensions of the equipment ........... See the figure below (W 698 x D 789 x H 1213 (mm))
1213 m m
789 mm
698 m m
1-8
1.2
Accessories
1 pc. 1 pc. (not available for MJD, ASU, KRD) 4 pcs 1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc. (for TWD, ASD, ASU, AUD, MJD, CND, KRD) 1 set (for NAD, ASU, MJD) 1 pc. (for ASU, MJD, KRD) 1 pc. (for CND) 1 pc. (for CND) 1 pc. (for CND) 2 pc. (for MJD)
Unpacking/setup instruction Operator's manual CD-ROM Drum Toner bag (Installed inside of the equipment) Operator's manual pocket Original feeding tray spacer Tab paper end guide Cleaning cloth Cloth case Power cable Setup report Customer satisfaction card Approval sheet Envelope Packing list Label
1-9
1.3
Options
MP-4004L/A MJ-1027 MJ-1028 STAPLE-700 STAPLE-600 (for saddle stitch) KN-1017 MJ-6003N/E/F/S MJ-7001 MF-6000U/E GD-1170NA/EU/AU GM-1050 GM-2040 GM-4010 GN-1040 GN-2010 GN-3010 GP-1040 GP-1060 GO-1050 GF-1140
Large Capacity Feeder (LCF) Finisher Saddle stitch finisher Staple cartridge Finisher guide rail Hole punch unit Inserter Damp heater Fax board Printer kit Printer/Scanner kit Scanner kit Wireless LAN adapter Bluetooth module Antenna Scrambler board Data overwrite kit PCI slot Parallel interface kit
* * * * *
The finisher (MJ-1027/1028) is necessary for the installation of the hole punch unit (MJ-6003N/E/F/ S) and the inserter (MJ-7001). The PCI slot (GO-1050) is necessary for the installation of the scrambler board (GP-1040), the parallel interface kit (GF-1140) and the fax board (GD-1170NA/EU/AU). The antenna (GN-3010) is necessary to enable the wireless LAN module (GN-1040) and the bluetooth module (GN-2010). Up to 2 antennas (GN-3010) can be connected to the wireless LAN module (GN-1040). When the wireless LAN module (GN-1040) and the bluetooth module (GN-2010) are installed together, only 1 antenna (GN-3010) can be connected to each.
1 - 10
1.4
Supplies
OD-6510 D-6000 PS-ZT6000D (for other) PS-ZT6000E (for MJD) PS-ZT6000 (for NAD) PS-TB6510E (for MJD) PS-TB6510 (for other)
Drum Developer Toner Toner bag
1 - 11
1.5
Staple cartridge STAPLE-700
System List
Antena GN-3010
Finisher guide rail KN-1017 Wireless LAN modude GN-1040
Bluetooth modude GN-2010
Finisher MJ-1027 Hole punch unit MJ-6003N/E/F/S
Inserter MJ-7001
Printer kit GM-1050 Printer/ Scanner kit GM-2040 Scanner kit GM-4010 Data overwrite kit GP-1060
1 - 12
Staple cartridge STAPLE-600 FAX board GP-1170
PCI slot GO-1050
Saddle stitch finisher MJ-1028
Parallel interface kit GF-1140
Scrambler board GP-1040
Damp heater MF-6000U/E
LCF MP-4004L/A
2.
2.1
OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE

Sectional View
2
[A] Front side view NAD and SAD models.
A4 A3 A1 A2 A5 A5
C1
A7 E10 E9 E8 E7 E6
E5
A8
E4
E3
A9
E2 E1 A10
B1 B2 C2 C9 C7 C3 C4 C5 G1 G2 C4 C6 C8 G3 G5 H1 H2 H3 H4 J5 G4 G6 K5 J1 J6 J3 J4 J7 K2 K6 K3 K4 K7 L2 L6 L3 L4 L7 M2 M6 M3 M4 M7 F6 F4 F5 F3 D1 D3 D2 D4 D5 I4 E11 E12 I1 I2
I9 F2 F1 I5
I10 I7 I8
I3 I6 J2
L5 K1
M5 L1
M1
Fig.2-1
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
2-1
TWD, ASD, ASU, AUD, MJD, CND and KRD models.
A4 A3 A1 A2 A5 A5
C1
A7 E10 E9 E8 E7 E6
E5
A8
E4
E3
A9
E2 E1 A10
B1 B2 C2 C9 C7 C3 C4 C5 G1 G2 C4 C6 C8 G3 G5 H1 H2 H3 H4 J5 G4 G6 K5 J1 J6 J3 J4 J7 K2 K6 K3 K4 K7 L2 L6 L3 L4 L7 F6 F4 F5 F3 D1 D3 D2 D4 D5 I4 E11 E12 I1 I2
I9 F2 F1 I5
I10 I7 I8
I3 I6 J2
L5 K1
N1
N2
N3
N4
Fig.2-2
N5
2-2
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 B1 B2 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 E8 E9 E10 E11 E15 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 G1 G2 G3 G4
Exposure lamp Reflector Mirror-1 Mirror-2 Mirror-3 ADF original glass Original glass Lens CCD driving PC board (CCD board) Scanning section control PC board (SLG board) Laser optical unit Laser control PC board (PLG board) Cleaning web Cleaning web pushing roller Fuser roller Separation finger Fuser exit roller Pressure roller Fuser roller thermistor Pressure roller thermistor Fuser roller thermostat Upper developer sleeve (Magnetic roller) Lower developer sleeve (Magnetic roller) Doctor blade Scattered toner recovery roller Auto-toner sensor Drum surface potential sensor Drum thermistor Drum Charger wire cleaner Main charger Discharge LED Drum cleaning blade Drum cleaning brush Recovered tonertransport auger Image quality sensor Drum recovery blade Drum separation finger Transfer belt driven roller Transfer belt power supply roller Transfer belt Transfer belt drive roller Transfer belt cleaning blade Transfer belt cleaning brush Exit roller Reverse/exit switching gate Reverse path roller-1 Reverse path roller-2
G5 G6 H1 H2 H3 H4 I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7 I8 I9 I10 J1 J2 J3 J4 J5 J6 J7 K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 K7 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 N1 N2 N3 N4 N5
Reverse sensor-1 Reverse sensor-2 Horizontal transport roller-1 Horizontal transport roller-2 Horizontal transport roller-3 Horizontal transport roller-4 Bypass pickup roller Bypass feed roller Bypass separation roller Bypass transport roller Registration roller Intermediate transfer roller Registration sensor Intermediate transport sensor Paper dust removal brush-1 Paper dust removal brush-2 1st drawer 1st drawer transport roller 1st drawer feed roller 1st drawer separation roller 1st drawer pickup roller 1st drawer transport sensor 1st drawer feed sensor 2nd drawer 2nd drawer transport roller 2nd drawer feed roller 2nd drawer separation roller 2nd drawer pickup roller 2nd drawer transport sensor 2nd drawer feed sensor 3rd drawer 3rd drawer transport roller / Tandem LCF transport roller 3rd drawer feed roller / Tandem LCF feed roller 3rd drawer separation roller / Tandem LCF separation roller 3rd drawer pickup roller / Tandem LCF pickup roller 3rd drawer transport sensor 3rd drawer feed sensor 4th drawer 4th drawer transport roller 4th drawer feed roller 4th drawer separation roller 4th drawer pickup roller 4th drawer transport sensor 4th drawer feed sensor Tandem LCF End fence home position sensor Standby side empty sensor Standby side mis-stacking sensor End fence stop position sensor
2-3
[B] Rear side view NAD and SAD models.
A11
D6
E13
E14
F7
F8
C10 I9
G7 J8 J9 K8 K9 I11 I10 G8
L8
L9 M8
M9
I12
Fig.2-3
2-4
TWD, ASD, ASU, AUD, MJD, CND and KRD models.
A11
D6
E13
E14
F7
F8
C10 I9
G7 J8 J9 K8 K9 I11 I10 G8
L8
L9 M8
M9
N6
N7
Fig.2-4
2-5
A11 C10 D6 E13 E14 F7 F8 G7 G8 I9 I10 I11 I12 J8 J9 K8 K9 L8 L9 M8 M9 N6 N7
Scan motor Fuser motor Developer unit motor Drum motor Cleaning brush drive motor Transfer belt motor Transfer belt cam motor Exit motor Reverse motor Registration motor Feed motor Tray-up motor-1 Tray-up motor-2 1st drawer transport clutch 1st drawer feed clutch 2nd drawer transport clutch 2nd drawer feed clutch 3rd drawer transport clutch 3rd drawer feed clutch 4th drawer transport clutch 4th drawer feed clutch Tandem LCF tray-up motor Tandem LCF end fence motor
2-6
2.2
Electric Parts Layout

2
1) Scanner unit a. A4 series
S5 S4 INV-EXP S6
M1 M23 SLG
CCD S3 S1 S2
EXP
Fig.2-5
2-7
b. LT series
S5 S4 INV-EXP S6
M1 M23 SLG
CCD S3 EXP S2
Fig.2-6
2-8
c. Heater, thermostat
THMO3 DH2
DH1
Fig.2-7
2-9
2) Control panel
KEY2 INV-LCD S7
KEY1
TCP/LCD
DSP
Fig.2-8
2 - 10
3) Laser unit a. e-STUDIO520/600/720
LDR1
PLG
M2 SNS
Fig.2-9
2 - 11
b. e-STUDIO850
LDR1 LDR2
PLG
GLV
M2 SNS
Fig.2-10
2 - 12
4) Fuser related section
THM3 THM2 THM1 THMO2 THMO1
M3 SW1
M4 IH-COIL
S9
S8
THM4
Fig.2-11
2 - 13
5) Toner cartridge related section
SW2
M5
S10
M6
Fig.2-12
2 - 14
6) Toner recycle / used toner recovery unit
S11
M8
M9 M7
Fig.2-13
2 - 15
7) Developer unit / drum / transfer belt unit related section a. Motor, sensor, switch, solenoid, lamp, thermistor
M10 M11 SW4 M13
S13 S12
SW3
M14 SOL1 THM5 S15
M12
S16
ERS
S14
M15
Fig.2-14
2 - 16
b. Heater, thermostat, PC board
DH3
FUS THMO4
Fig.2-15
2 - 17
8) Paper transport unit
M16
S18
S17
CLT3 M17 CLT2
CLT1
S21 S20 S19
Fig.2-16
2 - 18
9) Paper exit / reverse section
S22 S23
M18
M24
M19
MOT2-RV M25 S24 SW5
SOL2
Fig.2-17
2 - 19
10) Equipment (left view)
SW6 M27 SW11 M28 SW7
M29 IH
SW8 M26
Fig.2-18
2 - 20
11) Equipment (right view)
M32
M30
M31
S25 MOT2-MT
S26
Fig.2-19
2 - 21
12) Bypass feed unit
S27
CLT4
SOL3
S28
Fig.2-20
2 - 22
13) Paper feeding section
S31 S32 S33 S34
S30 M21 SOL7
CLT5 CLT6 S29 CLT7 CLT8 S35 M20 CLT9 CLT10 S41 CLT11 CLT12
S39 S38 S37 S36 S40
S47 S45 S44 S43 S42 S46 S48 S49 S50 S51 S52
M22
Fig.2-21
2 - 23
14) Tandem LCF
S72
SOL8
M42
M41
S73 S74 S75
S71
Fig.2-22
2 - 24
15) Equipment (rear view)
MOT HDD
M33
HVT
SYS
M34 M35 PS
LGC
Fig.2-23
2 - 25
16) AC input section a. e-STUDIO600/720: JPD model
NF1
BRK1
Fig.2-24
2 - 26
b. e-STUDIO850: JPD model
RLY BRK1 BRK2 NF2 NF1
Fig.2-25
2 - 27
c. e-STUDIO520: NAD model, e-STUDIO600/720: NAD/SAD/TWD model, e-STUDIO850: NAD/SAD model
NF1
FIL BRK1
Fig.2-26
2 - 28
d. e-STUDIO520: AUD/MJD model, e-STUDIO600/720/850: ASD/ASU/AUD/MJD/CND/KRD model, e-STUDIO850: TWD model
NF1
BRK1
Fig.2-27
2 - 29
17) Reversing automatic document feeder a. Sensor
S53 S54
S57 S56 S55 S58
Fig.2-28
b. Sensor
S61
S60
S59
S62
S63
Fig.2-29
2 - 30
c. Motor, sensor, switch, solenoid, PC board
SW10 ADF M37 M36
SOL4
M40
SW9
S64 M38 M39 S65 SOL5 SOL6
Fig.2-30
d. Sensor
S67
S66 S69 S68 S70
Fig.2-31
2 - 31
2.3
Symbols and Functions of Various Components
The column "P-I" shows the page and item number in the parts list. 1) Motors
Symbol M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8 M9 M10 M11 M12 M13 M14 M15 M16 M17 M18 M19 M20 M21 M22 Name SCAN-MOT Scan motor POL-MOT Polygonal motor FUS-MOT Fuser motor WEB-MOT Web motor TNR-MOT New toner supply motor TNR-TR-MOT New toner transport motor HOP-MOT Hopper motor RCY-TNR-MOT Recycle toner transport motor USD-TNR-MOT Used toner transport motor DEV-MOT Developer unit motor DRM-MOT Drum motor CH-CLN-MOT Wire cleaner drive motor DRM-CLN-MOT Cleaning brush drive motor TRB-MOT Transfer belt motor TRB-CAM-MOT Transfer belt cam motor RGST-MOT Registration motor MT-MOT Transport motor EXIT-MOT Exit motor REV-MOT Reverse motor FEED-MOT Feed motor CST-TRY-MOT1 Tray-up motor-1 CST-TRY-MOT2 Tray-up motor-2 Function Driving the carriages Driving the polygonal mirror Driving the fuser Reeling in the cleaning web Rotating the toner cartridge Transporting toner from the toner cartridge to the developer unit Driving the recycle toner hopper Transporting recycle toner from the drum cleaner unit to the toner hopper Transporting used toner scraped off from the transfer belt with the transfer belt cleaning blade Driving the developer Driving the drum Driving the charger wire cleaner Driving the cleaning brush and transporting recycle toner Driving the transfer belt Driving the contact/release movement of the transfer belt Driving the registration roller Driving the intermediate transport roller Driving the exit roller Driving the reverse section Driving the feed roller and pickup roller of each drawer or the bypass feed unit Lifting up the trays in the 1st and 2nd drawers Lifting up the trays in the 3rd and 4th drawers (Only for JPD/NAD/SAD model of all equipments and TWD model of e-STUDIO600/ 720) Cooling down the SLG board Cooling down the reverse section (rear side) Remarks Fig.2-5 Fig.2-6 Fig.2-9 Fig.2-10 Fig.2-11 Fig.2-11 Fig.2-12 Fig.2-12 Fig.2-13 Fig.2-13 Fig.2-13 Fig.2-14 Fig.2-14 Fig.2-14 Fig.2-14 Fig.2-14 Fig.2-14 Fig.2-16 Fig.2-16 Fig.2-17 Fig.2-17 Fig.2-21 Fig.2-21 Fig.2-21 P-I 35-6 32-1A 32-1B 24-5 25-16 45-27 45-26 47-15 47-15 46-2 42-22 41-18 39-8 31-12 18-26 18-7 16-26 17-2 13-24 13-5 6-2 6-20 6-20
M23 M24
SLG-FAN-MOT SLG board cooling fan REV-FAN-MOT1 Reverse section cooling fan-1
Fig.2-5 Fig.2-6 Fig.2-17
34-10 15-12
2 - 32
Symbol M25 M26 M27 M28 M29 M30 M31 M32 M33 M34 M35 M36 M37 M38 M39 M40 M41
Name REV-FAN-MOT2 Reverse section cooling fan-2 IH-FAN-MOT IH board cooling fan DCT-O-FAN-MOT Duct out fan FUS-FAN-MOT Fuser cooling fan EXIT-FAN-MOT Exit section cooling fan DCT-I-FAN-MOT Duct in fan DEV-FAN-MOT Developer unit fan LSU-FAN-MOT Laser unit cooling fan SYS-FAN-MOT SYS board cooling fan PS-FAN-MOT1 Switching regulator cooling fan-1 PS-FAN-MOT2 Switching regulator cooling fan-2 DF-READ-MOT Read motor DF-FEED-MOT Document feed motor DF-TRY-MOT Tray lift motor DF-L-EXIT-MOT Large original exit motor DF-S-EXIT-MOT Small original exit motor LCF-TRY-MOT Tandem LCF tray-up motor LCF-ENDF-MOT Tandem LCF end fence motor
Function Cooling down the reverse section (front side) Cooling down the IH board Suctioning ozone generated at charging Cooling down the fuser Cooling down the exit section Cooling down the developer unit Suctioning toner Cooling down the laser unit Cooling down the SYS board and hard disk Cooling down the switching regulator (rear side) Cooling down the switching regulator (lower side) Driving the read roller for originals Driving the feed roller, pickup belt and registration roller for originals Driving the original lifting tray Driving the large original exit roller and the intermediate reverse roller Driving the small original exit roller and the small original reverse roller Lifting up the tray in the tandem LCF (Only for ASD/ASU/AUD/MJD/CND/KRD model of all equipments and TWD model of e-STUDIO850) Driving the end fence in the tandem LCF (Only for ASD/ASU/AUD/MJD/CND/KRD model of all equipments and TWD model of e-STUDIO850)
Remarks Fig.2-17 Fig.2-18 Fig.2-18 Fig.2-18 Fig.2-18 Fig.2-19 Fig.2-19 Fig.2-19 Fig.2-23 Fig.2-23 Fig.2-23 Fig.2-30 Fig.2-30 Fig.2-30 Fig.2-30 Fig.2-30 Fig.2-22
P-I 15-12 24-17 33-3 33-3 33-3 42-25 42-13 32-9 54-8 52-14 52-14 83-27 86-19 86-20 87-14 87-13 31-34
M42
Fig.2-22
9-22
2 - 33 05/07
2) Sensors and switches

Symbol S1-5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 S11 S12 S13 Name APS1-3, APS-C, APS-R Automatic original detection sensor HOME-SNR Carriage home position sensor TEMP/HUMI-SNR Temperature/humidity sensor WEB-SNR Web detection sensor FUS-TR-SNR Fuser transport sensor TNR-EMP-SNR Toner cartridge empty sensor USD-TNR-FLL-SNR Toner bag full detection sensor ATTNR-SNR Auto-toner sensor DRUM-SUF-SNR Drum surface potential sensor Function Detecting original sizes Detecting the carriage home position Detecting the ambient temperature/humidity of the equipment Detecting the reeled amount of the cleaning web Detecting the transporting status of paper at the fuser unit Detecting the remaining amount of new toner Detecting the full status of used toner in the toner bag Remarks Fig.2-5 Fig.2-6 Fig.2-5 Fig.2-6 Fig.2-8 Fig.2-11 Fig.2-11 Fig.2-12 Fig.2-13 Fig.2-14 Fig.2-14 P-I 38-7 34-14 34-101 3-34 25-112 25-112 45-56 46-17 44-26 5-13
S14 S15 S16 S17 S18 S19 S20 S21 S22 S23 S24 S25 S26
Detecting the toner density in the developer unit Detecting the drum surface potential at charging (This sensor is composed of the detection section and the board section) TNR-LVL-SNR Detecting the density of toner image (test Image quality sensor pattern) developed on the drum surface Detecting the releasing status of the transTRB-SNR2 Transfer belt release detec- fer belt tion sensor TRB-SNR1 Detecting the contacting status of the transTransfer belt contact detec- fer belt tion sensor MID-TR-SNR Detecting the paper transport between the Intermediate transport sen- paper feeding system and the registration sor roller RGST-SNR Detecting the paper transport at the regisRegistration sensor tration roller section HRZ-TR-SNR1 Detecting the paper transport at the Horizontal transport senentrance of the horizontal transport path sor-1 Detecting the paper transport at the middle HRZ-TR-SNR2 of the horizontal transport path Horizontal transport sensor-2 HRZ-TR-SNR3 Detecting the paper transport at the exit of Horizontal transport senthe horizontal transport path sor-3 EXIT-SNR Detecting paper exit Exit sensor REV-SNR1 Detecting the paper transport at the upper Reverse sensor-1 section of the reverse transport path REV-SNR2 Detecting the paper transport at the lower Reverse sensor-2 section of the reverse transport path SFB-COV-SNR Detecting the opening/closing status of the Bypass feed unit cover bypass feed unit cover sensor FEED-COV-SNR Detecting the opening/closing status of the Feed cover sensor feed cover
Fig.2-14 Fig.2-14 Fig.2-14 Fig.2-16 Fig.2-16 Fig.2-16 Fig.2-16 Fig.2-16 Fig.2-17 Fig.2-17 Fig.2-17 Fig.2-19 Fig.2-19
50-16 18-2 18-3 17-5 16-6 20-23 20-23 20-23 15-25 15-14 15-14 29-7 29-7
2 - 34
Symbol S27 S28 S29 S30 S31 S32 S33 S34 S35 S36 S37 S38 S39 S40 S41 S42
Name SFB-FEED-SNR Bypass feed sensor SFB-SIZE-SNR Bypass paper size detection sensor CST1-SNR 1st drawer detection sensor CST1-BTM-SNR 1st drawer bottom sensor CST1-EMP-SNR 1st drawer empty sensor CST1-TRY-SNR 1st drawer tray-up sensor CST1-TR-SNR 1st drawer transport sensor CST1-FEED-SNR 1st drawer feed sensor CST2-SNR 2nd drawer detection sensor CST2-BTM-SNR 2nd drawer bottom sensor CST2-EMP-SNR 2nd drawer empty sensor CST2-TRY-SNR 2nd drawer tray-up sensor CST2-TR-SNR 2nd drawer transport sensor CST2-FEED-SNR 2nd drawer feed sensor CST3-SNR 3rd drawer detection sensor CST3-BTM-SNR 3rd drawer bottom sensor
Function Detecting the presence of the paper on the bypass feed unit Detecting the width of the paper on the bypass feed unit Detecting the presence of the 1st drawer Detecting the lowering status of the tray in the 1st drawer Detecting the presence of the paper in the 1st drawer Detecting the lifting status of the tray in the 1st drawer Detecting the paper transport at the paper feeding system of the 1st drawer Detecting the paper feeding status of the 1st drawer Detecting the presence of the 2nd drawer Detecting the lowering status of the tray in the 2nd drawer Detecting the presence of the paper in the 2nd drawer Detecting the lifting status of the tray in the 2nd drawer Detecting the paper transport at the paper feeding system of the 2nd drawer Detecting the paper feeding status of the 2nd drawer Detecting the presence of the 3rd drawer or the tandem LCF Detecting the lowering status of the tray in the 3rd drawer (Only for JPD/NAD/SAD model of all equipments and TWD model of e-STUDIO600/ 720) Detecting the presence of the paper in the 3rd drawer or the tandem LCF Detecting the lifting status of the tray in the 3rd drawer or the tandem LCF Detecting the paper transport at the paper feeding system of the 3rd drawer or the tandem LCF Detecting the paper feeding status of the 3rd drawer or the tandem LCF Detecting the presence of the 4th drawer (Only for JPD/NAD/SAD model of all equipments and TWD model of e-STUDIO600/ 720)
Remarks Fig.2-20 Fig.2-20 Fig.2-21 Fig.2-21 Fig.2-21 Fig.2-21 Fig.2-21 Fig.2-21 Fig.2-21 Fig.2-21 Fig.2-21 Fig.2-21 Fig.2-21 Fig.2-21 Fig.2-21 Fig.2-21
P-I 10-23 12-9 7-18 30-26 7-18 7-18 7-18 7-18 7-18 30-26 7-18 7-18 7-18 7-18 7-18 30-26
S43 S44 S45 S46 S47
CST3-EMP-SNR 3rd drawer / tandem LCF empty sensor CST3-TRY-SNR 3rd drawer / tandem LCF tray-up sensor CST3-TR-SNR 3rd drawer / tandem LCF transport sensor CST3-FEED-SNR 3rd drawer / tandem LCF feed sensor CST4-SNR 4th drawer detection sensor
Fig.2-21 Fig.2-21 Fig.2-21 Fig.2-21 Fig.2-21
7-18 7-18 7-18 7-18 7-18
2 - 35
Symbol S48
Name CST4-BTM-SNR 4th drawer bottom sensor
S49
CST4-EMP-SNR 4th drawer empty sensor
S50
CST4-TRY-SNR 4th drawer tray-up sensor
S51
CST4-TR-SNR 4th drawer transport sensor CST4-FEED-SNR 4th drawer feed sensor
S52
S53 S54 S55 S56 S57 S58 S59 S60 S61 S62 S63 S64 S65 S66
DF-TRY-SNR Original tray sensor DF-TRY-VR-SNR Original tray width sensor DF-RGST-SNR Original registration sensor DF-SIZE-SNR1 Original width detection sensor-1 DF-SIZE-SNR2 Original width detection sensor-2 DF-SIZE-SNR3 Original width detection sensor-3 DF-U-LMT-SNR Lifting tray upper limit detection sensor DF-EMP-SNR Original empty sensor DF-COV-SNR Jam access cover sensor DF-L-LMT-SNR Lifting tray lower limit detection sensor DF-LENG-SNR Original length detection sensor DF-APS-SNR APS operation sensor DF-OPN-SNR RADF opening/closing sensor DF-SD-REV-SNR Small original reverse sensor
Function Detecting the lowering status of the tray in the 4th drawer (Only for JPD/NAD/SAD model of all equipments and TWD model of e-STUDIO600/ 720) Detecting the presence of the paper in the 4th drawer (Only for JPD/NAD/SAD model of all equipments and TWD model of e-STUDIO600/ 720) Detecting the lifting status of the tray in the 4th drawer (Only for JPD/NAD/SAD model of all equipments and TWD model of e-STUDIO600/ 720) Detecting the paper transport at the paper feeding system of the 4th drawer (Only for JPD/NAD/SAD model of all equipments and TWD model of e-STUDIO600/ 720) Detecting the paper feeding status of the 4th drawer (Only for JPD/NAD/SAD model of all equipments and TWD model of e-STUDIO600/ 720) Detecting the length of the original set on the original feeding tray Detecting the width of the original set on the original feeding tray Detecting the transporting status of the original at the registration roller section Detecting the width of the original Detecting the width of the original Detecting the width of the original Detecting the upper limit position of the original lifting tray Detecting the presence of the original set on the original feeding tray Detecting the opening/closing status of the jam access cover Detecting the lower limit position of the original lifting tray Detecting the length of the original Switching ON/OFF of the APS sensor by detecting the angle of the RADF Detecting the opening/closing status of the RADF Detecting the transporting status of the original at the small original reverse section
Remarks Fig.2-21
P-I 30-26
Fig.2-21
7-18
Fig.2-21
7-18
Fig.2-21
7-18
Fig.2-21
7-18
Fig.2-28 Fig.2-28 Fig.2-28 Fig.2-28 Fig.2-28 Fig.2-28 Fig.2-29 Fig.2-29 Fig.2-29 Fig.2-29 Fig.2-29 Fig.2-30 Fig.2-30 Fig.2-31
93-102 93-14 91-103 91-103 91-103 91-103 81-29 81-29 81-29 82-36 82-31 86-105 89-101 84-31
2 - 36
Symbol S67 S68 S69 S70 S71
Name DF-SD-EXIT-SNR Small original exit sensor DF-LD-EXIT-SNR Large original exit sensor DF-READ-SNR Read sensor DF-MID-TR-SNR Original intermediate transport sensor LCF-BTM-SNR Tandem LCF bottom sensor LCF-MST-SNR Standby side mis-stacking sensor LCF-ENDF-HP-SNR End fence home position sensor LCF-EMP-SNR Standby side empty sensor
S72
S73
S74
S75
LCF-ENDF-STP-SNR End fence stop position sensor FSR-SW Fuser detection switch TNR-SW Toner cartridge detection switch DEV-SW Developer unit detection switch CH-CLN-POS-SW Wire cleaner position detection switch EXIT-COV-SW Exit cover switch MAIN-SW Main switch U-FRNT-COV-SW Front cover switch COV-INTLCK-SW Cover interlock switch
SW1
SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8
Function Detecting the exiting status of small originals Detecting the exiting status of large originals Detecting the leading edge of the original at the original scanning section Detecting the transporting status of the original at the intermediate transport roller section Detecting the lowering status of the tray in the tandem LCF (Only for ASD/ASU/AUD/MJD/CND/KRD model of all equipments and TWD model of e-STUDIO850) Detecting the paper mis-stacking at the standby side of the tandem LCF (Only for ASD/ASU/AUD/MJD/CND/KRD model of all equipments and TWD model of e-STUDIO850) Detecting the end fence home position in the tandem LCF (Only for ASD/ASU/AUD/MJD/CND/KRD model of all equipments and TWD model of e-STUDIO850) Detecting the presence of the paper at the standby side of the tandem LCF (Only for ASD/ASU/AUD/MJD/CND/KRD model of all equipments and TWD model of e-STUDIO850) Detecting the end fence stop position in the tandem LCF (Only for ASD/ASU/AUD/MJD/CND/KRD model of all equipments and TWD model of e-STUDIO850) Supplying or shutting off AC power to the damp heater according to the installation status of the fuser unit (Not installed: Shut off) Detecting the presence of the toner cartridge Detecting the presence of the developer unit Detecting the stop position of the charger wire cleaner Detecting the opening/closing status of the left lower cover Turning the power of the equipment ON/ OFF Detecting the opening/closing status of the front cover (upper) Supplying or shutting off AC power to the switching regulator (voltage-generating circuit interlocked with these covers) according to the opening/closing status of the front cover (lower) or left lower cover (Cover open: Shut off)
Remarks Fig.2-31 Fig.2-31 Fig.2-31 Fig.2-31 Fig.2-22
P-I 84-105 85-15 83-36 90-103 8-14
Fig.2-22
8-14
Fig.2-22
8-14
Fig.2-22
9-37
Fig.2-22
8-14
Fig.2-11
24-9
Fig.2-12 Fig.2-14 Fig.2-14 Fig.2-17 Fig.2-18 Fig.2-18 Fig.2-18
45-18 5-16 39-13 15-11 29-11 29-108 29-24
2 - 37
Symbol SW9
SW10
SW11
Function Supplying or shutting off 24 V voltage according to the opening/closing status of the RADF (RADF open: Shut off) DF-COV-INTLCK-SW Supplying and shutting off 24 V voltage Jam access cover opening/ according to the opening/closing status of closing switch the jam access cover (Cover open: Shut off) TNR-MOT-INTLCK-SW Supplying or shutting off 24 V voltage to the Toner motor interlock new toner supply motor (M5) according to switch the opening/closing status of the front cover (upper) (Cover open : Shut off)
Name DF-OPN-INTLCK-SW RADF opening/closing switch
Remarks Fig.2-30
P-I 88-101
Fig.2-30
86-13
Fig.2-18
29-109
3) Electromagnetic spring clutches

Symbol CLT1 CLT2 CLT3 CLT4 CLT5 CLT6 CLT7 CLT8 CLT9 CLT10 CLT11 Name HRZ-DR-CLT1 Horizontal transport section driving clutch-1 HRZ-DR-CLT2 Horizontal transport section driving clutch-2 HRZ-DR-CLT3 Horizontal transport section driving clutch-3 SFB-FEED-CLT Bypass feed clutch CST1-TR-CLT 1st drawer transport clutch CST1-FEED-CLT 1st drawer feed clutch CST2-TR-CLT 2nd drawer transport clutch CST2-FEED-CLT 2nd drawer feed clutch CST3-TR-CLT 3rd drawer / tandem LCF transport clutch CST3-FEED-CLT 3rd drawer / tandem LCF feed clutch CST4-TR-CLT 4th drawer transport clutch CST4-FEED-CLT 4th drawer feed clutch Function Driving the horizontal transport section (transmitting the power of the fuser unit motor) Driving the horizontal transport rollers-1 and -2 Driving the horizontal transport rollers-3 and -4 Driving the transport roller, separation roller, feed roller and pickup roller of the bypass feed unit Driving the transport roller of the 1st drawer Driving the separation roller, feed roller and pickup roller of the 1st drawer Driving the transport roller of the 2nd drawer Driving the separation roller, feed roller and pickup roller of the 2nd drawer Driving the transport roller of the 3rd drawer or the tandem LCF Driving the separation roller, feed roller and pickup roller of the 3rd drawer or the tandem LCF Driving the transport roller of the 4th drawer (Only for JPD/NAD/SAD model of all equipments and TWD model of e-STUDIO600/ 720) Driving the separation roller, feed roller and pickup roller of the 4th drawer (Only for JPD/NAD/SAD model of all equipments and TWD model of e-STUDIO600/ 720) Remarks Fig.2-16 Fig.2-16 Fig.2-16 Fig.2-20 Fig.2-21 Fig.2-21 Fig.2-21 Fig.2-21 Fig.2-21 Fig.2-21 Fig.2-21 P-I 19-21 20-21 20-21 11-13 7-26 7-26 7-26 7-26 7-26 7-26 7-26
CLT12
Fig.2-21
7-26
2 - 38
4) Solenoids
Symbol SOL1 SOL2 SOL3 SOL4 SOL5 SOL6 SOL7 Name SPRT-FING-SOL Drum separation finger solenoid GATE-SOL Gate solenoid SFB-SOL Bypass pickup solenoid DF-SD-SOL Small original exit solenoid DF-LD-SOL Large original exit solenoid DENG-SOL Large original exit roller release solenoid LCF-PICK-SOL Tandem LCF pickup solenoid LCF-ENDF-SOL Tandem LCF end fence solenoid Function Driving the drum separation fingers Driving the exit/reverse gate Driving the lifting movement of the bypass pickup roller Driving the small original exit flapper Driving the large original exit flapper Driving the contact/release movement of the large original exit roller Driving the lifting movement of the tandem LCF pickup roller (Only for ASD/ASU/AUD/MJD/CND/KRD model of all equipments and TWD model of e-STUDIO850) Driving of the lever to detect the paper misstacking at the standby side of the tandem LCF (Only for ASD/ASU/AUD/MJD/CND/KRD model of all equipments and TWD model of e-STUDIO850) Remarks Fig.2-14 Fig.2-17 Fig.2-20 Fig.2-30 Fig.2-30 Fig.2-30 Fig.2-21 P-I 31-17 15-2 10-8 87-1 88-7 89-3 89-4 7-36
SOL8
Fig.2-22
8-9
5) PC boards
Symbol CCD SLG DSP KEY1 KEY2 PLG LDR1 LDR2 SNS FUS Name PWA-F-CCD CCD driving PC board (CCD board) PWA-F-SLG Scanning section control PC board (SLG board) PWA-F-DSP Display PC board (DSP board) PWA-F-KEY1 Key PC board-1 (KEY1 board) PWA-F-KEY2 Key PC board-2 (KEY2 board) PWA-F-PLG Laser control PC board (PLG board) PWA-F-LDR1 Laser driving PC board-1 (LDR1 board) PWA-F-LDR2 Laser driving PC board-2 (LDR2 board) PWA-F-SNS H-sync detection PC board (SNS board) PWA-F-FUS Fuse PC board (FUS board) Function Scanning originals with CCD Controlling the scanning section Controlling the whole control panel Mounting the key switches and LEDs (at the center and right side of the control panel) Mounting the key switches (at the left side of the control panel) Controlling the laser unit Driving the laser diode Driving the laser diode (Only for e-STUDIO850) Detecting the laser beam position Relaying power to the drum damp heater (Optional for NAD/MJD model, standard for other models) Remarks Fig.2-5 Fig.2-6 Fig.2-5 Fig.2-6 Fig.2-8 Fig.2-8 Fig.2-8 Fig.2-9 Fig.2-10 Fig.2-9 Fig.2-10 Fig.2-10 Fig.2-9 Fig.2-10 Fig.2-15 P-I 34-1 38-1 3-29 3-31 3-32 32-7A 32-7B 32-1A 32-1B 32-1B 32-1A 32-1B 21-30
2 - 39
Symbol IH MOT MOT2MT MOT2RV SYS LGC FIL
Name PWA-F-IH Heater control PC board (IH board) PWA-F-MOT Motor driving PC board (MOT board) PWA-F-MOT2-MT Transport motor driving PC board (MOT2-MT board) PWA-F-MOT2-RV Reverse motor driving PC board (MOT2-RV board) PWA-F-SYS System control PC board (SYS board) PWA-F-LGC Logic PC board (LGC board) PWA-F-FIL Filter PC board (FIL board) PWA-F-ADF RADF control PC board (ADF board)
Function Controlling the IH coil of the fuser unit Controlling the drive of the drum motor and the transfer belt motor Controlling the drive of the transport motor Controlling the drive of the reverse motor Controlling the whole system and image processing Controlling the print engine section Filtering out the AC power noise (Only for NAD/SAD model of all equipments and TWD model of e-STUDIO600/ 720) Controlling the RADF
Remarks Fig.2-18 Fig.2-23 Fig.2-19 Fig.2-17 Fig.2-23 Fig.2-23 Fig.2-26
P-I 24-16 41-22 17-10 13-19 54-2 53-2 52-6A
ADF
Fig.2-30
88-13
6) Lamps and heaters

Symbol EXP ERS IH-COIL DH1 DH2 DH3 Name LP-EXPO Exposure lamp LP-ERS Discharge LED IH-COIL IH coil SCN-DH-L Scanner damp heater (Left) SCN-DH-R Scanner damp heater (Right) DRM-DH Drum damp heater Function Exposing originals Eliminating residual charge on the drum surface Heating up the fuser roller Preventing condensation of the mirrors of the carriage Preventing condensation of the lens Preventing condensation of the drum Remarks Fig.2-5 Fig.2-6 Fig.2-14 Fig.2-11 Fig.2-7 Fig.2-7 Fig.2-15 P-I 36-3 39-11 26-5 38-9 38-10 21-28
7) Thermistors and thermostats

Symbol THM1 THM2 THM3 THM4 THM5 Name THMS-F-HTR Fuser roller front thermistor THMS-C-HTR Fuser roller center thermistor THMS-R-HTR Fuser roller rear thermistor THMS-L-HTR Pressure roller thermistor THMS-DRM Drum thermistor Function Detecting the surface temperature of the front end of the fuser roller Detecting the surface temperature of the center of the fuser roller Detecting the surface temperature of the rear end of the fuser roller Detecting the surface temperature of the pressure roller Detecting the ambient temperature of the drum surface Remarks Fig.2-11 Fig.2-11 Fig.2-11 Fig.2-11 Fig.2-14 P-I 27-6 27-6 27-6 27-28 50-12
2 - 40
Symbol THMO1 THMO2 THMO3 THMO4
Name THERMO-C-HTR Fuser roller center thermostat THERMO-S-HTR Fuser roller side thermostat THERMO-SCN-DH Scanner damp heater thermostat THERMO-DRM-DH Drum damp heater thermostat
Function Preventing overheating of the inside of the fuser unit Preventing overheating of the inside of the fuser unit Controlling the temperature of the scanner damp heater Controlling the temperature of the drum damp heater
Remarks Fig.2-11 Fig.2-11 Fig.2-7 Fig.2-15
P-I 27-4 27-4 38-9 21-31
8) Transformer
Symbol HVT Name PS-HVT High-voltage transformer Function Generating high-voltage and supplying it to the following sections: Main charger wire Main charger grid Developer bias Transfer bias Drum cleaning brush Remarks Fig.2-23 P-I 53-7
9) Others
Symbol INV-EXP LCD TCP INV-LCD GLV HDD PS NF1 Name INV-EXP Lamp inverter board LCD LCD panel TCP Touch panel INV-LCD LCD inverter board MIR-GLV Galvanic mirror HDD Hard disk PS-ACC Switching regurator NS-FIL1 Noise filter-1 NS-FIL2 Noise filter-2 BREAKER1 Breaker-1 BREAKER2 Breaker-2 RELEY Relay Function Controlling the exposure lamp Displaying each information Entering each information Controlling the LCD panel (touch panel) Adjusting the beam angle of the 2nd laser (Only for e-STUDIO850) Saving program data and image data Generating DC voltage and supplying it to each section of the equipment Filtering out the noise of the input AC power Filtering out the noise of the AC power supplied to the fuser unit (Only for JPD model of e-STUDIO850) Preventing overcurrent to the equipment Remarks Fig.2-5 Fig.2-6 Fig.2-8 Fig.2-8 Fig.2-8 Fig.2-10 Fig.2-23 Fig.2-23 Fig.2-24 Fig.2-25 Fig.2-26 Fig.2-27 Fig.2-25 Fig.2-24 Fig.2-25 Fig.2-26 Fig.2-27 Fig.2-25 Fig.2-25 P-I 36-4 3-14 3-28 3-30 32-1B 54-11 52-14 52-4 52-4B 52-12A 52-4 52-3A 52-12B 52-101A 52-3B 52-110
NF2 BRK1
BRK2 RLY
Preventing overcurrent to the fuser unit (Only for JPD model of e-STUDIO850) Controlling AC power supplied to the fuser unit (Only for JPD model of e-STUDIO850)
2 - 41
2.4
SYS board
ADF board 8 8 IC2 IC17 System CPU Clock buffer Download jig (ADF) LAN IC18 Ether PHY
FAX ASIC 8 16 IC1 ADF CPU 8

[1]
SLG board
Download jig (SLG)
32 64 32 IC16 North bridge (System controller) 16 8 RTC Battery 16 IC7 SRAM Image data AFE 32 IC12,15 Flash ROM IC18 SRAM IC16 ASIC AFE 8 IC11 Flash ROM DDR DIMM IC10 Scanner CPU
64
Parallel interface kit PCI slot

[0]
IC3 EEPROM
Scrambler board 32 64 32 Wireless LAN adapter IC22 ASIC
CCD board Image data
16 16 16
IC4 CCD Image data

IC335 ASIC 32 Download jig (SYS) 16
System Block Diagram
HDD
Bluetooth module
USB (device)
PLG board
*2 PWM Image data
LDR1 board IC1 ASIC D/A converter Laser diode
PC
IC29,30 SDRAM IC23 ASIC 8 Image data Image data IC32 ASIC IC9 FRAM
USB (host)
Fig.2-32
2 - 42
Internal USB (host)
Dongle
LDR2 board Image data IC1 ASIC
- Printer kit - Printer/Scanner kit - Scanner kit Dongle Data overwrite kit
*1 Laser diode
Control panel 8 16 IC22 Flash ROM 8 Download jig (PLG) 8 IC56 ASIC Download jig (PFC) 16 IC41 Flash ROM Download jig (MAIN) 16 IC58 Main CPU 8 16 IC48 Flash ROM 8 8 16 8 SNS board *2 Laser beam sensor
LGC board
8
I/O
IC95 PLD
IC26 SRAM
SNS board D/A converter IC17 SRAM IC25 Laser CPU IC35 8 IC27 NVRAM D/A converter Galvanic mirror driver *1 Galvanic mirror IC7 ASIC
*1 Laser beam sensor
- Motors - Sensors - Switches - Clutches - Solenoids and others 16 8 IC30 SRAM
*1
External LCF
IC57 PFC CPU
- Finisher - Inserter - Hole punch unit
IPC board
: Option
*1: Only for e-STUDIO850 *2: Only for e-STUDIO520/600/720
2.5
[A] (1)
Installation and Replacement of Covers

Front cover (Upper/Lower) Open the front cover (upper). Turn 2 hinge pins to point at the front side and pull them out upward. Then take off the front cover (upper).
Front cover (upper)
Fig.2-33
(2)
Open the front cover (lower). Then take off the cover by lifting it up.
Front cover (lower)
Fig.2-34
[B] (1) (2)
Front right inner cover Take off the front cover ( P.2-43 "[A] Front cover (Upper/Lower)"). Remove 2 screws to take off the front right inner cover.
Front right inner cover
Fig.2-35
2 - 43
[C] Top right cover (1) (2) Remove 1 screw and open the RADF. Slide the cover to the rear side to release the hook, and then take off the top right cover.
Top right cover
Fig.2-36
[D] Top left cover (1) (2) Remove 1 screw and open the RADF. Slide the cover to the rear side to release the hook, and then take off the top left cover.
Top left cover
Fig.2-37
[E] (1) (2) (3) (4)
Top rear cover Take off the RADF ( P.16-85 "[A] Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (RADF) unit"). Take off the top right cover ( P.2-44 "[C] Top right cover"). Take off the top left cover ( P.2-44 "[D] Top left cover"). Remove 2 screws to take off the top rear cover.
Top rear cover
Fig.2-38
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC
2 - 44
[F] (1) (2)
Right upper cover Take off the top right cover ( P.2-44 "[C] Top right cover"). Remove 2 screws to take off the right upper cover.
Right upper cover
Fig.2-39
[G] Right center cover (1) (2) Open the bypass tray. Remove 8 screws to take off the right center cover.
Right center cover
Fig.2-40
[H] Right rear cover (1) Remove 2 screws and take off the right rear cover.
Right rear cover
Fig.2-41
March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
2 - 45
[I] (1) (2)
Left upper cover Take off the top left cover ( P.2-44 "[D] Top left cover"). Remove 2 screws to take off the left upper cover.
Left upper cover
Fig.2-42
[J] (1)
Left lower cover (Exit cover) Remove 6 screws to take off the left lower cover.
Left lower cover (Exit cover)
Fig.2-43
[K] (1)
Left rear cover Remove 1 screw to take off the left rear cover.
Left rear cover
Fig.2-44
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC
2 - 46
[L] (1) (2)
Rear cover Loosen 1 screw fixing the ozone filter. Remove 7 screws. Then release 2 hooks to take off the rear cover.
Rear cover
Fig.2-45
2 - 47
2.6
[A] (1)
Installation and Separation of PC Boards

System control PC board (SYS board) / SYS board case
Take off the rear cover ( P.2-47 "[L] Rear cover"). (2) Remove 2 screws. (3) Loosen 10 screws and take off the SYS board cover by sliding it upward. Note: A cooling fan is installed on the SYS board cover. Therefore be sure not to pull the harnesses connecting to the fan. (4) Disconnect the connector of the cooling fan from the SYS board.
SYS board cover
Fig.2-46
(5)
Remove 5 screws to take off the leaf spring.

Leaf spring
Fig.2-47
(6) (7)
Disconnect 7 connectors of the SYS board. Remove 6 screws to take off the SYS board.
SYS board
Fig.2-48
2 - 48
(8)
Remove 6 screws to take off the SYS board case. Notes: 1. When any option is installed, take off the option first and then take off the SYS board. 2. The SYS board case can be taken off without removing the SYS board. (In this case, remove 7 screws)
SYS board case
Fig.2-49
[B] (1) (2)
Logic PC board (LGC board) Take off the rear cover ( P.2-47 "[L] Rear cover"). Loosen 8 screws and take off the LGC board cover by sliding it to the right side.
LGC board cover
Fig.2-50
(3) (4)
Disconnect 20 connectors of the LGC board. Remove 6 screws to take off the LGC board.
LGC board
Fig.2-51
2 - 49
[C] Hard disk (HDD) (1) Take off the rear cover ( P.2-47 "[L] Rear cover"). (2) Remove the SYS board cover ( P.2-48 "[A] System control PC board (SYS board) / SYS board case"). (3) Disconnect 2 connectors and remove 1 screw to take off the ground wire. (4) Remove 4 screws to take off the HDD with its bracket. Note: Be sure that any vibration is not transmitted to the HDD.
Fig.2-52
HDD
(5) Remove 4 screws and take off the HDD. (6) Remove 1 screw to remove the ground wire. Note: When installing the HDD, be sure that the ground wire is not contacting the bracket.
Bracket HDD
Fig.2-53
[D] High-voltage transformer (HVT) / LGC board case (1) (2) (3) (4) Take off the rear cover ( P.2-47 "[L] Rear cover"). Take off the LGC board cover ( P.2-49 "[B] Logic PC board (LGC board)" ). Disconnect 20 connectors of the LGC board. Remove 6 screws and take off the LGC board case with the board.
LGC board case
Fig.2-54
2 - 50
(5) (6)
Disconnect 6 connectors of the high-voltage transformer. Remove 1 screw and release 3 locking supports to take off the high-voltage transformer.
Locking support
High-voltage transformer
Fig.2-55
[E] (1) (2) (3)
Switching regulator (PS) Take off the rear cover ( P.2-47 "[L] Rear cover"). Disconnect 1 connector to release the harness from the clamp. Remove 4 screws and take off the switching regulator cover.
Clamp
Switching regurator cover

Fig.2-56
(4) (5)
Disconnect 7 connectors. Release the hook to take off the switching regulator. Note: When installing or taking off the switching regulator and its cover, be sure that their harnesses are not caught.
Switching regurator
Fig.2-57
2 - 51
2.7
[A] (1) (2)
Removal and Installation of Options

Finisher Shut down the equipment and unplug the power cable. Take off the connector cover and unplug the interface cable.
Connector cover
Interface cable
Fig.2-58
(3)
Remove 1 screw and take off the finisher from the slide rail. Note: When moving the finisher unit by itself, be careful that it does not topple over.
Slide rail
Fig.2-59
[B] (1) (2)
Large Capacity Feeder (LCF) Shut down the equipment and unplug the power cable. Press the button to separate the Large Capacity Feeder (LCF) from the equipment.
Fig.2-60
2 - 52
(3)
Remove 1 screw and take off the connector cover.
Connector cover
2
Screw
Fig.2-61
(4)
Disconnect the interface cable of the Large Capacity Feeder (LCF).
Interface cable
Fig.2-62
(5)
Remove 2 fixing screws on the rear side.
Screw
Fig.2-63
2 - 53
(6)
Remove 2 fixing screws on the front side.
Screw
Fig.2-64
(7)
Lift the Large Capacity Feeder (LCF) and take it off from the slide rail. Note: Be careful when lifting the Large Capacity Feeder (LCF) because it is heavy.
Fig.2-65
2 - 54
3.
3.1
COPY PROCESS
General Description
Image processing
(2)
Original exposure Xenon lamp 29W
(3)
Scanning CCD 600 dpi,7500 pixel
(4)
3
Writing Semiconductive laser
Pw=3.9 nJ/mm2 (520/600/720) Pw=3.0 nJ/mm2 (850)
(1) Charging (grid voltage)

-500V(-300V~-900V)
Toner Carrier
(10)
Discharge LED array

(Wavelength 660nm x14pcs)
(5) Development Magnetic roller
(9)
Blade cleaning
Bias
-394V(-200~-800)DC+AC
(8) (7) Discharging
Brush cleaning
Fusing Fuser roller 700~1450W
Transfer/Separation (6) 70 A (520/600/720)

85 A (850)
Bypass feeding Drawer feeding LCF feeding
Cleaning brush + Blade 5 A
Fig.3-1
(1) Charging: Negatively charges the surface of the photoconductive drum.
(2) Original exposure: Converts images on the original into optical signals. (3) Scanning: Converts image optical signals into electrical signals. (4) Writing: Converts image electrical signals into optical signals (laser emission) and exposes them to the surface of the photoconductive drum. (5) Development: Makes the negatively-charged toner adhere to the photoconductive drum and forms a visible image.
(6) Transfer: Transfers the visible image on the photoconductive drum onto paper. Separation: Separates the paper from the drum together with the toner. (7) Fusing: Fuses the toner onto the paper by applying heat and pressure. (8) Brush cleaning: Cleans dirt and paper dust on the drum. (9) Blade cleaning: Forcibly removes the residual toner on the drum. (10)Discharging: Discharges any remaining negative charge on the drum.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 COPY PROCESS
3-1
3.2
Details of Copy Process
(1) Photoconductive drum The photoconductive drum consists of two layers, an outer and an inner layer. The outer layer is a photoconductive layer made of an organic photoconductive carrier (OPC). The inner layer is an aluminum conductive base in a cylindrical form. The photoconductive carrier has the characteristic that its electrical resistance changes depending on the strength of the light exposed. Example: Strong light Resistance is decreased (works as a conductor.) Weak light Resistance is increased (works as an insulator.)
Photoconductive layer Aluminum conductive base Structure of the photoconductive drum (OPC)
Fig.3-2
[Formation of electrostatic latent image] In the processes of charging, scanning, printing and discharging described later, negative potential on the areas of the drum corresponding to black areas of the original is eliminated, while the areas of the drum corresponding to white areas remains the negative charge. As this image on the drum formed by the negative potential is invisible, it is called an electrostatic latent image.
Time (t)
0
Surface potential (V)
Black area of original

-300
White area of original

-600
Discharge Charging process process
Electric potential on the photoconductive drum

Fig.3-3
3-2
(2) Charging Charging is a process of applying a charge uniformly to the photoconductive drum surface. The charger wire produces a negative corona discharge, which is controlled by the grid so that the drum surface is uniformly charged with negative potential. The surface potential on the drum is determined by the grid potential and controlled to a certain value by the grid control circuit.
Main charger
Rotation of drum
Grid control circuit

Fig.3-4
(3) Scanning Scanning is a process of exposing the original to the light and converting the reflection into electrical signals. The light reflected from the original is imported to the charge coupled device (CCD) and this optical image information is converted into electrical signals (image signals), which are then sent to the image processing section.
CCD
Image processing section
Fig.3-5
(Example) CCD light receiving amount Light Value of image signals to be output 255 Difference between "light " and "dark" is divided into 256 steps. Dark 0
Fig.3-6
3-3
(4) Writing Writing is a process of converting the image signals sent from the image processing section into optical signals and exposing the drum surface to the light. Semiconductor laser element converts image signals sent from the image processing section into optical signals (laser emission) and exposes the drum surface to the light to form an electrostatic latent image on it.
Laser driving PC board
Polygonal mirror Semiconductor laser element
Photoconductive drum
Fig.3-7
(5) Development Development is a process of making the electrostatic latent images visible to the eye (visible images). Developer material is supplied to the photoconductive drum surface by magnetic roller. The toner in the developer material adheres to the areas on the drum surface where the potential is lower than the developer bias which is applied to the magnetic roller (reverse development method).
Drum Magnetic roller Magnetic roller Magnet
Toner Carrier (always attracted onto the magnet)
Fig.3-8
Toner Bias voltage -394V (-200 to -800V) DC+AC
Toner Photoconductive drum
Photoconductive layer Aluminum conductive base

Fig.3-9
3-4
White background
Half tone
Solid
The (-) potential of the photoconductive drum being higher than the developer bias.
White background
- 450V
Image not developed
3
Bias potential
- 394V
Image developed by toner The (-) potential of the photoconductive drum being lower than the developer bias.
- 250V
- 100V
0
Fig.3-10
Developer material The developer material is a mixture of toner and carrier. The toner is charged to negative polarity and the carrier to positive polarity, due to the friction with each other caused by mixing. Toner: Mainly consists of resin and carbon. Carrier: Consists of ferrite and resin coating on its surface to provide consistent frictional electrification.
Carbon (5-10%)
5-20 m Resin (90-95%) [Toner]
Ferrite
30-100 m [Carrier]
Fig.3-11
3-5
Note: If the developer material is used for a long time (beyond its normal life span), the toner is caked onto the carrier. The carriers (charging) performance is lowered. Symptom: 1) Image density is decreased. 2) Toner scattering occurs. 3) Background fogging occurs. Solution: Replace new developer material.
Toner
Carrier
No frictional electrification on the area where the toner is caked on.

Fig.3-12
Magnetic roller - Magnetic brush development The south and north poles are arranged inside the magnetic rollers, as shown in the following figure. The developer material forms a brush-like fluff which contacts the photoconductive drum surface This is caused by the lines of magnetic force between the south and north poles.
Lines of magnetic force
N
S
Magnetic roller
Fig.3-13
Additional Explanation The life of the toner cartridge (number of copies) varies depending on the following conditions. 1) Coverage of originals (printing image ratio of the original size) and density of original background 2) Size and density of originals 3) The existence of solid black when making copies (when a book is copied and the original cover is partially open) 4) Temperature and humidity in the room when making copies 5) Copy density and image quality mode As indicated in the figure below, the life of the toner cartridge varies depending on the copy mode and coverage of originals
3-6
A full block in the figure below denotes approx. 10,000 copies.
A
Block
Type of originals
B
Fig.3-14
(6) Transfer/Separation Transfer: Transfer is a process of transferring the toner image (visible image) formed on the drum surface onto the paper. An electric charge applied by the high voltage power supply flows to the transfer belt from the power supply roller. Then it flows to the paper and photo conductor. The toner, which has been developed on the photo conductor, is transferred to this paper with an electric charge.
Drum
Transfer belt Paper

Fig.3-15
3-7
Separation: The paper is absorbed to the belt and separated from the drum by the electrostatic attraction acting between the belt (plus charge) and the polarization charge (minus charge) on the bottom surface of the paper.
e
er
A l umi n u m
Ph o
uct cond
i ve
bas
Drum
duc toco n
ti ve
lay
Toner
E Paper Transfer belt
Power supply roller
Fig.3-16
Reference Combined use of transfer belt and separation finger To prevent the copy paper from failing to be separated during the operation, due to incomplete transfer belt charging or absorption of moisture, and thus jamming up the cleaner, a separation finger mechanically separates any copy paper which fails to be separated.
Separation finger
Rotation of drum Paper movement
Transfer belt
Fig.3-17
3-8
(7) Fusing Fusing is a process of melting and fixing the toner on the paper. Method: Fuser roller The softening point of the toner (main ingredient: resin) is 90 to 100C. Paper (Heat) The toner is melted by the heat of the surface of the fuser roller. + (Pressure) The pressure roller is pressed against the fuser Pressure roller by the springs to increase adherence of the Fig.3-18 melted toner to the paper. Heat and pressure are applied to the paper when it passes between the fuser roller and pressure roller. || (Fusing) IH coil Fuser roller The toner is fixed on the paper.
Separation finger Paper movement
Pressure Pressure roller

Fig.3-19
(8) Cleaning Cleaning is a process of recovering the residual toner on the photoconductive drum. 1) The cleaning brush scrapes off the excessive toner and paper wastes. The flicker scrapes off the toner on the brush. Also, too prevent the cleaning blade from scratching the surface of the drum to make a circumferential streak, the varistor is attached between the brush and earth. 2) Cleaning blade scrapes off the residual toner on the drum.
3-9
3) The recovery blade picks up the scraped toner.

Cleaning blade
Drum rotation Cleaning brush Flicker
Recovery blade
Fig.3-20
(9) Discharging Discharging is a process of eliminating the (-) charge remaining on the photoconductive drum before the next charging process begins. If discharging does not occur, the following phenomenon will occur: The (-) charge remains on the photoconductive drum. Uneven charge is applied to the drum during the next copy. The next copy has a double image. (Preceding image appears.) Solution: Expose the entire surface of the photoconductive drum to the light by the discharge LED array. The photoconductive drum becomes electrically conductive. All the (-) charges remaining on the photoconductive drum are conducted to the ground. The preparation for the next copy is completed.
Discharge LED array
Drum
Fig.3-21
3 - 10
3.3
Comparison of Copy Process to e-STUDIO550/650/810

e-STUDIO550/650/810 OD-6510 (OPC drum) Highly sensitized drum 700 V (grid voltage 733 V) Scolotron method (constant current) Grid output variable Surface potential sensor Semiconductor laser (adjustment not required) 3.8 nJ/mm Image quality sensor Two magnetic rollers Magnetic bridge-circuit method Toner cartridge system (There is a toner recycle system.) Density detection system e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 -490 V (-290 to -890 V) Grid voltage -500 V (-300 to -900 V) 3.9 nJ/mm (e-STUDIO520/600/720) 3.0 nJ/mm (e-STUDIO850) (There is a toner cartridge empty detecting system by piezoelectric type sensor.) T-6000/T-6000E/T-6000D D-6000 -394 V (-200 to -800 V) DC + AC Pressure roller: PFA tube roller (60) none none
Process 1. Photoconductive drum Sensitivity Surface potential 2. Charging 3. Surface potential controlling 4. Writing Light source Light amount
5. Image density control 6. Development Magnetic roller Auto-toner Toner supply Toner-empty detection
Toner Developer material Developer bias 7. Transfer Transfer Power supply roller Separation auxiliary roller 8. Separation 9. Discharging Discharging position Discharge lamp Pre-cleaning discharge 10. Cleaning System Recovered toner 11. Cleaning brush bias 12. Fusing System
T-6510/6510E/6510D D-6510 DC-500V + AC Transfer belt Power supply roller none Transfer belt charging Separation finger applied Discharge by exposure after cleaning Discharge by red LED None Blade + Brush Reuse (by the toner recycle system) Varistor 430V Long-life heat roller system Fuser roller: Fluoroplastic-coated roller (60) Pressure roller: PFA tube roller (550/610:50, 810:60) Cleaning web (for fuser roller cleaning) Pressure roller cleaning felt roller Pressure roller cleaning metal roller IH coil (Induction heating system) ON/OFF control by thermistor
Cleaning
Heater
3 - 11
3 - 12
4.
4.1
GENERAL OPERATION
Overview of Operation
Operation during warming-up, pre-running and standby Automatic feed copying by pressing [START] button Copying operation Bypass copying Interrupt copying
Copier operation
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 GENERAL OPERATION
4-1
4.2
4.2.1
Description of Operation
Warming-up
1) Initialization Turning the power ON The IH coil is turned ON. The set number "1" reproduction ratio "100%" and "WAIT WARMING UP" appears. The fan motors are turned ON. Initialization of the scanning system - The carriage moves to the home position and stops. - The carriage moves to the peak detection position. - The exposure lamp (EXP) is turned ON. - Peak detection (a white color is detected by the shading correction plate) - The exposure lamp (EXP) is turned OFF. - The carriage moves to the home position. Initialization of the feeding system - Each drawer tray goes up Initialization of the writing system - The polygonal motor (M2) rotates at a high speed. (e-STUDIO850) - The polygonal motor (M2) rotates at a low speed. (e-STUDIO520/600/720) - The beam position is controlled. (e-STUDIO850) Other - The main charger cleaner operates. 2) Pre-running operation The pre-running operation starts when the temperature of the fuser roller surface reaches a certain degree. (Pre-running is not performed when the fuser roller is already hot enough.) The fuser motor (M3) is turned ON. - The fuser roller rotates. The drum motor (M11) is turned ON. - The drum rotates. The used toner transport motor (M9) is turned ON - The used toner transport auger rotates. Image quality control - It charges the drum and detects the drum surface potential to set the optimal condition for outputting the image. - It forms a patch on the drum and reads out its reflective ratio to set the optimal condition. 3) When the surface temperature of the fuser roller becomes sufficient for fusing; The IH coil (IH-COIL) is turned OFF. The set number "1" and "READY" are displayed.
4.2.2
Ready state (ready for copying)
The buttons on the control panel are enabled. When no button is pressed for a certain period of time; - The set number "1" and reproduction ratio "100%" are displayed. The equipment returns to the normal ready state.
4-2
4.2.3
Drawer feed copying with the [START] button
1) Pressing the [START] button "READY" changes to "COPYING". The exposure lamp (EXP) is turned ON. The scan motor (M1) is turned ON. Carriage-1 and -2 move forward. The polygonal motor (M2) rotates at a high speed (the e-STUDIO850 is always at a high speed). Each motor is turned ON. The drum, transfer belt, fuser unit and developer unit rotate. The main charger, developer bias and discharge LED (ERS) are turned ON. The fans rotate at a high speed. 2) Drawer paper feeding Each motor is turned ON. The drum, transfer belt, fuser unit and developer unit rotate. The main charger, developer bias and discharge LED (ERS) are turned ON. The fans rotate at a high speed. The feed motor (M20), drawer feed clutch (CLT6, 8, 10, 12) and drawer transport clutch (CLT5, 7, 9, 11) are turned ON. The pickup roller, feed roller and transport roller start to rotate. - The paper reaches the transport roller. - The drawer transport sensor (S33, 39, 45, 51) is turned ON. The drawer feed clutch (CLT6, 8, 10, 12) and drawer transport clutch (CLT5, 7, 9, 11) are turned OFF after a certain period of time. - The paper reaches the intermediate transfer roller. - The paper reaches the registration roller. - The registration sensor (S18) is turned ON and aligning is performed. 3) Carriage operation: Scan motor (M1) ON The exposure lamp (EXP) is turned ON. White shading compensation is performed. The scan motor (M1) is turned ON. Carriage-1 and -2 move forward. 4) Within a certain time after carriage operation: The registration motor (M16) is turned ON. The paper is transported to the transfer area. The copy counter operates. 5) Within a certain time after the registration motor (M16) is turned ON, the transfer belt bias is turned ON. 6) Completion of scanning The scan motor (M1) is turned OFF. The exposure lamp (EXP) is turned OFF. The registration motor (M16) is turned OFF (after the trailing edge of the paper passes the registration roller).
4-3
7) Paper exit The exit sensor (S22) detects the trailing edge of the paper. The equipment enters the toner supply operation when developer material toner density is lower than the preset value. The main charger, developer bias and discharge LED (ERS) are turned OFF. The drum, transfer belt, fuser unit and developer unit stop. Each fan returns to the ready rotation. The feed motor (M20) is turned OFF. The rotation speed of the polygonal motor (M2) switches from a high speed to a low speed. (e-STUDIO520/600/720) "READY" appears and the equipment enters the ready state.
4-4
Unit : ms 0
206 1020 1074 12 0 1024 1556

500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000 5500
5180 2 260 538 334 896 956 2134 1496 2192 1296 1960 228 3848 476 4136 1044 4874 2838 3514
Scan motor
Forward
Stop
Backward
Exposure lamp
OFF
ON
Drum motor
ON
OFF
1st drawer feed clutch
ON
OFF
1st drawer feed sensor
OFF
ON
Timing chart for copying one A4 sized sheet fed from the 1st drawer [e-STUDIO520/600/720]
Fig.4-1
4-5
Registration sensor
OFF
ON
Registration motor
ON
OFF
MVDEN signal
ON
OFF
Main charger
ON
OFF
Developer bias
ON
OFF
Discharge LED
ON
OFF
Fuser unit exit sensor
ON
OFF
[e-STUDIO850]
Unit : ms 0
206 1020 1074 12 0 1024 1556
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
4000
4500
5000
5500
Scan motor
Forward
Stop
Backward
Exposure lamp
OFF
ON
4534 2 192 502

312 826 880 1846 1314 1898 1186 1708 228 3286 448 3526 932 4210 2430 2998
Drum motor
ON
OFF
1st drawer feed clutch
ON
OFF
1st drawer feed sensor
OFF
ON
Fig.4-2
4-6
Registration sensor
OFF
ON
Registration motor
ON
OFF
MVDEN signal
ON
OFF
Main charger
ON
OFF
Developer bias
ON
OFF
Discharge LED
ON
OFF
Fuser unit exit sensor
ON
OFF
4.2.4
Bypass feed copying
1) A sheet of paper is inserted into the bypass tray. The bypass feed sensor (S27) is turned ON. "Set media type" appears. Select the media type and paper size. "Ready for bypass feeding" appears. 2) Pressing the [START] button "Ready for bypass feeding" changes to "COPYING". The drum, developer unit, transfer belt and fuser roller rotate. The main charger, developer bias and discharge LED (ERS) are turned ON. Each fan rotates at a high speed. 3) Bypass feeding The bypass pickup solenoid (SOL3) is turned ON. The feed motor (M20) is turned ON. - The bypass pickup roller is lowered. The bypass feed clutch (CLT4) is turned ON. - The bypass pickup roller and bypass feed roller start to rotate. Aligning operation - The paper reaches the registration roller. - After a certain period of time, the bypass pickup solenoid (SOL3) and bypass feed clutch (CLT4) are turned OFF. 4) Hereafter, the operation 3) to 6) of "4.2.3 Drawer feed copying with [START] button" is repeated.
4.2.5
Interruption copying
1) Pressing the [INTERRUPT] button The LED "INTERRUPT" is turned ON. The copying operation in progress stops temporarily. Carriage-1 and -2 return to their appropriate positions. "Job interrupted job 1 saved" appears. The automatic density and reproduction ratio 100% are set. (The set number remains the same.) 2) Selecting the desired copy conditions 3) After interruption copying is finished: When the LED "INTERRUPT" is turned OFF by pressing the [INTERRUPT] button, the equipment returns to the status before the interruption. "Ready to resume job 1" appears. 4) Pressing the [START] button The copying operation before the interruption resumes.
4-7
4.3
Detection of Abnormality
When something abnormal has occurred in the equipment, the symbols corresponding to the type of abnormality are displayed.
4.3.1
Types of abnormality
1) Abnormality which can be cleared without turning OFF the door switch (A) Adding paper (B) Pick-up failure in the bypass 2) Abnormality which cannot be cleared without turning OFF the door switch (C) Misfeeding in the equipment (D) The developer unit is not installed properly. (E) Replacing the toner cartridge 3) Abnormality not cleared without turning OFF the main switch (F) Replacing the toner bag (G) Call for service
4.3.2
Description of abnormality
(A) Adding paper The drawer empty sensor (S31, 37, 43, 49) detects the presence or absence of paper. [When the drawer is not installed] No drawer is detected. The tray does not go up (the drawer empty sensor (S31, 37, 43, 49) is turned OFF). "Add paper" appears. The [START] button is disabled. [When the drawer is installed] The drawer is detected. Tray goes up (the drawer empty sensor (S31, 37, 43, 49) is turned OFF). "Add paper" appears. The [START] button is disabled.
4-8
When the power is turned ON or the feed unit performs initialization. Detecting the presence of paper - The tray-up motor (M21, 22) is turned ON. The tray goes up. When the drawer tray-up sensor (S32, 38, 44, 50) is not turned ON within a fixed period of time, it means that the tray is in an abnormal condition. "Add paper" appears regardless of whether paper is on the tray or not. - It is cleared by turning the power ON/OFF.
4
The drawer tray-up sensor (S32, 38, 44, 50) is turned ON within a fixed period of time. The tray-up motor (M21, 22) stops. - At this time, if the drawer empty sensor (S31, 37, 43, 49) is ON: It is judged that there is paper OFF: It is judged that there is no paper. The drawer area of the LCD panel blinks (when the drawer is selected). Paper in the drawer runs out during copying. The drawer tray-up sensor (S32, 38, 44, 50) is turned OFF The tray-up motor (M21, 22) is turned ON The tray goes up. The drawer tray-up sensor (S32, 38, 44, 50) is turned ON The tray-up motor (M21, 22) stops. The drawer empty sensor (S31, 37, 43, 49) is turned OFF during the copying although the drawer tray-up sensor (S32, 38, 44, 50) is ON. It is judged that there is no paper. The drawer area of the LCD panel blinks (when the drawer is selected). The copying operation stops.
(B) Pick-up failure in bypass During bypass feeding The bypass pickup solenoid (SOL3) is turned ON. The registration sensor (S18) is turned ON. The registration sensor (S18) is not turned ON within a fixed period of time. Pick-up failure in bypass The clear paper symbol is displayed: E120 Copying operation is disabled. Solution: Remove the paper from the bypass tray. The bypass paper sensor (S27) is turned OFF.
4-9
(C) Misfeeding in equipment The fuser transport sensor (S9) detects jamming of the leading edge of the paper. The registration motor (M16) is turned ON. The fuser transport sensor (S9) is not turned ON within a fixed period of time. Paper jam (E010) The copying operation stops. The fuser transport sensor (S9) detects jamming of the tailing edge of paper. The registration motor (M16) is turned OFF. The fuser transport sensor (S9) is not turned OFF after a fixed period of time. Paper jam (E020) The copying operation stops. Immediately after the power is turned ON; Any of the sensors on the paper transport path detects the paper (ON). Paper jam (E030) The front cover (lower) opens during copying. Paper jam (E410) The registration sensor (S18) detects jamming of the leading edge of the paper: The registration sensor (S18) is not turned ON within a fixed period of time after the leading edge of paper passes the transport roller. Paper jam (E200, E210, E300, E330, E260, E110 and E3C0) The intermediate transport sensor (S17) detects jamming of the leading edge of the paper: The intermediate transport sensor is not turned ON within a fixed period of time after the leading edge of paper passes the 1st drawer transport sensor (S33). Paper jam (E201, E211, E301, E331, E3C1, E261 and E2A1) Each drawer transport sensor (S33, 39, 45, 51) detects jamming of the leading edge of the paper: The transport sensors (S33, 39, 45, 51) are not turned ON within a fixed period of time after the leading edge of the paper passes each drawer feed sensors (S34, 40, 46, 52). Paper jam (E230, E240, E250, E370, E380, E3F0) When a sheet of reversed paper is transported, horizontal transport sensor-1, -2 (S19, 20) or reverse sensor-1 (S23) does not detect paper within a fixed period of time. Paper jam (E511, E512, E540)
4 - 10
When a sheet of paper is fed, the feed sensor (S34, 40, 46, 52) is not turned ON after the feed clutch (CLT6, 8, 10, 12) is turned ON. Paper jam (E130, E140, E150, E160, E180, E190: The error codes change depending on the drawer used.)
(D) The developer unit is not installed properly. Disconnecting the connectors of the developer unit "Developer unit not installed" appears. Solution: Connect the connectors of the developer unit and close the front cover (lower). (E) Replacing the toner cartridge The toner cartridge empty sensor (S10) detects that there is no more toner left in the cartridge. Open the front cover (upper) and replace the toner cartridge. (The toner cartridge is not replaced.) The toner density becomes low. The auto-toner sensor (S12) detects that there is no more toner left in the cartridge. Control circuit The copying operation is disabled. Solution: Replace the toner cartridge with a new one. (F) Replacing the toner bag The toner bag becomes full of used toner. The used toner transport auger moves to the feed side: The toner bag full detection sensor (S11) is turned ON. "Replace toner bag" appears. Solution: Have your service engineer replace the toner bag with a new one and clear the value of 08-476 to 0. The toner bag full detection sensor (S11) is turned ON during copying. The copying stops after the last sheet copied is discharged. Solution: Have your service engineer replace the toner bag with a new one and clear the value of 08-476 to 0.
(G) Call for service Check the error code displayed on the control panel when "Call for service" appears, and handle the abnormality in reference to the error code table in the Service Handbook.
4 - 11
4.4
4.4.1
Flowchart
Power ON to ready
Main SW ON
DC power supply ON Restart
YES
Is cover opened? NO IH coil ON (Start initializing)
Scan motor ON Tray-up motor ON
Is registration sensor ON? NO Is intermediate transport sensor ON? NO
YES
YES
Is exit sensor ON? NO Is horizontal transport sensor ON? NO Is reverse sensor ON? NO
YES
YES
YES
Jam
A
Fig.4-3
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 GENERAL OPERATION March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC
4 - 12
Polygonal motor rotating Scanning section initialization
Is toner bag full detection sensor ON? NO
YES
4
Drum motor ON for 6 sec. (used toner full clear operation)
NO
Is toner empty? YES Toner supply
NO
Is toner bag full detection sensor ON?
YES
Toner bag replacement
Is initialization finished? YES
NO
Have 20 sec. passed after initialization started? YES Call for service "C260" "C270"
NO
Is fuser roller temperature high enough to start pre-running? YES Pre-running started
NO
Is thermistor cut down? YES
NO
Is heater cut down? YES
NO
Is polygonal motor NG? YES
NO
Is fuser roller temperature high enough to be ready? YES Pre-running finished
Call for service "C410"
Call for service "C440"
Call for service "CA10"
READY
Fig.4-4
4 - 13
4.4.2
Automatic feed copying

Press [START] button
Developer bias ON Fuser motor ON Main charger ON Developer unit motor ON Discharge LED ON Transfer belt motor ON Drum motor ON Used toner transport motor ON Recycle toner transport motor ON
Process system control
Transport system control
Scanning system control
Is polygonal motor ON? YES
NO
Call for service "CA10"
Laser ON
Transport motor ON
Exposure lamp ON
Transfer belt bias ON
Transport motor OFF
Carriage moving forward
Registration motor ON
Carriage stopped
Transfer belt bias OFF Drum separation finger solenoid ON
Exposure lamp OFF
NO
Is H-sync OK? YES
Drum separation finger solenoid OFF Registration motor OFF Carriage moving backward
Call for service "CA20" NO
Carriage stopped
Is remaining set number 0? YES Laser OFF Is fuser unit transport sensor ON? YES Process system control finished NO
Scanning system control finished
Paper jam "E010"
Fig.4-5
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 GENERAL OPERATION March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC
4 - 14
NO Paper jam "E020" NO
Is fuser unit transport sensor OFF? YES
Is remaining set number 0? YES
Main charger OFF Discharge LED OFF Developer bias OFF Drum motor OFF Transfer belt motor OFF Fuser motor OFF Developer unit motor OFF Recycle toner transport motor OFF Used toner transport motor OFF
Drum reversed
Standby
Fig.4-6
4 - 15
4 - 16
5.
5.1
CONTROL PANEL
Operation Area and Display Area
The control panel consists of button switches and touch-panel switches to operate the equipment and select various modes, and LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes) and an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) to display the state of the equipment or messages. When the operator's attention is required, graphic images, symbols or characters appear or blink with messages explaining the condition of the equipment in the LCD panel. This equipment has improved its operationality and visibility with an enlarged LCD panel. If a paper jam or service call has occurred, its error code is displayed on the LCD panel so that the user can recognize which error has occurred.
Fig.5-1
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 CONTROL PANEL
5-1
5.2
Items Shown on the Control Panel
1) Basic display Displays buttons and messages.
Fig.5-2
2) Paper jam display Displays error codes, paper jam position and paper jam release guidance.
Error code
Paper jam position
Paper jam release guidance

Fig.5-3
5-2
3) Service call display Displays error codes and service call symbols.
Error code
Service call symbol

Fig.5-4
5-3
5.2.1
No. 1 2 3
Display
Message State of equipment Power is OFF (at Sleep Mode) At Energy Saving Mode Scanner warming up Displayed until the equipment becomes ready to start scanning Scanner warming up Displayed when Auto Start is set Displayed when performing the controlling function to keep the equipment at the best condition Performing the auto calibration for the image density Displayed when the equipment has decided to adjust the image density under certain conditions and is performing the auto calibration accordingly. Ready for copying Waiting for the operation Copying job interrupted Note Press [START] button or [FUNCTION] button to clear Press [START] button to clear Auto Start can be set
Saving energy - press START button Wait Warming Up
4 5
Wait Warming Up Auto Start WAIT
Press [STOP] button to clear the Auto Start
Performing Auto Calibration
Recovers when the Auto Calibration has finished
7 8
READY READY Press START button to copy READY (WARMING UP) Ready (Performing Auto Calibration)
Press [START] button to resume copying or press [MEMORY CLEAR] button to delete the job
9 10
Scanner warming up Ready for scanning Displayed when the equipment is ready for scanning and waiting for the operator to select the copying conditions. Performing the auto calibration Printing out the data Scanning is enabled Ready for scanning The equipment is ready for scanning and waiting for the operator to select the copying conditions. No inserter paper Ready for scanning The equipment is ready for scanning and waiting for the operator to select the copying conditions. No tab paper Ready for scanning The equipment is ready for scanning and waiting for the operator to select the copying conditions. Finisher manual operating No staples in finisher Scanning is enabled Stapling jam occurred in finisher No paper in drawer Scanning is enabled
11 12
READY (PRINTING) READY (ADD INSERTER PAPER)
13
READY (ADD TAB SHEET)
Printing is resumed when the [START] button is pressed under the condition the printing UI is displayed ([JOB STATUS] button pressed) after adding inserter paper. Printing is resumed when the [START] button is pressed under the condition the printing UI is displayed ([JOB STATUS] button pressed) after adding tab paper. Printing is started when pressing the [START] button.
14
READY (FINISHER IN USE)
15 16 17
READY (CHECK STAPLER) READY (CHECK STAPLER) READY (ADD PAPER) Press JOB STATUS button
Cleared by supplying the staples
Cleared by supplying papers
5-4
No. 18 19
Message READY (FINISHER FULL) READY (HOLE PUNCH DUST BIN IS FULL) READY (SADDLE STITCH TRAY FULL) READY (CHANGE DRAWER TO CORRECT PAPER SIZE) Ready for bypass feeding COPYING Auto Start Place Doc. Feeder in the down position Place originals in the document feeder
State of equipment Finisher is full of paper Scanning is enabled Punching dust box is full Scanning is enabled Saddle stitcher tray is full of paper Scanning is enabled Incorrect paper size setting
Note Resumes printing by removing paper from the finisher Resumes printing by removing punching dust from the dust box
20
21
22 23 24 25 26
Paper is set on the bypass tray At the copying state Auto Start is set during printing
5
Cleared by pressing [FUNCTION CLEAR] button or [STOP] button Cleared by closing RADF
27 28
29
30 31
32
33
34
35
36
37
RADF is open when original is placed on RADF Displayed when the conditions are Cleared by setting the original set and [START] button is pressed with no original placed Change direction of original Displayed when the direction of original placed is different from the setting PRESS [BASIC] and select Displays the warning that the copy is normal paper size not enabled when any drawer but bypass feed is selected at Cover Sheet Copying Mode or Sheet Insertion Mode %d originals are scanned Paper jam occurred during copying Start copy job from next (RADF scanning) page Add paper Displayed when the paper in selected drawer is running out Cannot duplex this size Displayed when the paper size which is not specified for duplex copying is set Cannot use this media type Displayed when the paper size which is not specified for the functions such as stapling or hole punching is set Set standard size Displayed when the paper size which Re-set the paper size is not acceptable is set (depends on the setting) Cannot staple this paper Displayed when the paper type which Re-set the paper type type can not be stapled is set at Cover Sheet Copying Mode/Sheet Insertion Mode Cannot duplex copy Displayed when the paper type which Re-set the paper type can not be duplexed is set at Cover Sheet Copying Mode/Sheet Insertion Mode Cannot use transparency Displayed when the paper type which Re-set the paper type film can not be punched is set at Cover Sheet Copying Mode/Sheet Insertion Mode Copy size: A4/LT only Displayed when the paper size which is not specified for Book-type duplex copying or Dual-page is set
5-5
No. 38 39 40 41
Message Copy size: A4/LT and A4R/LT-R CHANGE DRAWER TO CORRECT PAPER SIZE Change the paper type Select a paper size for bypass feeding Place the blank sheets in bypass tray and select the paper size Place the blank sheets in the same direction as the originals Place the same size blank sheets as the originals Place insertion sheets in the bypass tray and select the paper size Select the same size insert1 sheets as the originals Select the same size insert2 sheets as the originals Set insert1 sheets in the same direction as the originals Set insert2 sheets in the same direction as the originals READY (CHANGE THE PAPER TYPE) Set transparency film in A4/ LT direction
State of equipment Displayed when the paper size which is not specified for Rotate Sort Displayed when the selected paper size is not in the drawer Displayed when the selected media type is not in the drawer Displayed when paper size needs to be specified for bypass feeding such as duplex copying Displayed when no paper is in the selected feeder at Cover Sheet Copying Mode Displayed when the direction of cover page is different from that of other pages at Cover Copying Mode Displayed when the paper size of cover page is different from that of other pages at Cover Copying Mode Displayed when no insertion sheet is in the selected drawer at Sheet Insertion Mode Displayed when the size of insertion sheet (sheet 1) is different from that of other pages at Sheet Insertion Mode Displayed when the size of insertion sheet (sheet 2) is different from that of other pages at Sheet Insertion Mode Displayed when the direction of insertion sheet (sheet 1) is different from that of other pages at Sheet Insertion Mode Displayed when the direction of insertion sheet (sheet 2) is different from that of other pages at Sheet Insertion Mode Displays when the printing is stopped because of media type mismatch
Note
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52 53 54
55 56 57 58 59
Displayed when the selected paper size is other than A4/LT at OHP mode CANNOT PUNCH THIS Displayed when the selected paper SIZE PAPER size is not specified for hole punching Remove paper from the fin- Displayed when the paper sizes are isher mixed at Staple Sorting Mode Cannot staple this size Displayed when the paper size is not specified for stapling at Staple Sorting Mode Remove paper from the fin- Finisher is full of papers isher Examine stapler Trouble in the stapler unit in finisher Check staple cartridge No stapler in finisher section Job interrupted job 1 saved Interrupt copying is accepted Ready to resume job 1 Interrupt copying is cancelled (finished)
5-6
No. 60
Message Cannot use AMS mode
State of equipment
Note Set the reproduction ratio 200% or below manually Set the reproduction ratio 200% or below
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
Displayed when reproduction ratio is set to be over 200% at AMS Mode on RADF More than 200% is not Displayed when reproduction ratio is available set manually to be over 200% on RADF Updated the template setDisplayed when the template stored ting is recalled by pressing [TEMPLATE] button Enter Department Code Displayed when a button is pressed while the department management setting is available Cannot copy Displayed when the number of printCheck DEPARTMENT outs exceeds the limit number of COUNTER department counter Select the same sized Tab Displayed when the paper sizes for sheets as the originals the tab sheets and originals are different Select the same sized Displayed when the paper sizes for Inserter sheets as the origi- inserter paper and original are differnals ent Set Tab sheets in the same Displayed when the paper directions direction as the originals for tab paper and original are different Set Inserter sheets in the Displayed when the paper directions same direction as the origi- for inserter paper and original are difnals ferent Only one paper source can Displayed when both the cover sheet be used with Cover Sheet mode and inserter cover sheet mode feature are selected Displayed when all the sheet inserOnly two paper sources tion mode, tab insertion mode and can be used with Sheet inserter sheet insertion mode are Insertion feature selected ADD PAPER TO Displayed when the inserter mode is INSERTER FEEDER valid and the [START] button is pressed without papers on the tray Displayed when the tab paper mode Set the paper source for Tab sheet is valid and the tab drawer is not selected Fuser cleaning web Displayed when the fuser unit cleandecreased ing web gets decreased * This message is set not to be displayed at shipment, but the setting can be changed at the setting mode (08-941). Displayed when the fuser unit cleanTime for periodic mainteing web gets run out nance (Fuser cleaning web) Tab size: A4/LT only Displayed when the tab paper mode is valid and other than A4/LT is selected for the tab paper size Time for periodic maintePM cycle nance Displayed at the time for maintenance Copying is available
5
Select the same size for tab sheets and originals. Select the same size for the inserter sheets and originals. Set the tab sheets in the same direction as the originals. Set the inserter sheets in the same direction as the originals. Release either the cover sheet mode or inserter cover sheet mode. Release any of three modes
Release the inserter mode Set papers on the inserter tray
Select the 2nd drawer property to the tab to release this state. Replace the cleaning web.
Replace the cleaning web.
Select A4 or LT for tab paper.
Maintenance and inspection are performed by qualified service technician
5-7
No. 77
Message Please try again after a while Press START button to copy after changing setting The number of builds exceeds the limits will you copy stored originals? The number of builds exceeds the limits will you save stored originals? This setting cannot be changed now Service recommended for SPC Service recommended for IQC (Messages 82 and 83 above appear alternately.)
State of equipment Displayed when the Department Code can no be keyed in immediately after power-ON Displayed when the build job is set Displayed when the number of builds exceeds the limits Displayed when the number of builds exceeds the limits Displayed when the setting is changed during the build job is discontinued Displayed when the surface potential control error occurs Displayed when the image quality control error occurs Displayed when the surface potential control error and the image quality control error occur
Note Leave it for a while and key in the code again
78 79
Select either printing or canceling
80
Select either printing or saving
81
82 83 84
Refer to chapter 5.1.16. /Service Handbook. Refer to chapter 5.1.15. /Service Handbook. Refer to chapter 5.1.15 and 5.1.16. /Service Handbook.
5-8 05/04
5.3
Relation between the Equipment State and Operators Operation

Scanning original/ Scanning original Auto job start During warming-up and reserved printing out the copy Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Displays departDisplay not changed Display not changed ment code entry screen (when department management is available) Display not changed Display not changed Displays print job list screen Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed (LED blinking) Copy mode is cleared after the copy mode is set Auto job start cancelled Display not changed
During READY status Press [ENERGY SAVER] button Press [ACCESS] button Switches to energy saving mode Displays department code entry screen (when department management is available) Displays print job list screen Switches to interrupt mode Copy mode is cleared after the copy mode is set
Press [JOB STATUS] button Press [INTERRUPT] button Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] button after setting the copy mode Press [STOP] button
Display not changed Display not changed Auto job start cancelled
Press [CLEAR] button after setting the copy mode Press [CLEAR] button after keying in numbers (digital keys) Press [MONITOR/PAUSE] Press [FAX] button Press [COPY] button Press [SCAN] button Press [e-FILING] Press [EXTENSION] button Press [TEMPLATE] button Press [USER FUNCTIONS] button Press [HELP] button
Number of printouts changes to 1 while the setting remains unchanged after the copy mode is set Number keyed in changes to 1 after being entered
Number of printouts changes to 1 while the setting remains unchanged after the copy mode is set Number keyed in changes to 1 after being entered
Scanning or printing out stops, and READY Press START to copy and MEMORY CLEAR are displayed Display not changed Display not changed
Display not changed Display not changed
Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Displays FAX Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed screen Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Displays SCAN Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed screen Displays e-FILING Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Displays TEMPLATE screen Displays USER FUNCTIONS screen Displays HELP screen Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Displays HELP screen Display not changed Display not changed
5-9
During READY status Displays Press [START] COPYING button with the original set on RADF
Scanning original/ Scanning original Auto job start During warming-up and reserved printing out the copy Display not changed Display not changed Wait Warming Up Auto Start is displayed
5 - 10
Printing out the copy Press [ENERGY SAVER] button Press [ACCESS] button Display not changed Displays department code entry screen (when department management is available) Displays print job list screen Display not changed (LED blinking) Copy mode is cleared after the copy mode is set
During paper jam Display not changed Display not changed
When interrupting Display not changed Displays department code entry screen (when department management is available) Displays print job list screen Returns to the status before interrupting Copy mode is cleared after the copy mode is set Display not changed
When displaying HELP screen Switches to energy saving mode Displays department code entry screen (when department management is available) Displays print job list screen Switches to interrupting mode Displays BASIC screen after the copy mode is set and then cancelled Display not changed
During energy saving mode Energy saving mode is cleared and displays BASIC screen Display not changed
Printing out stops, and READY Press START to copy and MEMORY CLEAR are displayed Press [CLEAR] Number of printbutton after outs changes to setting the copy 1 while the setmode ting remains unchanged after the copy mode is set Press [CLEAR] Number keyed button after key- in changes to 1 ing in numbers after being (digital keys) entered Press [MONIDisplay not TOR/PAUSE] changed Press [FAX] Displays FAX button screen Press [COPY] Display not button changed Press [SCAN] Displays SCAN button screen Press [e-FILING] Displays e-FILING screen Press [EXTENDisplay not SION] button changed Press [TEMDisplays TEMPLATE] button PLATE screen Press [USER Displays USER FUNCTIONS] FUNCTIONS button screen
Press [JOB STATUS] button Press INTERRUPT] button Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] button after setting the copy mode Press [STOP] button
Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed
Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed
Display not changed
Display not changed
Display not changed
Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed
Number of printouts changes to 1 while the setting remains unchanged after the copy mode is set Number keyed in changes to 1 after being entered Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed
Number of printouts changes to 1 while the setting remains unchanged after the copy mode is set Number keyed in changes to 1 after being entered Display not changed Displays FAX screen Display not changed Displays SCAN screen Displays e-FILING screen Display not changed Displays TEMPLATE screen Displays USER FUNCTIONS screen
Display not changed
Display not changed Display not changed Displays FAX screen Displays COPY screen Displays SCAN screen Displays e-FILING screen Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed
5 - 11
Printing out the copy Press [HELP] button Press [START] button with the original set on RADF Displays HELP screen Displays COPYING and RADF starts feeding
During paper jam Display not changed Display not changed
When interrupting Displays HELP screen Displays COPYING and RADF starts feeding
When displaying HELP screen Switches to the screen previously displayed Displays COPYING and RADF starts feeding
During energy saving mode Display not changed Energy saving mode is cleared and displays BASIC screen
5 - 12
5.4
5.4.1
Operation
Dot matrix LCD circuit
1) Structure
640 x 240 dots
Fig.5-5
The LCD panel is an STN blue mode transmissive type LCD with a 640 x 240-dot display capacity. It consists of a driver LSI, frame, printed circuit board, and lateral type CFL backlight. * STN: Super Twisted Nematic
5 - 13
2) Block diagram
HV NC NC GND VDD Temperature compensated circuit VEE VLCD Rth VSS CCFT
(1, 1) (1, 2) (1, 640)
D101 Bias ratio generation circuit

V0 120 Out
(2, 1) (2, 2) (2, 640)
D102
V1 Com1
LCD panel
640 x 240 Dots
V2
D101
120 Out
IC1 D102
V3 VDD, V0, V1, V4, VSS Com2 160 Out Seg1 160 Out Seg4 (240, 1) (240, 2) (240, 640)
V4
E102
E101
E102
E101
VDD, V0, V2, V3, VSS
FRM LOAD DF DISP CP D3-D0
Fig.5-6
5 - 14
3) LCD drive operation
The following describes the drive operation to display the message "READY". (a) The System CPU requests the Flash ROM data to display "READY". (b) The Flash ROM outputs data to display the message to the System CPU. (c) The System CPU writes the data to be displayed on the LCD panel into the RAM. (d) The LCD controller/driver reads the display data from the RAM, and outputs the data to the LCD panel. SYS board
ASIC (c) System CPU (b) Flash ROM (a)
(c) LCD controller (d) RAM
(d)
LCD panel
Control panel CPU
Key switches and touch panel
LED
Control panel
Fig.5-7
5 - 15
4) Data transmission
1/tF FRAME 240 LOAD 1 2 240 1 2 240 1 2 1/tF
FRAME
LOAD
CP D0-D3
CP x (640/4) pulses
Fig.5-8
5.4.2
LED display circuit
Method of LED display Example: Displaying "COPY"

+5.1VA
Current Low G COM1 Q19 Q1 (COPY) LED10-1

SG
Low Q7
OUTP5
SG
Fig.5-9
The transistors (Q19 and Q1) are turned ON when the COM1 signal becomes Low level. Also, when OUTP5 signal changes to Low level, the current flows from +5.1VA via the transistor (Q1) to the LED10-1 (COPY) to turned ON the LED10-1. Conditions to turn ON the LED 1) The transistor (Q1) connected to the LED anode is ON. 2) The transistor (Q7) connected to the LED cathode side is ON. The LED is turned ON when 1) and 2) are satisfied.
5 - 16
5.5
[A] (1)
Disassembly and Replacement

Control panel unit Take off the front cover, front right inner cover, toner cartridge driving unit, and toner recycling unit ( P.2-43 "[A] Front cover (Upper/Lower)", P.2-43 "[B] Front right inner cover", P.12-15 "[A] Toner cartridge drive unit", P.12-18 "[B] Toner recycle unit"). Remove 2 screws and take off the toner cartridge catcher.
(2)
Toner cartridge catcher

Fig.5-10
(3)
Remove 2 screws and take off the control panel lower cover.
Control panel lower cover

Fig.5-11
(4)
Disconnect 2 connectors.
Fig.5-12
5 - 17
(5)
Remove 3 screws. Then open the RADF and take off the control panel unit. Note: When assembling the unit, be sure that the harness is not caught.
Control panel unit

Fig.5-13
[B] (1)
Display PC board (DSP)
Take off the control panel unit ( P.5-17 "[A] Control panel unit"). (2) Disconnect 6 connectors and release 2 flat harnesses. (3) Remove 4 screws and take off the DSP board. Note: When installing the board, be sure to fix the shielding wire of the LCD.
DSP board
Shielding wire
Fig.5-14
[C] LCD inverter board (NV-LCD] (1) (2) (3) Take off the control panel unit ( P.5-17 "[A] Control panel unit"). Take off the DSP board ( P.5-18 "[B] Display PC board (DSP)"). Remove 8 screws and take off the base stay.
Base stay
Fig.5-15
5 - 18
(4) (5)
Disconnect 2 connectors. Remove 4 screws and take off the LCD inverter board.
LCD inverter board

Fig.5-16
[D] Key PC board-1 (KEY1) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Take off the control panel unit ( P.5-17 "[A] Control panel unit"). Take off the DSP board ( P.5-18 "[B] Display PC board (DSP)"). Remove 8 screws to take off the base stay. Disconnect 3 connectors. Remove 4 screws to remove the Mylar.
Mylar
Fig.5-17
(6)
Remove 18 screws and take off the KEY1 board.
KEY1 board
Fig.5-18
5 - 19
[E] (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
Key PC board-2 (KEY2) Take off the control panel unit ( P.5-17 "[A] Control panel unit"). Take off the DSP board ( P.5-18 "[B] Display PC board (DSP)"). Remove 8 screws to take off the base stay. Disconnect 1 connector. Remove 4 screws to remove the Mylar. Remove 2 screws and take off the KEY2 board.
Mylar
KEY2 board
Fig.5-19
[F] (1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
LCD panel (LCD)/ Touch panel (TCP) Take off the control panel unit ( P.5-17 "[A] Control panel unit"). Take off the DSP board ( P.5-18 "[B] Display PC board (DSP)"). Remove 8 screws and take off the base stay. Disconnect 1 connector. Remove 6 screws to take off the LCD panel.
LCD panel
Fig.5-20
(6) Take off the touch panel. Notes: 1. When installing the touch panel, be sure that the panel faces the right direction. 2. Be sure that no dust or stain is on the LCD panel or the touch panel before the installation.
Touch panel
Fig.5-21
5 - 20
6.
6.1
SCANNING SECTION
Function
In the scanning section of this equipment, the surface of an original is irradiated with a direct light and the reflected light is led through mirrors and lens to the CCD where the optical-to-electrical conversion is performed, converting the optical image data into an electrical (analog) signal. This analog signal is changed to a digital signal, which then performs various corrective processes necessary for image formation. After that, an arithmetic operation is performed on the digital signal, which is then transmitted to the data writing section.
Exposure lamp Reflector Carriage-1 Shading correction plate Rail for carriage-1 Original glass Drive pulley
Carriage-2
Lens Rail for carriage-2

Fig.6-1
CCD board CCD sensor
SLG board
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 SCANNING SECTION
6-1
6.2
Construction
The construction and purpose of the scanning system are described in this section. 1) Original glass This is a glass for placing original. The light from the exposure lamp (EXP) is irradiated to the original through this glass. The ADF original glass is used when original is read with the Automatic Document Feeder. Original is transported on the ADF original glass by the Automatic Document Feeder, and the transported original is read under the ADF original glass by the carriage. Do not use such solvents as alcohol when cleaning the surface of the ADF original glass, because it is coated so as not to be scratched by originals. 2) Carriage-1 The carriage-1 consists of the exposure lamp (EXP), lamp inverter board (INV-EXP), reflector, mirror-1, etc. It is driven by the scan motor (M1) and scans the original on the glass. Exposure lamp (EXP) This lamp is the light source to irradiate the original on the glass (one 29W Xenon lamp). Lamp inverter board (INV-EXP) This inverter controls lighting of the Xenon lamp. Reflector This is a reflecting plate to efficiently lead the light from the exposure lamp (EXP) to the surface of the original on the glass. Mirror-1 This mirror leads the light reflected from the original to the mirror-2 described later.
Original Original glass Exposure lamp
Reflector
Mirror-1
Fig.6-2
3) Carriage-2 The carriage-2 consists of mirror-2, mirror-3, etc. and leads the reflected light from the mirror-1 through mirrors-2 and -3 to the lens. This carriage-2 is also driven by the scan motor (M1) as in the same manner of the carriage-1, at half the scanning speed of carriage-1 (the scanning distance is also half of carriage-1). 4) Lens unit The light reflected from the mirror-3 is led to the CCD placed at the focal point of the lens which is fixed at this position. 5) Automatic original detection sensor (S1-5) The size of the original placed on the glass is instantly detected using the automatic original detection sensors (S1-5) fixed on the base frame without moving the carriage-1.
6-2
6) CCD board (CCD) This is a board to convert the light led through the lens unit into the minute analog signal (optical-toelectrical conversion), and transfer it to the SLG board (SLG). 7) SLG board (SLG) This is a board to perform the image correction, such as the signal synthesis, signal amplification, A/ D conversion and shading correction.
6-3
6.3
6.3.1
Operation
Scanner motor (M1)
Scan motor Carriage wire Carriage-1 Pulley for carriage-2
22
Motor pulley
2GT-Z24
Idler pulley
22
Carriage-2
Wire pulley
30.83/2GT-Z84
Fig.6-3
Scanning an original on the original glass This motor drives the carriages-1 and -2 through the timing belt and carriage wire. First, the scan motor (M1) drives carriages-1 and -2 to their respective home positions. The home position is detected when carriage-1 passes the carriage home position sensor (S6). When the [START] key is pressed, both carriages start to move and scan the original on the glass. Scanning an original on the RADF Carriage-1 stays at the shading position during the shading correction, and at the scanning position during the scanning operation.
6.3.2
Two-phase motor drive circuit (fixed-current type)
The scan motor (M1) with the unipolar fixed current chopper method is driven by the stepping motor driver STK672-410 (IC19).
SLG board
+36V MOTREF-0 MOTEN-0 MOTRST-0 MOTDIR-0
CN8 1 6 2 3 5 4
Scan motor
Scanner CPU
MOTCLK-1 MOTMD1-0 MOTMD2-0 MOTMD3-0
Motor driver
4 5 6 3 2 1
IC10
IC19
Fig.6-4
6-4
Input signals
Clock input Set the direction of motor rotation MOTCLK-1 MOTDIR-0 Input Input Motor is rotated by setting number of pulses. * Internal circuit of the motor driver works when the first pulse becomes ON and the last pulse becomes OFF. The direction of the motor rotation is determined by setting the level of signal. "L".....Clockwise direction (as seen from the output shaft) "H"....Counterclockwise direction (as seen from the output shaft) Note: When the MOTMD3-0 is "L", do not change the rotation direction within 6.25sec. before the first pulse of the MOTCLK-1 becomes ON and after the last pulse becomes OFF. Excitation drive is forcibly turned ON/OFF. "H"....Normal operation (Excited) "L".....Excitation drive is forcibly shut off (Not excited) Motor wire current value is set in the range of 0 to 3 (A)/phase by applying the analog voltage 0 to 5 (V). Set the excitation mode. Note: Do not change the setting within 5sec. after the first pulse of the MOTCLK-1 becomes ON and the last pulse becomes OFF. Reset for the whole system. Internal circuit of the driver is initialized by setting the motor to "L" level (pulse interval: 10sec. or more).
Cut off the drive output Voltage to set value for the motor current Set the excitation mode (1) to (3)
MOTEN-0 MOTREF-0 MOTMD1-0 MOTMD2-0 MOTMD3-0
Input Input Input
Reset
MOTRST-0
Input
6-5
6.4
6.4.1
Control for Exposure Lamp

General description
Control circuit of the exposure lamp consists of the following 3 blocks. 1) Lighting device for the Xenon lamp (Lamp inverter board) Turns the exposure lamp ON/OFF. 2) CCD sensor circuit This circuit works to the convert the reflected light amount from the original surface and the shading correction plate to the electrical signals. The reflected light amount from the shading correction plate is read to control the exposure amount. 3) Image processing circuit The output signals from the CCD are digitized and the image processing such as gamma correction and shading correction is applied to them.
Original Shading correction plate
Exposure lamp (Xenon lamp)
CCD board CCD sensor SLG board Analog Front End (AFE)
Lighting device for xenon lamp (Lamp inverter board)
ASIC
Scanner CPU
Fig.6-5
6-6
6.4.2
Exposure lamp
External electrode type Xenon fluorescent lamp is used as an exposure lamp in this equipment. 1) Structure The fluorescer is applied to the inside surface of the lamp pipe (except for a part which serves as an opening) which is filled with the Xenon gas. A pair of the external electrodes covered by film with adhesive agent is attached around the pipe.
PET film Aluminum tape electrode
Glass valve
6
Fluorescer
Xenon gas Adhesive agent, PET, film

Fig.6-6
2) Behavior inside the lamp The electron inside the pipe is led to the electric field by applying voltage to the pair of the external electrodes, and the discharge is started. The electrons then flow and clash with the Xenon atoms inside the pipe to excite them and allow them to generate ultraviolet rays. This ultraviolet rays convert the fluorescer into visible light.
(6) (5) (7) (2) (4) (3) (8) (1)
(1) Electrode (2) Electron (3) Xenon atom (4) Ultraviolet lay (5) Fluorescer (6) Visible light (irradiated from the opening to outside the pipe) (7) Openig (8) Harness
Fig.6-7
6-7
6.4.3
Control circuit for exposure lamp

+5VSW
SLG board
Q103 LMPON-0 IC5 D103
Xenon lamp
IC10 Scanner CPU
WDTOUT-0
IC8
IC6 EXPON-0
Lighting device for xenon lamp (Lamp inverter board)
IC6 5VSWON-0 Q102

DG
Fig.6-8
Working conditions
LMPON-0 (Lamp drive signal) L H X X WDTOUT-0 H H L H 5VSWON-0 L L X H +5VSW ON ON OFF OFF Q102 ON OFF OFF OFF Xenon lamp ON OFF OFF OFF State of equipment Normal operation Scanner CPU overdriving Call for Service
6-8
6.5
6.5.1
CCD Control
Opto-electronic conversion
A CCD (charge-coupled device) is used to produce an electrical signal corresponding to the reflected light amount from the original. The CCD is a one-chip opto-electronic conversion device, comprised of several thousand light-receiving elements arranged in a line; each one of them is a few microns square. This model is equipped with a CCD which has 7,500 light-receiving elements. Each element of the light-receiving section consists of the semiconductive layers P and N. When the light irradiates the element, the light energy produces a (-) charge in the layer P; the amount of the charge produced is proportional to the energy and irradiating time. The charges produced in the lightreceiving section are then sent to the transfer section where they are shifted by the transfer clock from left to right as shown in the figure below, and are finally output from the CCD. At this time, to increase the transfer speed of the CCD, image signals in the even-number and odd-number elements are separated and output in parallel via two channels.
Transfer clock Transfer section
1 2 3 4 7497 7498 7499 7500
Light energy Layer N Layer P Details of light-receiving section
Light-receiving section
Transfer section Shift register

Fig.6-9
Transfer clock
6.5.2
Shading correction
Signal voltages read by the CCD have the following characteristics. 1) Light source has variation in its light distribution. 2) Since the light beam reflected from the original is converged using a lens, the light path is the shortest at the center of the CCD and the longest at ends. This causes difference in the amount of light reaching the CCD (i.e. the light amount is maximum at the CCD center, gradually decreases toward ends). 3) Each of the 7,500 elements varies in the opto-electronic conversion efficiency. These variations need to be corrected and this correction is referred to as shading correction. Based on the black and white data obtained in advance, a normalization process using the following formula is applied to the raw image data to correct lighting variance and element variation of the image data.
I=kx
k: S: K: W:
(S-K) (W-K)
Coefficient Image data before correction Black data (stored in "Black" memory) White data (stored in "White" memory)
6-9
6.6
Automatic Original Size Detection Circuit
This circuit detects the size of original (standard sizes only) using the reflection type photosensors arranged on the base frame of the scanner unit.
6.6.1
Principle of original size detection
The reflection type photosensors are placed on the base frame of the scanner unit as shown in the figure below. Each sensor consists of an infrared light emitting diode (LED) on the light emitting side, and a phototransistor on the light receiving side. When there is an original on the original glass, light beams from the LEDs are reflected by the original and led to the phototransistors. This means that the size of the original is detected by checking which phototransistors are turned on or are not.
[A4 Series]
Original Original glass
[LT Series]
Original Original glass
APS-R APS-C APS-2 APS-1 APS-3 APS-2 APS-3
APS-R APS-C
Fig.6-10
6 - 10
6.6.2
Process of original size detection
1) When the equipment is in the original size detection mode, the carriage-1 is set at its home position. 2) When the RADF is opened, the sensors receive the light reflected from the original and if one of the matrix conditions shown in 4) for original sizes is satisfied, the size of the original is instantly detected. 3) The output signal from each sensor is input to the CPU on the scanner control PC board to determine the size of the original.
[A4 Series]
APS-R
+5.1VD
[LT Series]
APS-R
+5.1VD
APS-C
IC10
Reflection type photosensor
APS-3
APS-C
IC10 Scanner CPU
Scanner CPU
Reflection type photosensor

APS-3
APS-2
APS-1
APS-2
SG
SLG board
SG
SLG board
Fig.6-11
6 - 11
Sensor detection points [A4 Series]
A5
B5
A4
APS-R
APS-C
A5-R
B5-R APS-3 APS-1 APS-2

Fig.6-12
A4-R B4 A3
[LT Series]
ST
LT
APS-C ST-R
APS-R
APS-3 LT-R LG
APS-2 LD
Fig.6-13
6 - 12
4) Original size is determined by the combination of the signals output from each detection point. Combination charts for size determination of A4 series and LT series are as followed. [A4 Series]
Size judgement A3 A4 B4 B5 A4-R A5 B5-R A5-R APS-1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 APS-2 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 APS-3 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 APS-C 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 APS-R 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
[LT Series]
Size judgement LD LT LG LT-R ST ST-R Code 1 0 APS-2 0 0 1 1 1 1 APS-3 0 0 0 0 0 1 APS-C 0 0 0 0 1 0 Original Not available Available APS-R 0 1 0 1 1 1
Output signal H L
When the APS operation sensor is OFF; The following points are determined by the output signals from APS sensors - Size (The combination of the signals satisfy the above chart) : Size is displayed on the control panel and an appropriate paper and reproduction ratio are selected. - Size retention (The combination of the signals do not satisfy the above chart) : Retains the latest original size recognized (or no original state) until a new paper size is recognized. - No original (output from all the sensors are 1.) : Reproduction ratio and paper size are not selected. Size change is always observed and detected. Carriage-1 stays at the standby position even if the reproduction ratio changes corresponding to the change of the original size. When the APS operation sensor is ON; Retains the latest original size (or no original state) recognized right before the APS operation sensor is turned ON regardless of the state of the APS sensor output signals.
6 - 13
About reflection type photosensor The reflection type photosensor is comprised of an infrared light emitting diode and a phototransistor. It uses the pulse modulation to detect an original.
Original
8 sec 130 sec LED Phototransistor
Fig.6-14
The light emitting diode is driven by a pulse having a 130-sec cycle and an 8-sec ON time. When the phototransistor receives the same signal as this pulse, it is determined that there is an original. The pulse modulation is performed inside the reflection type phototransistor.
6 - 14
6.7
[A] (1) (2)

Original glass Take off the top right cover ( P.2-44 "[C] Top right cover"). Remove 3 screws to take off the original glass holder.
6
Original glass holder
Fig.6-15
(3)
Remove 2 caps and 2 screws to take off the original glass.
Cap Original glass
Fig.6-16
6 - 15
[B] (1) (2) (3)
Lens cover Take off the original glass ( P.6-15 "[A] Original glass"). Disconnect 2 connectors. Remove 10 screws to take off the lens cover.
A4 series
Connector
Lens cover
Fig.6-17
Connector
LT series
Connector
Lens cover
Fig.6-18
Connector
[C] Automatic original detection sensor (APS sensor) (S1 / S2 / S3 / S4 / S5) (1) (2) Take off the lens cover ( P.6-16 "[B] Lens cover"). Remove 2 screws to take off the remaining APS sensor with its bracket.
Fig.6-19
6 - 16
(3)
Remove 1 screw to take off this APS sensor (S5) from its bracket.
APS sensor (S5)
Bracket
Fig.6-20
[C-1] (1) (2)
A4 series (S1 / S2 / S3 / S4) Take off the lens cover ( P.6-16 "[B] Lens cover"). Take off 4 APS sensors by disconnecting 1 connector and removing 1 screw for each sensor.
A4 series
S4 S3 S1
S2
Fig.6-21
[C-2] (1) (2)
LT series (S2 / S3 / S4) Take off the lens cover ( P.6-16 "[B] Lens cover"). Take off 3 APS sensors by disconnecting 1 connector and removing 1 screw for each sensor.
LT series
S4
S3
S2
Fig.6-22
6 - 17
[D] SLG board cooling fan (M23) (1) (2) Take off the lens cover ( P.6-16 "[B] Lens cover"). Disconnect 1 connector and remove 2 screws to take off the SLG board cooling fan.
SLG board cooling fan
Fig.6-23
[E] (1) (2) (3)
Exposure lamp (EXP) Take off the top rear cover ( P.2-44 "[E] Top rear cover"). Take off the original glass ( P.6-15 "[A] Original glass"). Move the carriage-1 to the left side.
Carriage-1
Fig.6-24
(4)
Disconnect the connector, release the clamp and remove 1 screw of the exposure lamp.
Fig.6-25
6 - 18
(5) (6)
Move the carriage-1 to the position where the side of the frame is cut out. Lift up the exposure lamp by holding its rear side to take it off.
Exposure lamp
Fig.6-26
Note: Rotate the drive pulley to move the carriage.
Drive pulley
Fig.6-27
[F] (1) (2)
Scanning section control PC board (SLG) Take off the lens cover ( P.6-16 "[B] Lens cover"). Disconnect 8 connectors and remove 4 screws to take off the SLG board.
SLG board
Fig.6-28
6 - 19
[G] Lens unit (1) Take off the lens cover ( P.6-16 "[B] Lens cover"]). Disconnect 1 connector, remove 4 screws and remove 2 washers to take out the lens unit.
Lens unit
Fig.6-29
Notes: 1. When replacing the lens unit, do not touch 10 screws denoted with arrows in the figure.
Fig.6-30
2. Handle the unit with extra care. Do not touch the adjusted area or lens.
Fig.6-31
6 - 20
[H] Carriage-1 (1) (2) Take off the lens cover ( P.6-16 "[B] Lens cover"). Move the carriage-1 to the left side and remove 2 screws.
6
Fig.6-32
(3)
Move the carriage-1 to the position where the side of the frame is cut out, and then pull its bracket downward.
Carriage-1
Bracket
Fig.6-33
(4)
Disconnect 1 connector of the SLG board. Then remove 3 stickers and release the harness from 2 clamps.
Sticker
Clamp
Fig.6-34
6 - 21
(5)
Rotate the carriage-1 in the direction shown in the figure at right, paying attention not to touch the mirror. Then take out the carriage1.
Carriage-1
Fig.6-35
Note: When installing the carriage-1, fix its bracket temporarily at the cutout of the frame. After that, move the carriage until it touches the left side of the frame, and then tighten 2 screws to fix it permanently.
(A)
(B)
(A) Carriage-1
Fig.6-36
[I] (1) (2)
Carriage-2 Take off the carriage-1 ( P.6-21 "[H] Carriage-1"). Install the wire holder jig on the wire pulley to prevent the wire from being loosened.
Wire holder jig
Fig.6-37
6 - 22
(3)
Remove the tension spring.

Tension spring
Carriage wire
Tension spring
Carriage wire
Fig.6-38
(4)
Remove the wire and slant the carriage-2 to take it out upward.
Carriage-2
Fig.6-39
[J] (1) (2)
Lamp inverter board (INV-EXP) Take off the carriage-1 ( P.6-21 "[H] Carriage-1"). Disconnect 2 connectors and remove 2 screws to take off the lamp inverter board.
Lamp inverter board
Carriage-1
Fig.6-40
6 - 23
[K] (1)
Scan motor [M1] Take off the top rear cover and the rear cover ( P.2-44 "[E] Top rear cover", P.2-47 "[L] Rear cover"). Disconnect the connector of the scan motor. Then remove 2 screws to take off the scan motor.
Scan motor
(2)
Fig.6-41
Note: Adjust the belt tension with a belt tension jig when installing the motor. <Adjustment procedure for the belt tension> 1) Remove 5 screws to take off the DF bracket.
DF bracket
Fig.6-42
2) Hook the belt tension jig to the position as shown in the figure. 3) Loosen the 2 screws, which fix the motor bracket, and then tighten them when the belt is strained. 4) Remove the belt tension jig and install the DF bracket.
Screw Scan motor
Belt tension jig
Screw
Fig.6-43
6 - 24
[L] (1)
Carriage home position sensor (S6)
Take off the top left cover ( P.2-44 "[D] Top left cover"). (2) Remove the protection sheet. (3) Disconnect 1 connector to take off the carriage home position sensor. Note: When the sensor has been replaced, be sure to put a new protection sheet.
Protection sheet
Carriage home position sensor

Fig.6-44
6 - 25
6 - 26
7.
7.1
IMAGE PROCESSING
General Description
The following diagram shows the process of the equipment from the input date to writing data on the photoconductive drum surface.
Image processing section Writing section
Copier Original
Original glass
Lens Scanning section [CCD]
7
Image processing/ scanning control section [SLG] Image processing/ writing control section [PLG] Laser drive section [LDR]
Printer Personal computer/ Server System section [SYS] Semiconductive laser element
USB/ Network
Temporary storage section [HDD]
Equipment control section [LGC]
Fig.7-1
The followings are the boards used for image processing.

Board Scanning section control PC board (SLG) Laser control PC board (PLG) Function High quality image processing, image memory editing, editing processing, gamma correction, gradation processing, scanner high quality image processing and external output system interface Smoothing processing, external input system interface, image area control, laser related control and printer high quality image processing
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 IMAGE PROCESSING
7-1 05/07
Image of an original placed on the original table is scanned by the optical system. The CCD (Charge Coupled Device) reads the optical image signals and converts them into the electrical signals. The electrical signals are amplified and undergo analog-to-digital conversion, then are changed into digital signals. Shading correction (correction of variance in CCD elements and the light source) is performed and the digital signal is output as an image signal from the scanning section.
CCD
Signal amplification
A/D conversion
Shading correction
to image processing section
Fig.7-2
The image processing section inputs the image signal from the scanning section and applies various image processing on the signal, then transmits the output result to the writing section. Images are processed by the SLG board (SLG) and PLG board (PLG) in this equipment. The image signal read in the scanning function is processed in SLG board (SLG) and the printer image signal is processed in the PLG board (PLG).
7-2
7.2
Configuration
The following diagram shows the image processing section of this equipment.
CCD board (CCD) CCD USB / Network
SLG board (SLG)
A/D conversion
Shading correction
7
SLG board (SLG) High-quality image processing Image memory editing Editing processing Gamma correction Gradation processing Scanner high-quality image processing External output system interface
SYS board (SYS) Sorting, group copy, magazine sorting, 2in1/4in1 (single-sided/ double-sided), image composition, date insertion, sheet insertion mode, etc
PLG board (PLG) Smoothing processing External input system interface Image area control Laser related control Printer high-quality image processing
LDR board (LDR) Laser drive
Image data flow
Fig.7-3
7-3 05/07
7.3
7.3.1
Scanning Section Control PC Board (SLG)

Features
1) The image processing section on the SLG board (SLG) is controlled by the CPU on the SLG board (SLG). 2) The image processing section on the SLG board (SLG) realizes the following when functioning the equipment: - High quality image processing - Image memory editing - Editing processing - Gamma correction - Gradation processing - External output system interface
7.3.2
Functions of image processing
1) High quality image processing - Background processing function (Range correction) This function removes undesirable background so that the original can be reproduced appropriately. By using the background adjustment function while manually adjusting the image density, undesirable background of the original can be removed if any, and some necessary but disappeared background can be recovered. By using this function, it is possible to cut the background density down to zero when copying originals which have a certain level of background density, such as newspapers. <Example>
Dynamic range width
Larger
No. of pixels
Text
Smaller Smaller
Lower
Density
Higher Histogram
Fig.7-4
No. of pixels
Background
Larger
After range adjustment
Extended dynamic range width
Lower
Density
Higher
7-4
Filtering This function is enabled by low-pass filter processing and high-pass filter processing. Low-pass filter processing This processing removes image/electrical noise and decreases moire by performing averaging operation between the image signals of the targeted pixel and those of the neighboring pixels to enhance the reproducibility of original. <Example> Density of the targeted pixel position is X. Density of pixel positions at front and back of the targeted pixel are a and b respectively. X is converted to X through the low pass filtering. When the matrix is (3 x 1):
x' = a+b+x 3
The above averaging operation is performed for all the pixels to accomplish the high reproducibility of original. The following is the case that the low pass filtering is applied on the primary scanning pixel.
Density
Density After low-pass filter
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Primary scanning pixel positions

Fig.7-5
Primary scanning pixel positions
High-pass filter processing Character outline blurs when the original, such as text, with big difference in density among the pixels is optically scanned and output from the CCD. Characteristic of the lens and other factors cause this phenomenon. In this equipment, processing such as edge enhancement is applied between the targeted pixel and the neighboring pixels to eliminate this phenomenon and realize high reproducibility of original.
Solid black area Low contrast area Original
Image signal
After correction
Fig.7-6
7-5
2) Image memory editing This function performs editing such as enlargement/reduction, mirror imaging, etc., by using a line memory. Pixel data for one line in the primary scanning direction is stored in the line memory and the memory is renewed at each line. Enlargement/Reduction Enlargement/Reduction is accomplished by using the line memory control function in the process of the image processing operation. <Example> Enlargement
100% 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
200%
<Example> Reduction
100% 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
50%
Fig.7-7
Mirror imaging This is accomplished by reading and outputting data from its end.
3) Editing processing This function performs trimming and masking. Trimming Using rectangular area signals, the image signals inside the rectangular area are left and the other image signals are eliminated. Masking Using rectangular area signals, the image data inside the rectangular area are erased. Negative/positive reversing This function reverses the entire date from negative to positive or vice versa.
4) Gamma correction This function corrects the input/output characteristics of the scanner/printer and adjusts the image signals so that the input/output characteristics would match with the copy mode. 5) Gradation processing This function switches the type of gradation processing depending on the copy mode: A type which selects the printer characteristics giving the priority to resolution such as for text data, and another which selects the printer characteristics giving the priority to gradation reproducibility such as for photographic images. 6) External output system interface This function controls the output of the output interface.
7-6
7) Scanner high quality image processing This function corrects the image signals scanned by the scanner and reproduces them in a higher image quality.
7-7
7.4
7.4.1
Laser Control PC Board (PLG)

Features
1) The image processing section on the PLG board (PLG) is controlled by the CPU mounted on the PLG board (PLG). 2) The image processing functions of the PLG board (PLG) realizes the followings: - Smoothing processing - External input system interface - Image area control - Laser related control - Printer high quality processing
7.4.2
Functions of image processing
1) Smoothing processing This function removes jaggy area, and output images after processing the smoothing the character outline. 2) External input system interface This function controls the input of the input interface. 3) Image area control This function sets the effective image area in horizontal and vertical directions to be output. 4) Laser related control This function performs the APC (Auto Power Control). 5) Printer high quality processing This function reproduces the image signals output from the printer controller sharper.
7-8
7.5
Laser Driving PC Board (LDR)
Image signals processed on the PLG board (PLG) are then processed by ASIC for writing control and LDR board (LDR). The signal is then laser controlled and written on the drum. ( P.8-7 "8.2.5 Laser driving board (LDR1/LDR2 board)")
7-9
7 - 10
8.
8.1
LASER OPTICAL UNIT

General Description
When scanned images and print data are printed, the laser optical unit creates a latent image by converting the digital image signals into laser beams and radiating them onto the photoconductive drum. The image signals are converted into a light emission signal of the laser diode on the laser driving board (LDR1, LDR2), and are radiated on the drum through optical elements such as the cylinder lenses, polygonal mirror and f lens. This unit must not be disassembled in the field because it is finely adjusted and very sensitive to dust. The laser unit with 2 beams is used only for the e-STUDIO850, and the 1-beam type for the eSTUDIO520/600/720.
Fig.8-1
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 LASER OPTICAL UNIT
8-1
e-STUDIO520/600/720
f lens 1 Laser driving PC board-1 Laser diode f lens 2 Finite focus lens Cylinder lens
Laser control PC board
Polygonal motor H-sync detection PC board
2nd turnup mirror
H-sync turnup mirror
1st turnup mirror Slit glass
[Laser optical unit overview]

Fig.8-2
8-2
e-STUDIO850
Laser driving PC board-1 Laser emission unit 1st laser diode f lens 1 Finite focus lens Laser driving PC board-2 2nd laser diode
f lens 2
Finite focus lens
Half mirror Galvanic mirror
8
Cylinder lens H-sync detection PC board Polygonal motor
2nd turnup mirror Laser control PC board H-sync turnup mirror
1st turnup mirror Slit glass (Laser beam exit)
[Laser optical unit overview]

Fig.8-3
8-3
8.2
8.2.1
Structure
Laser optical unit
This unit consists of the laser diode, finite focus lens, aperture, half mirror (*1), galvanic mirror (GLV) (*1) and cylinder lens. * 1: Used for the e-STUDIO850 only Laser diode This laser diode features low drooping, small laser variation and a low threshold current. The aperture determines the shape of the laser beam at the laser emission position. The laser diode radiates the laser beams responding to the laser emission control (ON/OFF) signals from the laser drive board. Laser beams which have passed through the finite focus lens are focused on the drum surface. Laser precautions A laser diode is used for this equipment and radiates an invisible laser beam. Since it is not visible, be extremely careful when handling the laser optical unit components, performing operations or adjusting the laser beam. Also never perform the procedure with other than the specified manuals because you could be exposed to the laser radiation. The laser unit is completely sealed with a protective cover. As long as only the operations of specified manuals are performed, the laser beam is not leaked and you are in no danger of being exposed to laser radiation. The following cautionary label for the laser is attached to the left side of the front-inner cover.
Fig.8-4
Cautions: Avoid expose to laser beam during service. This equipment uses a laser diode. Be sure not to expose your eyes to the laser beam. Do not insert reflecting parts or tools such as a screwdriver on the laser beam path. Remove all reflecting metals such as watches, rings, etc. before starting service. When servicing the equipment with the power turned ON, be sure not to touch live sections and rotating/operating sections. Avoid exposing your eyes to laser beam. During servicing, be sure to check the rating plate and cautionary labels such as "Unplug the power cable during service", "CAUTION. HOT", "CAUTION. HIGH VOLTAGE", "CAUTION. LASER BEAM", etc. to see if there is any dirt on their surface and if they are properly stuck to the equipment.
8-4
8.2.2
Polygonal motor unit
This unit consists of the polygonal motor (M2), polygonal mirror and polygonal mirror cover. a. Polygonal motor This motor rotates the polygonal mirror at a high speed. The DC motor controls the rotation speed of the motor as follows. e-STUDIO520/600/720 During printing: Approx. 60236.22 rpm (600 dpi) Approx. 61597.53 rpm (FAX 15.4 x 16.0 dot/mm) Approx. 59287.62 rpm (FAX 16.0 x 15.4 dot/mm) e-STIDIO850 During printing: Approx. 36318.898 rpm (600 dpi) Approx. 37139.685 rpm (FAX 15.4 x 16.0 dot/mm) Approx. 35746.946 rpm (FAX 16.0 x 15.4 dot/mm) b. Polygonal mirror The e-STUDIO520/600/720 has a 1-beam type of laser unit. One laser beam emitted from the laser diode is reflected by this mirror. As the polygonal mirror is rotated by the polygonal motor (M2), the reflected laser beam moves in sync with the rotation. The direction of the movement is the primary scanning direction of the image. One scan is performed on 1 plane of the polygonal mirror. As the polygonal mirror has 8 planes, 8 scans are performed in 1 rotation. e-STUDIO850 has a 2-beam type of laser unit. Two laser beams emitted from the laser diode are reflected by this mirror. Two scans are performed on 1 plane of the polygonal mirror. As the polygonal mirror has 8 planes, 16 scans are performed in 1 rotation.
8-5
(A)
Drum
(A)
Drum
Laser beam
Laser beam
(B)
(B)
Drum
Drum
Laser beam
Laser beam
(C)
(C)
Drum Laser beam

Fig.8-5
Drum Laser beam
[e-STUDIO520/600/720] One scan is completed by completion of steps (A) to (C). One scan is performed on one plane of the polygonal mirror. Eight scans can be made with one rotation of the polygonal mirror.
[e-STUDIO850] Two scan is completed by completion of steps (A) to (C). Two scan is performed on one plane of the polygonal mirror. Sixteen scans can be made with one rotation of the polygonal mirror.
c. Polygonal mirror cover The polygonal mirror cover reduces wind damage and noise, prevents adhesion of foreign matter on the mirror surface and releases heat by sealing the polygonal mirror.
8-6
8.2.3
f lenses 1 and 2
These two lenses perform the following adjustment on the laser beams reflected by the polygonal mirror. a. Uniform-velocity scanning Since the polygonal mirror is rotating at a uniform velocity, the laser beam reflected from Wider the mirror scans over the drum surface at a uniform angular velocity; namely, the pitch between the dots on the drum is wider at both Narrower ends than at the center of the scanning range. The f lenses help to correct this difference, making all the dot-to-dot pitches equal on the Drum drum surface.
f Lens-1 f Lens-2 Same intervals

Fig.8-6
b. Face tilt connection The reflecting face of the polygonal mirror is tilted slightly to one side against the perfect vertical. Horizontal deviation of the laser beam which is caused by the tilt is corrected.
Mirror plane is tilted.
Deviation
Fig.8-7
c. Sectional shape of laser beam The shape of the laser beam spotted on the drum is adjusted.
8.2.4
H-sync detection PC board (SNS board)
Laser beam which has started to be scanned from one of the reflected faces of the polygonal mirror is reflected by the H-sync detection mirror and goes into the PIN diode on the H-sync detection PC board (SNS). The primary scanning synchronizing signal is generated based on this reflected laser beam. For the e-STUDIO850, the rudder sensor is attached to the H-sync sensor to space out evenly (42.3 m), the intervals of the secondary scanning of the 1st and 2nd beams by its detection value.
8.2.5
Laser driving board (LDR1/LDR2 board)
This control board has the following functions: a. APC control function (adjusts disparity of the laser intensity caused by temperature) b. Laser ON/OFF function
8-7
8.2.6
Slit glass
Slit glass is located where the laser beams are output from the laser optical unit, and it protects the unit from dust.
8-8
8.3
Laser Diode Control Circuit
This equipment uses an AlGaAs type semiconductive laser with 10 mW of optical output power rating. This laser emits a beam in a single transverse mode in approx. 785 nm wavelength. PIN diode for monitoring optical output in this laser controls the laser intensity. The relation between the forward current and optical output of a semiconductive laser is as shown below. Beam emission starts when the forward current exceeds a threshold current, and then the laser outputs a monitor current which is proportionate to the optical output. Since semiconductive lasers have an individual variability in their threshold current and monitor current, the optical output needs an adjustment to be maintained at a certain value. The optical output of a semiconductive laser decreases as the laser temperature rises. Therefore APC (Auto Power Control) needs to be performed to maintain a constant optical output.
Regulation High temp.
Optical Output (mW)
Low temp. Forward current Monitor current Current (mA) Threshould current
Fig.8-8
A block diagram of the semiconductive laser control circuit is shown below. The semiconductive laser performs a monitor efficiency regulation (a process to control a monitor current for beam emission amount). The initial beam emission is adjusted to be approx. 2.5 mW (510 W on the drum surface) in the e-STUDIO520/600/720, and approx. 3.0 mW (300 W on the drum surface) in the e-STUDIO850. The voltage of the monitor output, which has been regulated by this adjustment, is then fed back to a laser power comparison circuit. In the laser power comparison circuit, this voltage fed back and a laser power voltage set for the control circuit are compared for every scanning. As the result of this, a laser driver circuit increases its forward current when the laser power is insufficient and decreases it when the laser power is excessive to maintain a constant optical output.
Power source
Laser power comparison circuit
Laser driver circuit
Semiconductive laser Constant optical output
Monitor efficiency regulation circuit
Monitor output
Fig.8-9
8-9
8.4
Polygonal Motor Control Circuit
The polygonal motor is a DC motor rotated by a clock signal (PMCLK-1) output from the Laser-CPU. This motor is controlled under PLL (Phase Locked Loop) to realize an accurate and constant rotation. Its rotation status is converted to a status signal (PMOK-0) and then output to the Laser-CPU. PMOK-0 signal moves to a low level only when the rotation status of the motor is constant. The Laser-CPU detects the rotation status with this signal, and emits a laser beam only when the rotation status is constant.
PLG board
PMON-0 PMCLK-1 IC25 Laser CPU
+5V
IC9 Buffer
Polygonal motor
PMOK-0
Fig.8-10
Signal PMON-0 PMCLK-1 PMOK-0
Function Polygonal motor ON signal Polygonal motor reference clock Polygonal motor PLL control signal
Low level ON Rotating at a constant speed
High level OFF Stopping or error
8 - 10
8.5
Laser Unit Cooling Fan Control Circuit
The laser unit cooling fan is a DC fan motor which sends air to the laser unit heated by the polygonal motor to cool down the unit. This fan is controlled to switch its rotation among three; high speed, low speed and stopping, according to the condition of the equipment.
LGC board
+24VA +24VA
LDFAN-0 IC56 LDFOF-1 ASIC
IC2
Laser unit cooling fan
DG
Fig.8-11
Signal LDFAN-0 LDFOF-1
Function Laser unit cooling fan high-speed rotation signal Laser unit cooling fan low-speed rotation signal
Relation between each signal level and the rotation of the fan (L = Low level, H = High level)
LDFOF-1 L H L H LDFAN-0 L L H H Rotation of Fan High speed Low speed Stopping
8 - 11
8.6
[A] (1)

Laser unit cooling fan Take off the top right cover, right upper cover, right center cover and right rear cover. ( P.2-44 "[C] Top right cover", P.2-45 "[F] Right upper cover", P.2-45 "[G] Right center cover", P.2-45 "[H] Right rear cover") Remove 1 screw, loosen 9 screws and take off the plate cover.
(2)
Plate cover
Fig.8-12
(3) (4)
Remove 1 screw fixing the Laser unit. (Not reguired for e-STUDIO850) Remove 2 screws and take off the laser unit fixing stay.
Laser unit fixing stay
Fig.8-13
(5)
Disconnect 1 connector and remove 2 screws to take off the laser unit cooling fan.
Laser unit cooling fan

Fig.8-14
8 - 12
[B] (1) (2)
Laser optical unit Remove the laser unit cooling fan. ( P.8-12 "[A] Laser unit cooling fan") Remove one screw and take off the Leaf spring.
Leaf spring
Fig.8-15
[B-1] (1) (2)
e-STUDIO850 Remove the original glass. ( P.6-15 "[A] Original glass") Loosen 2 laser unit setscrews.
Fig.8-16
(3)
Disconnect 2 connectors and pull out the laser unit.
Laser optical unit

Fig.8-17
8 - 13 05/04
[B-2] (1)
e-STUDIO520/600/720 Disconnect 2 connectors and pull out the laser unit.
Laser optical unit

Fig.8-18
[C] Laser control PC board (PLG board) (1) (2) (3) Remove the laser optical unit. ( P.8-13 "[B] Laser optical unit") Disconnect 3 connectors. (e-STUDIO850 : 5 connectors) Remove 4 screws and take off the Laser control PC board (PLG board).
Laser control PC board
Fig.8-19
Notes: 1. Do not leave fingerprints or stain on the slit glass. 2. Pay close attention not to make an impact or vibration on the laser optical unit because it is a precise apparatus. 3. Place the removed laser optical unit so as not to load on the polygonal motor. 4. Do not disassemble the laser optical unit in the field because it is precisely adjusted and very sensitive to dust and stain.
Fig.8-20
Slit glass
8 - 14 05/04
9.
9.1
PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM

General Description
This unit picks up a sheet of paper from the drawer, tandem LCF or bypass tray and transports it to the transfer position. The clutch controls the drive from the motor and drives each roller. Also, each sensor detects the transferring status of the sheet of paper. Fig. 9-1 shows the positioning of each roller and sensor from the first drawer to the registration roller. Fig. 9-2 shows the positioning of each roller and the sensor of the tandem LCF. Moreover, the composition of the paper feeding unit differs depending on the destination (machine version). The 4-drawer composition is for NAD, SAD and TWD (e-STUDIO600/720). The composition of the 2 drawers and tandem LCF is for other destinations.
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM
9-1
15
2 1
7 8 14
9 10 11 13 12
Fig.9-1
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Name Bypass pickup roller Bypass feed roller Bypass separation roller Bypass transport roller Registration roller (metal) Registration roller (rubber) Intermediate transport roller Transport roller
No. 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Name Drawer pickup roller Drawer feed roller Drawer separation roller Drawer feed sensor Drawer transport sensor Intermediate transport sensor Registration sensor
9-2
19
16 20 17 18 21
26
25
24
23
Fig.9-2
22
No. 16 17 18 19 20 21
Name 3rd drawer transport roller / Tandem LCF transport roller 3rd drawer feed roller / Tandem LCF feed roller 3rd drawer separation roller / Tandem LCF separation roller 3rd drawer pickup roller / Tandem LCF pickup roller 3rd drawer transport sensor 3rd drawer feed sensor
No. 22 23 24 25 26
Name End fence stop position sensor Standby side mis-stacking sensor Standby side empty sensor End fence home position sensor Tandem LCF
9-3
9.2
Functions
1) Pickup roller These rollers draw out paper from the bypass tray, drawer or tandem LCF and send it to the feed roller. 2) Feed roller This roller is placed against the separation roller. It transports paper from the pickup roller to the transport roller. 3) Separation roller This roller is placed against the feed roller. When two or more sheets of paper are sent from the pickup roller, the load of the torque limiter of the separation roller is greater than the frictional force between the sheets of paper. As the result, the separation roller is stopped and the lower paper is not advanced any further. When only one sheet of paper is sent from the pickup roller, the separation roller rotates following the feed roller. 4) Transport roller This roller transports the paper sent from the feed roller to the intermediate transport roller. 5) Intermediate transport roller This roller transports the paper sent from the transport roller to the registration roller. 6) Registration roller The paper sent from the intermediate transport roller is pushed against the registration roller which aligns the leading edge of paper. Then the registration roller rotates to transport the paper to the transfer section. 7) Bypass feed sensor (S27) This sensor detects if paper is set in the bypass tray. If it is, bypass feeding always comes before drawer feeding. 8) Empty sensor (S31, S37, S43, S49) This is an emission type sensor and detects the availability of paper in the drawer by using an actuator. When there is no paper in the drawer, the actuator blocks the light path of the sensor, and the sensor determines that there is no paper. 9) Feed sensor (S34, S40, S46, S52), Transport sensor (S33, S39, S45, S51) Feed sensor (S34, 40, 46, 52) detects if the leading edge or trailing edge of paper passed the feed roller. Transport sensor (S33, 39, 45, 51) detects if the leading edge or trailing edge of paper passed the transport roller. They also detects jams like misfeeding. 10)Registration sensor (S18) This sensor detects that the leading edge of paper has reached the registration roller and the trailing edge of paper has passed the registration roller. 11)Drawer / tandem LCF tray-up sensor (S32, S36, S42, S48) This sensor detects the tray position when the trays of the drawer and tandem LCF go up. It detects the amount of sheets placed in the drawer according to the time between when the drawer bottom sensor (S30, 36, 42, 48) is turned OFF and the drawer tray-up sensor (S32 ,38, 44, 50) is turned ON.
9-4
12)Drawer bottom sensor (S30, S36, S42, S48) This sensor detects the tray bottom position of the drawer. 13)Tandem LCF tray bottom sensor (S71) It detects the lower limit position (home position) on the LCF tray. 14)Standby side mis-stacking sensor (S72) It detects if sheets of paper placed in the feeding side tray or standby side tray are not within the tray (sheets are not aligned correctly). 15)End fence home position sensor (S73) It detects the end fence home position. 16)Standby side empty sensor (S74) It detects the presence/absence of a sheet of paper on the standby side tray. 17)End fence stop position sensor (S75) The tandem LCF end fence motor (M42) drives the end fence. The end fence pushes a sheet of paper placed on the standby side tray, and moves it to the feeding side tray. The end fence stop position sensor (S75) detects the stopping position of the end fence so that the sheet is not pushed too much.
9-5
9.3
9.3.1
Operation
Operation of bypass pickup roller
Spring Pickup arm Lever
Bypass pickup solenoid
Shaft
Bypass pickup roller
Bypass feed roller

Fig.9-3
When the bypass pickup solenoid (SOL3) is turned ON, the plunger is pulled and the lever is revolved and brought down. The pickup arm, which is linked with the lever, is also brought with the lever by its own weight. When the bypass pickup solenoid (SOL3) is turned OFF, the pickup arm is brought up by the spring force. The driving force transmitted through the bypass feed clutch (CLT4) is also transmitted to the bypass feed roller through the shaft and then to the bypass pickup roller through the timing belt. The roller is rotated by this driving force.
9-6
9.3.2
Operation of drawer pickup roller
Lever
Fig.9-4
When the drawer is inserted, the protrusion at the rear side of the drawer pushes the lever to the direction of A. Then the pickup roller and roller holder are lowered by the spring force.
9.3.3
Paper separation
This model is equipped with a separation roller which works to prevent multiple paper feeding. The separation roller unit consists of the feed roller, separation roller, torque limiter, etc., as shown at right. The feed roller is rotated by the feed clutch in the direction of the white arrow at the same timing as the pickup roller rotation. The figure at right shows how duplicate feeding is prevented: Since the friction between two sheets is small, the lower sheet is not transported any further while the upper sheet is transported by the feed roller in the direction of the black arrow.
Feed roller
Torque limiter Separation roller

Fig.9-5
9-7
[Example] When only one sheet enters between the rollers: Since the transporting force of the feed roller is greater than the braking force of the separation roller, the separation roller follows the feed roller, making the sheet go forward to the registration roller. When two sheets enter between the rollers at the same time: Since the transporting force of the feed roller and the breaking force of the separation roller are greater than the frictional force between two sheets, the paper A is transported to the direction of the black arrow and the paper B is braked by the separation roller and is not transported any further.
Feed roller
A B
Separation roller
Fig.9-6
9-8
9.3.4
Driving
[Feeding area of the drawer or tandem LCF]
The drive of each motor in the paper feeding area activates the paper transfer roller as follows.
Feeding motor (M20)
Timing belt Gear, Pulley
Drawer feed clutch (CLT6, 8, 10, 12) Drawer pickup roller Drawer feed roller Drawer separation roller
Gear
Drawer transport clutch (CLT5, 7, 9, 11) Transport roller
[Bypass feeding area] Gear Bypass feed clutch (CLT4) Bypass pickup roller Bypass Transport roller Bypass separation roller
Registration motor (M16)
Timing belt Pulley
Registration roller
Transport motor (M17) Tray-up motor-1 (M21)
Timing belt Pulley
Intermediate transport roller
Tray in the first and second drawer
Tray-up motor-2 Tray in the third and fourth drawer (M22) (* For NAD, SAD and TWD (e-STUDIO600/720))
Tandem LCF Tray-up motor Tray of the Tandem LCF (M41) (* Except for NAD, SAD and TWD (e-STUDIO600/720)) Tandem LCF end fence motor Gear, Timing belt (M42) (* Except for NAD, SAD and TWD (e-STUDIO600/720)) End fence
9-9
9.3.5
[A] (1)
General operation
From power ON to standby status When the equipment is turned ON, the tray-up motor-1 (M21) is activated and 1st drawer tray starts to rise. When the 1st drawer tray-up sensor (S32) is turned ON (H -> L), the tray-up motor1 (M21) is turned OFF and the tray is stopped. At this time, if the 1st drawer empty sensor (S31) is OFF (L), it is judged that there is no paper in the drawer. With the 1st drawer empty sensor (S31) being ON (H), there is paper in the drawer. The tray stops at the raised position regardless of availability of paper. Then the tray-up motor-1 (M21) starts to rotate in reverse and 2nd drawer starts to be lifted. 2nd drawer tray is stopped in the same manner as 1st drawer tray and the 1st drawer empty sensor (S31) detects if there is paper in the drawer. When the drawer is not completely inserted when the equipment is turned ON, the tray for that drawer tray is not raised. When the drawer is inserted completely, the drawer tray is raised and checks the availability of the paper. When either of the sensors at the transport path is ON (meaning there is paper on the transport path) when the equipment is turned ON, it is determined that a paper jam has occurred and no operation is enabled until the paper is removed. Standby status After the drawer tray is moved up and availability of paper is checked as described above, the equipment enters the standby state. In the standby mode, the drawer tray remains at raised position. When a drawer is inserted or removed in the standby state, the tray is raised again to check the availability of paper.
(2)
(3)
[B] (1)
(2)
[C] Bypass feeding The bypass feed sensor (S27) detects the availability of paper. The bypass feed clutch (CLT4) is turned ON and the bypass pickup roller and bypass feed roller rotate. The bypass pickup solenoid (SOL3) is turned ON and the bypass pickup roller is lowered to start feeding. The leading edge of the paper turns ON the registration sensor (S18) and the paper is aligned with the registration roller. The bypass feed clutch (CLT4) is turned OFF and the bypass pickup roller and the bypass feed roller are stopped, and then the bypass pickup roller is raised. The registration motor (M16) is turned ON and paper is transported to the transfer unit.
[D] Drawer feeding The feed clutch (CLT6, 8) is turned ON and the pickup roller and feed roller rotate to start feeding.
9 - 10
The leading edge of paper turns ON the transport sensor (S33, 39, 45, 51), the feed clutch (CLT6, 8) is turned OFF and the transport clutch (CLT5, 7) is turned ON. The leading edge of paper turns ON the registration sensor (S18) and paper is aligned with the registration roller. The transport clutch (CLT5, 7) is turned OFF and the transport roller is stopped. The registration motor (M16) and transport clutch (CLT5, 7) are turned ON and paper is transported to the transfer unit.
9 - 11
9.3.6
[A] (1)
Description of Tandem LCF Operation
After power is ON to ready When the equipment is turned ON, the pre-running operation at warming up is started. The tandem LCF tray-up motor (M41) starts to rotate forward and raises the feeding side tray. When the tray turns ON the tandem LCF tray-up sensor (S44), the tandem LCF tray-up motor (M41) is turned OFF, and then the tray is stopped. At this time, when the tandem LCF empty sensor (S43) is ON, it is judged that there is paper in the feeding side tray. On the other hand, the absence of paper in the feeding side tray is assumed when the tandem LCF empty sensor (S43) is OFF, and the standby side empty sensor (S74) is subsequently checked. When the standby side empty sensor (S74) is OFF, that means there is no paper in the standby side tray, and it is therefore assumed that there is no paper in the tandem LCF. When the standby side empty sensor (S74) is ON, the paper in the standby side tray is moved to the feeding side tray. The tandem LCF tray-up motor (M41) is rotated in reverse and lowers the feeding side tray. The lowered tray turns ON the tandem LCF bottom sensor (S71), and the tandem LCF tray-up motor (M41) is turned OFF to stop the tray. The tandem LCF end fence solenoid (SOL8) and tandem LCF pickup solenoid (SOL7) are then turned ON. The tandem LCF end fence motor (M42) rotates forward and the paper in the standby side tray is moved onto the tray of the feeding side. The tandem LCF end fence motor (M42) is stopped for a second when the end fence stop position sensor (S75) is turned ON, and the motor (M42) immediately starts to rotate in reverse to return the end fence to the position where the end fence home position sensor (S73) is turned ON. When the returning operation is started, the tandem LCF end fence solenoid (SOL8) and tandem LCF pickup solenoid (SOL7) are turned OFF, and the tandem LCF tray-up motor (M41) is rotated forward to raise the feeding side tray. The tandem LCF tray-up motor (M41) is turned OFF when the tray being raised turns ON the tandem LCF tray-up sensor (S44) and stops the tray. At this time, the presence of paper is judged when the tandem LCF empty sensor (S43) is ON. If the power is turned ON when the drawer has been removed, the tray raising movement is not operated. The tray is raised as soon as the drawer is installed, and it detects if there is paper in the drawer. If either of the tandem LCF feed sensors (S46) is ON (paper remains on the transport path) when the power is turned ON, that means a paper jam has occurred and the operation is disabled until the paper is removed. Ready status Trays detect the paper as described in [A], and the equipment goes into the ready status. The tray goes down automatically when the drawer is removed. It is raised as soon as the drawer is reinstalled and checks if there is paper in the drawer.
(2)
(3)
[B] (1) (2)
[C] From the start to the end of printing (1) (2) The feed motor (M20) starts driving when the [START] button is pressed. When the equipment judges that the tandem LCF is ready for feeding paper, it turns ON the tandem LCF feed clutch (CLT10). This clutch drives the pickup roller and feed roller to feed paper from the tray.
9 - 12
(3) (4) (5)
The tandem LCF transport clutch (CLT9) is turned ON to drive the transport roller when the specified period of time has passed from the start of feeding. When the leading edge of the paper turns the tandem LCF feed sensor (S46) ON, the tandem LCF feed clutch (CLT10) is turned OFF and feeding from the tandem LCF is completed. The paper is transported by the transport roller. If the trailing edge of the sheet previously transported still remains at the 2nd drawer transport sensor (S39) when the leading edge of the paper reaches the tandem LCF feed sensor (S46), the tandem LCF transport clutch (CLT9) is turned OFF to stop the transport of the paper. When the trailing edge of the paper turns the tandem LCF feed sensor (S46) OFF, the tandem LCF then becomes ready for feeding the next sheet of paper, and the procedures (2) to (5) are repeated for the number of the printout. When printing is completed, the feed motor (M20) is turned OFF.
(6)
(7)
[D] Jam detection (1) A paper jam occurs in the following cases. Tandem LCF feed sensor (S46) is not turned ON within a specified period of time after the feeding is started. The leading edge of the paper does not pass the tandem LCF feed sensor (S46) in the transport path within a specified period of time. Open the right lower cover, remove all the paper remaining on the transport path and close the cover to clear the paper jam. If either of the tandem LCF transport sensor (S45) is still ON when the right lower cover is closed, it is determined that there is still paper on the transport path and the paper jam status is not cleared. When a paper jam occurs in the tandem LCF during continuous copying, the sheet that was fed before the jam is copied normally. Call for Service When the tandem LCF tray-up sensor (S44) is not turned ON even though the specified period of time has passed since the tray started to be raised, it is assumed that the drawer is not operational and the corresponding message is displayed on the control panel. When the tandem LCF bottom sensor (S42) is not turned ON even though the specified period of time has passed since the tray started to be lowered, it is assumed that the drawer is not operational and the corresponding message is displayed on the control panel. When the end fence stop position sensor (S75) is not turned ON even though the specified period of time has passed since the end fence started to move the paper in the standby side tray, it is assumed that the tandem LCF is not operational and the corresponding message is displayed on the control panel. When the end fence home position sensor (S73) is not turned ON even though the specified period of time has passed since the end fence started to move the paper in the standby side, it is assumed that the tandem LCF is not operational and the corresponding message is displayed on the control panel.
(2)
(3)
[E] (1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
9 - 13
(5)
The states (1) to (4) are cleared by turning the power OFF and solving the problems.
9 - 14
9.4
Tray-up motor control circuit
The tray-up motor is a DC motor driven by the control signal output from the PFC CPU on the LGC board and moves up the tray in each drawer. The motor driver outputs the drive signal (PUTRM-0/1A, PLTRM-0/1A) to the motor based on the control signal (PUTRM-0/1, PLTRM-0/1). The motor operates the forward rotation, reverse rotation, brake or stop according to the status of these drive signals.
LGC board
+24VC
PUTRM-0 IC72
PUTRM-0A Tray-up motor-1
PUTRM-1
Motor driver
PUTRM-1A
IC57 PFC CPU
DG +24VC
PLTRM-0 IC36
PLTRM-0A Tray-up motor-2
PLTRM-1
Motor driver
PLTRM-1A
DG
9
Fig.9-7
Tray-up motor drive signal

Signal PFC CPU output Motor driver output PUTRM-0 PUTRM-1 PUTRM-0A PUTRM-1A PLTRM-0 PLTRM-1 PLTRM-0A PLTRM-1A L L OFF (high impedance) L H L H H H L H H L L L Motor Status OFF Forward rotation (CW) Reverse rotation (CCW) Brake
9 - 15
9.5
Feed motor control circuit
The feed motor is a DC motor driven by the control signal output from the PFC CPU and ASIC on the LGC board and rotates the pick-up roller, feed roller, separation roller and transport roller for each drawer, the tandem LCF and bypass unit. When the ON/OFF signal (PFMON-0) output from the PFC CPU is L level, the feed motor is driven at a speed based on the frequency of the reference clock signal (PFMCK-1) output from the ASIC.
LGC board
IC57 PFC CPU IC62 Buffer PFMON-0
PG +36VA
Feed motor IC56 ASIC IC39 Buffer PFMCK-1

+5.1VC
SG
Fig.9-8
9 - 16
9.6
Transport motor control circuit
The transport motor is a stepping motor driven by the control signal output from the PFC CPU on the LGC board and rotates the intermediate transport roller. The transport motor is driven by the pulse signal (MTMA-0, MTMB-0, MTMAB-0, MTMBB-0) output from the motor driver. These pulse signals are formed based on the reference clock signal (MTMCK-0), and output only when the enable signal (MTMEN-0) is L level. Also, the rotation speed of the motor can be switched by changing the output timing of each pulse signal.
LGC board
MTMCK-0 IC39 Buffer
MOT2-MT board
MTMA-0 MTMB-0
MTMRF-0 IC57 PFC CPU

+5VSW
IC1 Motor driver MTMAB-0 MTMBB-0 Transport motor
MTMEN-0 Q62
SG
Fig.9-9
Transport motor drive signal

MTMCK-0 Pulse signal Signal MTMEN-0 L L H MTMRF-0 L H Motor status Rotation when accelerating/ decelerating Rotation at a constant speed Stop
9 - 17
9.7
Registration motor control circuit
The registration motor is a stepping motor driven by the control signal output from the main CPU on the LGC board and rotates the registration roller. The main CPU outputs each phase signal (RGTA-0, RGTB-0, RGTC-0, RGTD-0) to the motor driver. The motor driver converts this phase signal into a +24 V pulse signal (RGTA-0A, RGTB-0A, RGTC-0A, RGTD-0A) and outputs it to the motor. Also, the rotation speed of the motor can be switched by changing the output timing of each pulse signal.
LGC board
Q56 RGTVR-0
+5.1VC
RGTA-0A
IC58
SG
RGTB-0A RGTA-0 RGTB-0 RGTC-0 RGTD-0 RGTD-0A IC82 Motor driver RGTC-0A Registration motor
Main CPU
Fig.9-10
Registration motor drive signal

Signal RGTA-0 RGTB-0 RGTVR-0 RGTC-0 RGTD-0 Pulse signal L H
Motor status
Rotation when accelerating/ decelerating Rotation at a constant speed
9 - 18
9.8
Tandem LCF tray-up motor / end fence motor
The tandem LCF tray-up motor and end fence motor, which are DC motors driven by the control signal output from the PFC CPU on the LGC board, move the tray up in the tandem LCF and shift the end fence. The motor driver outputs the drive signal (TLTRM-0/1A, TLTMM-0/1A) to the motor based on the control signal (TLTRM-0/1, TLTMM-0/1) output from the PFC CPU. The motor operates the forward rotation, reverse rotation, brake or stop according to the status of these drive signals.
LGC board
+24VC
TLTRM-0 IC8 TLTRM-1 Motor driver
TLTRM-0A Tandem LCF tray-up motor
TLTRM-1A
IC57 PFC CPU
DG +24VC
TLTMM-0 IC7 TLTMM-1 Motor driver
TLTMM-0A Tandem LCF end fence motor
TLTMM-1A
DG
9
Fig.9-11
Tray-up motor / end fence motor drive signal

Signal PFC CPU output Motor driver output TLTRM-0 TLTRM-1 TLTRM-0A TLTRM-1A TLTMM-0 TLTMM-1 TLTMM-0A TLTMM-1A L L OFF (high impedance) L H L H H H L H H L L L Motor status OFF Reverse rotation (CCW) Forward rotation (CW) Brake
9 - 19
9.9
[A] (1) (2)

Paper feeder unit / Bypass feed unit Take off the right rear cover ( P.2-45 "[H] Right rear cover") Open the right center cover to disconnect 1 connector.
Bypass feed unit

Fig.9-12
(3)
Remove 2 pins and take off the bypass feed unit by lifting it and the feeder side center cover up.
Pin
Fig.9-13
(4)
Open the right lower cover and take it off by lifting it up. (5) Pull out the drawer completely. Note: If the drawer is not pulled out completely, when the paper feeder unit is taken off, the sensor may get damaged.
Right lower cover

Fig.9-14
9 - 20
(6)
Disconnect 1 connector and remove 3 screws to take off the paper feeder unit. Note: There are 4 identical paper feeder units (when the LCF is installed, there are 2).
Paper feeder unit
Fig.9-15
[A-1] (1)
Pickup roller, Feed roller and Separation roller Remove 1 clip to take off the pickup roller.
Pickup roller
Fig.9-16
(2)
Remove 2 screws to take off the guide.

Guide
Fig.9-17
9 - 21
(3) (4)
Remove 1 clip to take off the feed roller. Remove 1 clip to take off the separation roller.
Feed roller
Separation roller
Fig.9-18
[A-2] (1)
Drawer empty sensor (S31/S37/ S43/ S49) Disconnect 1 connector to take off the drawer empty sensor.
Drawer empty sensor
Fig.9-19
[A-3] (1) (2)
Tray-up sensor (S32/S38/S44/S50) Disconnect 1 connector. Pull the lever and take off the tray-up sensor while the pickup roller is lowered.
Tray-up sensor
Fig.9-20
9 - 22
[A-4] (1)
Transport sensor (S33/S39/S45/S51)
Remove 1 screw to take off the transport sensor with its bracket. (2) Disconnect 1 connector to take off the transport sensor. Note: When installing the sensor, make sure the sensor arm moves properly.
Transport sensor
Fig.9-21
[A-5] (1)
Feed clutch (CLT6/CLT8/CLT10/CLT12) and Transport clutch (CLT5/CLT7/CLT9/CLT11) Release the harness from the harness clamp. Then remove 1 screw to take off the clutch cover.
Clutch cover
Fig.9-22
(2)
Disconnect each connector and remove 1 Ering to take off the feed clutch and transport clutch. Notes: 1. When installing the clutch, do not insert the wrong harness. 2. Fit in the protrusion of the clutch to the stopper. 3. When fixing the clutch with the E-ring, be sure that the one side of the E-ring latch does not overlap the flat part of the shaft.
Harness: Black
Transport clutch
Harness: Purple Feed clutch

Fig.9-23
9 - 23
[A-6] (1)
Drawer detection sensor (S29/S35/S41/S47) Disconnect 1 connector to take off the drawer detection sensor.
Drawer detection sensor
Fig.9-24
[A-7] (1) (2)
Drawer feed sensor (S34/S40/S46/S52) Remove 1 screw to take off the drawer feed sensor with its bracket. Disconnect 1 connector to take off the drawer feed sensor.
Drawer feed sensor
Fig.9-25
[A-8] (1)
Drawer bottom sensor (S30, S37, S42, S48)
Take off all the feed units. ( P.9-20 "[A] Paper feeder unit / Bypass feed unit") (2) Disconnect the connector and take off each drawer bottom sensor. Note: Equipment with the LCF does not have the 3rd and 4th drawer bottom sensors.
Drawer bottom sensor
Fig.9-26
9 - 24
[B] (1) (2)
Intermediate transport unit Take off the first paper feeder unit. ( P.9-20 "[A] Paper feeder unit / Bypass feed unit") Disconnect 1 connector and remove 3 screws to take off the intermediate transport unit.
Intermediate transport unit

Fig.9-27
[B-1] (1)
Motor driving PC board (MOT2-MT)
Release the harness from the harness clamp. Then remove 2 screws to take off the bracket. Note: Be careful not to drop the gear because it will comes out of place when its bracket is taken off.
Gear
Bracket
Fig.9-28
Gear
(2) (3)
Remove 1 screw on the varistor. Removing 4 screws and 4 bushings to take off the paper guide.
Paper guide Varistor
Fig.9-29
9 - 25
(4)
Disconnect 2 board connectors and release 4 lock supports to take off the board.
Motor driving PC board

Fig.9-30
[B-2] (1) (2)
Transport motor (M17) Disconnect 1 connector. Remove 2 screws to take off the motor.
Transport motor
Belt
Fig.9-31
[B-3] (1) (2)
Transport roller Remove 1 E-ring to pull out the bearing from the shaft. Remove the pin of the pulley by moving the shaft toward the motor. Then remove the pulley and bearing to take off the transport roller with its shaft.
Bearing Pin
Pulley
Bearing
Fig.9-32
9 - 26
(3)
Remove 2 E-rings to pull out the transport rollers from the shaft.
Transport roller
Fig.9-33
[B-4] (1) (2)
Intermediate transport sensor (S17)
Disconnect 1 connector. Take off the sensor while the sensor arm is pushed downward (the shield plate is pushed upward). Note: When installing the sensor, make sure the sensor arm moves properly.
Intermediate transport sensor
Sensor arm
Fig.9-34
[C] Bypass feed unit (1) Take off the bypass feed unit. ( P.9-20 "[A] Paper feeder unit / Bypass feed unit")
9 - 27 05/07
[C-1] (1)
Bypass feed roller / Pickup roller Remove 1 clip and 1 bushing and displace the bypass transport roller.
Bypass transport roller

Fig.9-35
Bushing
Clip
(2)
Remove 2 clips and take off the bypass feed roller / pickup roller by sliding the bushing and pulley to the inside.
Pickup/feed roller unit
Clip
Fig.9-36
(3)
Remove 2 clips and pull out the shaft to take off the pickup roller. (4) Remove 2 clips and pull out the shaft to take off the paper feed roller. Notes: 1. When assembling the roller, do not install the wrong bushing. 2. Be sure to install the feed roller in the correct direction because it has a one-way clutch inside it. 3. Make sure there is no staining such as oil on the surface of the timing belt, pulley and roller.
One-way clutch
Feed roller
Plastic bushing Metal bushing
Pickup roller
Fig.9-37
9 - 28
[C-2] (1)
Bypass feed clutch (CLT4)
Disconnect the connector and then remove the harness band and clip to take off the bypass feed clutch. Note: When assembling, be sure that the stopper of the clutch is securely inserted into the groove of the bracket.
Connector
Clip
Bypass feed clutch Harness band
Fig.9-38
[C-3] (1)
Bypass pickup solenoid (SOL3) / Bypass feed sensor (S27) Remove 5 screws, disconnect 2 connectors and take off the stay.
Connector
Screw
Stay Screw
Screw Connector
Fig.9-39
(2)
Disconnect the connector and take off the bypass feed sensor.
Bypass feed sensor
Stay
Fig.9-40
9 - 29
(3) Remove 2 screws to take off the solenoid. Notes: 1. When installing the solenoid, install it for the edge of the solenoid to get in phase with the edges of the plate.
Screw
Bypass pickup solenoid

Fig.9-41
2. When installing the solenoid, fix it at the position where the bosses of two gears are put each other. 3. Put on the spring in the place shown by the figure.
Marking
Spring
Fig.9-42
[C-4] (1)
Separation roller Remove 4 screws to take off the paper guide.
Screw
Paper guide
Screw
Screw
Fig.9-43
9 - 30 05/07
(2)
Remove 1 clip and take off the separation roller by lifting the shaft.
Separation roller
Clip
Fig.9-44
[C-5] (1) (2)
Bypass paper size detection sensor (S28) Disconnect 1 connector and release it from the clamp. Remove 2 brackets on both sides of the tray and 2 screws each to take off the bypass tray.
Connector
Screw
9
Screw
Fixing bracket
Fig.9-45
(3)
Remove 3 screws and release 4 latches to take off the bypass tray upper cover.
Bypass tray upper cover Latch
Screw
Fig.9-46
Latch
9 - 31
(4)
Remove 1 screw and take off the ground leaf spring. (5) Remove 1 screw (white arrow) and take off the bracket. Note: Install the bracket with its indicator pointed to its original position.
Bracket
Screw
Earth plate spring
Pointer
Fig.9-47
(6)
Disconnect 1 connector and remove 1 screw to take off the bypass paper size detection sensor.
Bypass paper size detection sensor Connector Screw
Fig.9-48
Note: Pay attention to the following things when setting up the bypass feed roller and pickup roller. - Put the clip in the groove of the shaft completely. - Make sure there is no adhesion of oil and such on the timing belt, pulley and roller. - Be careful not to install the bypass pickup roller and feed roller in a wrong direction. - Install the feed roller for the one-way clutch to come to the rear side.
Feed roller
Feeding direction
Pickup roller Separation roller
Fig.9-49
9 - 32
[D] Feed motor (M20) (1) (2) Take off the rear cover. ( P.2-47 "[L] Rear cover") Disconnect 1 connector, release 1 lock support and then remove 3 screws to take off the feed motor.
Locking support
Connector
Feed motor Screw
Screw
Fig.9-50
[E] (1)
Tray driving unit (upper/lower) / Tray-up motor (M21, M22)
Take off the switching regulator. ( P.2-51 "[E] Switching regulator (PS)") (2) Remove 4 screws to take off the tray driving unit (upper). Note: Both the upper and lower sides have the same tray driving units.
Connector Screw
Tray drive unit
Screw
Fig.9-51
(3)
Reverse the tray driving unit and release 6 latches to take off the cover. Note: The spring which pushes open the cover is inside the tray driving unit, so be careful when you remove the cover.
Cover Coupling
Coupling
Spring
Spring
Fig.9-52
9 - 33
(4) Take off the tray-up motor. Note: Align the boss of the gear and the hole of the cover when installing the tray-up motor.
Tray-up motor
Boss Boss
Fig.9-53
[F] (1) (2) (3)
Feed driving unit Take off the switching regulator. ( P.2-51 "[E] Switching regulator (PS)") Take off the feed motor. ( P.9-33 "[D] Feed motor (M20)") Disconnect 1 connector and remove 5 screws to take off the AC input.
Screw AC inlet
Screw
Screw
Fig.9-54
Connector
(4)
Release the harness from the clamp and remove 6 screws to take off the feed driving unit.
Feed drive unit
Screw
Screw
Screw
Fig.9-55
9 - 34
[G] Registration roller unit (1) (2) (3) (4) Take off the cleaner unit. Remove 1 screw and take off the fixing bracket. Open the right center cover and disconnect 1 connector. Pull out the registration roller unit toward the front side while tilting it.
Registration roller unit
Fixing bracket
Fig.9-56
[G-1] (1) (2)
Registration roller (rubber) Remove 2 screws and take off the paper guide. Remove 1 screw and take off the plate spring.
Paper guide Plate spring

Fig.9-57
(3)
Remove 1 clip and 2 springs.

Clip
Spring
Fig.9-58
9 - 35
(4)
Slide the registration roller to the front side, then take off the rear side to remove it.
Registration roller (rubber)
Fig.9-59
(5)
Take off 2 bushings, gear and pin.
Bushing Bushing
Gear
Pin
Fig.9-60
[G-2] (1) (2)
Registration sensor (S18) Remove 1 screw and take off the sensor with the bracket. Disconnect 1 connector, release the latch and take off the sensor.
Registration sensor
Fig.9-61
9 - 36
[G-3] (1)
Paper dust removal brush 1 (for the rubber registration roller) Remove 1 screw and take off the paper dust removal brush.
Paper dust removal brush-1
Fig.9-62
[H] Paper dust removal brush 2 (for the metallic registration roller) (1) (2) Take off the developer unit. ( P.12-19 "[C] Developer unit") Remove 1 screw and take off the paper dust removal brush.
Paper dust removal brush-2
Fig.9-63
[I] (1) (2) (3) (4)
Registration motor (M16) Take off the SYS board. ( P.2-47 "[L] Rear cover") Remove 3 screws and take off the flywheel. Remove 3 screws and take off the motor with the bracket. Remove 2 screws and take off the motor.
Registration motor
Screw
Screw
Fig.9-64
9 - 37
[J] (1) (2)
Tandem LCF Pull out the tandem LCF Remove 4 screws and take off the tandem LCF.
Tandem LCF
Fig.9-65
[J-1] (1) (2)
Standby side mis-stacking sensor (S72) Remove 1 screw and take off the bracket. Disconnect 1 connector, release the latch and take off the Standby side mis-stacking sensor.
Standby side mis-stacking sensor
Fig.9-66
[J-2] (1) (2)
Tandem LCF end fence motor (M42) Remove 1 E-ring and take off 1 bushing. Disconnect 1 connector, remove 3 screws and take off the motor with the bracket.
Tandem LCF end fence motor
Bushing
Fig.9-67
E-ring
9 - 38
(3)
Release 2 gear latches and remove the gear.

Gear
Latch
Fig.9-68
(4)
Remove 3 screws and take off the tandem LCF end fence motor.
Tandem LCF end fence motor
Fig.9-69
[J-3] (1) (2) (3)
Tandem LCF end fence solenoid (SOL8) Remove 4 screws and take off the bracket. Remove 1 screw and take off the tray-up unit side wall. Remove 2 screws, disconnect 1 connector, and take off the tandem LCF end fence solenoid.
Bracket
Side wall
Tandem LCF end fence solenoid

Fig.9-70
9 - 39
[J-4] (1)
Tandem LCF bottom sensor (S71) Remove 2 screws and take off the plates.
Fig.9-71
(2)
Remove 2 screws and take off the tray-up unit.

Tray-up unit
Fig.9-72
(3)
Disconnect 1 connector, release the latch and take off the tandem LCF bottom sensor.
Tandem LCF bottom sensor
Fig.9-73
9 - 40
[J-5]
End fence home position sensor (S73) / Standby side empty sensor (S74) / End fence stop position sensor (S75) Remove 1 screw and take off the plate cover.
End fence Plate cover
(1)
Fig.9-74
(2)
Disconnect the connector for each sensor, and take off the sensor.
End fence stop position sensor
End fence home position sensor
Standby side empty sensor

Fig.9-75
[J-6] (1) (2)
Tandem LCF tray-up motor (M41) Take off the switching regulator. ( P.2-51 "[E] Switching regulator (PS)") Disconnect 1 connector, remove 3 screws and take off the Tandem LCF tray-up motor.
Screw
Tandem LCF tray-up motor

Fig.9-76
Screw
9 - 41
9 - 42
10. PROCESS RELATED SECTION

10.1 Construction
This chapter describes the following unit regarding the image forming process. Main charger Charger wire cleaner Discharge LED Ozone filter Surface potential sensor High-voltage transformer Temperature/Humidity sensor The drum/cleaner unit is described in chapter 11, the developer unit is described in chapter 12 and the transfer/transport unit is described in chapter 13.
Main charger Discharge LED Drum surface potential sensor Charger wire cleaner
10
Drum
Fig.10-1
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 PROCESS RELATED SECTION
10 - 1
10.2 Functions
(1) Main charger The main charger is configured by stretching a charger wire between two insulation blocks provided at both ends of the U-shaped metal rod. When a high voltage is applied to the charger wire, the air around the wire is ionized (electrostatically charged), and this ionized air is attracted onto the drum's surface. This phenomenon is referred to as the "corona discharge". In the dark, the surface of the drum is negatively (-) charged by the corona discharge of the main charger. Charger wire cleaner It removes stains on the charger wire regularly to avoid poor charging and drum irregularities. The charger wire cleaner pad is pushed against the charger wire and moved to and fro on the wire to clean it. The charger wire cleaner drive motor (M12) moves the charger wire cleaner to and fro. It cleans the wire when the power is turned ON, the cover interlock switch (SW8) is turned ON or 2000 or more continuous copies have been made since the previous cleaning. Discharge LED (ERS) Discharging is a process of reducing or eliminating the electrostatic charges on the drum. The discharge LED have two effects: a cleaning effect and a pre-exposure one. The cleaning effect neutralizes and eliminates the residual charges on the drum surface by lowering the electrical resistance of the photosensitive surface as a result of exposing it to the light, and the pre-exposure effect keeps a fixed drum surface potential before the charging process. There is an array of 14 LEDs with a 660 nm wavelength. Ozone filter Ozone produced by corona discharge of the main charger is exhausted through this filter. The catalyzer of the ozone filter degrades the ozone. Drum surface potential sensor (S13) It detects the surface potential of the photoconductive drum and performs control to keep the difference between the surface potential and the development bias constant. High-voltage transformer This board creates the output control voltage of the main charger, charge grid, power supply roller and developer bias. Temperature/Humidity sensor (S7) This sensor (S7) and drum thermistor (THM5) detect the temperature and humidity inside of the equipment since the drum, developer material and paper are affected by environmental elements such as temperature or humidity. Thus the main charger grid, transfer belt, developer bias, laser output and auto-toner output are controlled to be at their optimum states. The temperature/humidity sensor (S7) is installed in the control panel.
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
10 - 2
10.3 Charger Wire Cleaner Control Circuit

10.3.1 General description
The charger wire cleaner control circuit drives the main charger wire cleaner in a periodical reciprocating movement to clean the main charger wire, on purpose of eliminating defective or irregular charging over the drum.
10.3.2
Configuration
The configuration of this control circuit is shown below. Wire cleaner drive motor: Drives the wire cleaner in a reciprocating movement. Wire cleaner position detection switch: Detects that the wire cleaner has reached to its home position (front side) or its stop position (rear side). Control section (LGC board): Outputs the drive signal to the wire cleaner drive motor and detects the input signal from the wire cleaner position detection switch
[Front]
[Rear]
LGC board
Main charger / wire cleaner drive unit

MCLSW-0A Wire cleaner drive motor Wire cleaner position detection switch
10
IC56 ASIC IC58 Main CPU
Wire cleaner WCLMTA-0A WCLMTB-0A
Main charger wire IC9 Motor driver WCLMTA-0 WCLMTB-0
Fig.10-2
Drive signal of wire cleaner drive motor (L = Low level, H = High level)
Signal WCLMTA-0A L H L H WCLMTB-0A L L H H Motor Status Off Forward rotation (Stop position > Home position) Reverse rotation (Home position > Stop position) Brake
Input signal of wire cleaner position detection switch

Signal MCLSW-0A Low level Cleaner detected (Cleaner reached to its home position or its stop position) High level Cleaner not detected(During cleaning)
10 - 3
10.4 High-voltage Transformer Control Circuit

The high-voltage transformer is controlled by the on-off signal of each bias output from the ASIC on the LGC board, and the reference voltage (Vctr) output through a D/A converter. The high-voltage transformer generates the output current or the output voltage of each bias, based on the input +24V voltage (+24 VG).
LGC board
+24VB IC58 Main CPU Main charger bias Main charger wire bias IC27 NVRAM Grid bias Grid Main charger wire HVTER-0
+24VB
Leakage detection
Adjustment value
HVTM-0A HVDAC-0A HVTAC-0
Developer bias Developer AC Magnetic roller
HVDDC-0A Developer DC IC56 ASIC HVTT-0A HVTBB-0A Transfer bias HVMVR-1A IC18 Digital data D/A converter HVDVR-1A HVTVR-1A Analog data (Reference voltage: Vctr) Transfer belt cleaning bias Transfer belt cleaning brush
Transfer belt power supply roller
Fig.10-3
10 - 4
10.4.2
Description of operation
The function and operation of each signal are as follows. On-off signal (HVTM-0A, HVDAC-0A, HVDDC-0A, HVTT-0A, HVTBB-0A): These signals are the on-off signals of each bias output to the main charger (main charger wire and grid), developer bias (AC/DC), transfer belt power supply roller, and transfer belt cleaning brush. When these signals move to a low level, the generating circuit of each bias on the high-voltage transformer becomes on status, thus the current or voltage is output. Reference voltage (Vctr) (HVMVR-1A, HVDVR-1A, HVTVR-1A): These analog voltages are the reference for each output of the main charger grid, developer bias (DC) and transfer belt power supply roller. Each output of the high-voltage transformer can be changed linearly by changing these reference voltages. The output procedure of the reference voltages is shown below. The adjusted values of the main charger bias, developer bias and transfer bias in the NVRAM are output to the ASIC. The data of the reference voltage is output from the ASIC to the D/A converter. Digital-to-analog conversion at the D/A converter The reference voltage (Vctr) of each bias is output to the high-voltage transformer. The high-voltage transformer generates the output current or output voltage proportionate to the reference voltage. * * The reference voltage (Vctr) can be adjusted in the Adjustment Mode (05). The output of the transfer belt cleaning brush was adjusted at a constant value when the high-voltage transformer was shipped from the factory, and this adjusted value has been fixed since then.
10
Developer AC bias generating clock (HVTAC-0A): This clock signal is a reference for the AC component of the developer bias. Leak detection signal (HVTER-0): This signal detects the abnormality (leakage) of the high-voltage transformer output. When the abnormality is detected, the signal moves to a low level.
10 - 5
10.5 Drum Surface Potential Sensor Control Circuit

The drum surface potential sensor measures the surface potential of the drum when the drum is charged. Based on the measured value, this sensor controls the main charger grid bias voltage, and thus can control the drum surface potential accurately.
10.5.2
Configuration
The configuration of this control circuit is shown below. Drum surface potential sensor: Measures the drum surface potential. Control section (LGC board): Calculates the main charger grid bias voltage to be applied when the image quality control is performed, then controls the high-voltage transformer to adjust its bias voltage output. High-voltage transformer: Generates and supplies the bias voltage of the main charger grid.
LGC board
Drum surface potential sensor
IC18 Reference voltage: Vctr D/A converter Digital data
IC56 ASIC
Main charger grid
IC27 NVRAM
Adjustment value IC58 Main CPU DRV0-1A
Drum
Fig.10-4
10 - 6
10.5.3
Description of operation
1) Correction control procedure of drum surface potential - The setting value of the main charger bias voltage when the surface potential stored in the NVRAM is measured is output to the Main-CPU. - The reference voltage data (digital data) is output from the Main-CPU to the D/A converter through the ASIC. - The reference voltage data is converted at the D/A converter into the reference voltage (Vctr) (analog data), and the data is then output to the high-voltage transformer. - The high-voltage transformer outputs the main charger bias voltage based on the reference voltage, and thus the drum is charged. - The drum surface potential is measured by the drum surface potential sensor, and the measured value (DRV0-1A) is then fed back to the Main-CPU. - The current state of the drum (deterioration) is assumed based on the measurement result of the drum surface potential, and then the result is sent to the image quality control circuit. - The image quality control changes the image formation condition to make the image density and the line width appropriate. At this time, the image quality control determines the main charger bias output (effective value). - The determined effective value of the main charger bias is stored in the NVRAM. 2) Timing of drum surface potential measurement The drum surface potential is measured with the performance of the image quality control. The image quality control is performed at the timing as follows. - When the power is turned ON first thing in the morning or during warming-up after a specified period of time has passed since the last operation - When a print job is completed after a specified number of sheets have been printed out - When a print job is resumed after a toner cartridge empty status has been released * The drum surface potential measurement and whether or not the result reflects to the image quality control can be set in the Setting Mode (08).
10
10 - 7
10.6 Temperature/humidity detection circuit

10.6.1 Outline
The temperature/humidity detection circuit detects the temperature and humidity inside of the equipment by means of the corresponding sensor so that the printing quality is not changed due to their adverse influence where the equipment is set up, and corrects the output of the auto-toner sensor or similar according to the result.
10.6.2
Construction
The temperature/humidity detection circuit is composed as shown in the figure below. It converts the voltage of each analog signal output from the temperature/humidity sensor into a digital signal by means of the A/D converter embedded in the main CPU on the LGC board. The voltage of each analog signal output from the temperature/humidity sensor becomes higher when the temperature or humidity is.
Control panel
KEY1 board Temperature/ humidity sensor TEMPS-1A RTH (Temp) DSP board
LGC board
+5.1VC +5.1VC
THSCH-1
SG
TEMPS-1/ HUMIS-1
IC58 Main CPU
1 SG
IC24
+ -
VRHV (Hum)
HUMIS-1A
IC12
SG
SG
Fig.10-5
Signal THSCH-1 TEMPS-1A HUMIS-1A
Function Temperature/humidity switch signal Temperature detection signal (analog) Humidity detection signal (analog)
Low level Temperature detection -
High level Humidity detection -
10 - 8
10.7 Disassembly and Replacement

[A] (1) (2) (3) Main charger Take off the toner cartridge drive unit. ( P.12-15 "[A] Toner cartridge drive unit") Remove 3 screws and take off the left inner cover. Remove 1 stepped screw and pull out the main charger.
Main charger
Screw
Fig.10-6
(4)
Press the button to release the tension of the main charger grid, and then release the hook to remove the grid.
Main charger grid
10
Button
Fig.10-7
(5)
Take off 1 finger and then the front terminal cover.

Terminal cover
Latch
Fig.10-8
10 - 9
(6)
Take off 2 fingers and then the rear terminal cover.

Latch
Terminal cover
Fig.10-9
(7)
Pull up the terminal, remove the spring and release the hook on the rear side to take off the charger wire.
Charger wire
Terminal
Spring
Fig.10-10
(8)
Remove 1 screw and take off the cleaning pad.

Cleaning pad
Screw
Fig.10-11
10 - 10
Note: When assembling the main charger, install it so that the charger wire passes through the center of the pad.
Cleaning pad
Charger wire
Cleaning pad
Fig.10-12
[B] (1) (2)
Wire cleaner drive unit / Wire cleaner drive motor (M12) Take off the cleaner unit. ( P.11-7 "[A] Cleaner unit") Disconnect 1 connector, remove 1 screw, and then take off the wire cleaner drive unit.
Charger guide
Screw
10
Cleaner unit
Fig.10-13
Main charger
(3)
(4)
Disconnect 1 connector, remove 1 screw, and then take off the wire cleaner drive motor (M12) with the bracket. Remove 2 screws and take off the wire cleaner drive motor.
Screw
Screw
Wire cleaner drive motor

Fig.10-14
10 - 11
(5)
Disconnect 2 connectors, remove 1 screw, and then take off the wire cleaner position detection switch (SW4). Note: Push the switch in the direction of arrow A to fix it. Also, carefully insert the connector into the terminal of the color of the harness, and then bend the terminal 45 .
Black
Purple
Connector Screw
(A)
Fig.10-15
[C] Discharge LED (ERS) (1) (2) Take off the wire cleaner drive unit. ( P.10-11 "[B] Wire cleaner drive unit / Wire cleaner drive motor (M12)") Disconnect 1 connector.
Connector
Fig.10-16
(3)
Lift the connector side of the discharge LED slightly to release the lock, and then slowly pull out the discharge LED from the guide. Note: Assemble the discharge LED so that all fingers of the guide are hooked.
Latch
Discharge LED
Lock pin
Discharge LED
Fig.10-17
10 - 12
[D] Drum surface potential sensor (S13) (1) (2) Take off the cleaner unit. ( P.11-7 "[A] Cleaner unit") Disconnect 1 connector, remove 1 screw, and then take off the sensor bracket.
Screw
Sensor braket
Fig.10-18
(3)
Disconnect 1 connector, remove 1 screw, and then take off the surface potential sensor (detection section).
Connector
Screw
10
Drum surface potential sensor(board section)
Fig.10-19
(4)
Disconnect 1 connector, release 4 lock supports, and then take off the surface potential sensor (board section). Note: The drum surface potential sensor consists of the detection section and the board section as a set.
Drum surface potential sensor (detection section)
Locking support
Locking support
Fig.10-20
10 - 13
[E] (1) (2)
Temperature/humidity sensor (S7) Take off the control panel unit. ( P.5-17 "[A] Control panel unit") Disconnect 1 connector, remove 1 screw, and then take off the temperature/humidity sensor.
Temperature/humidity sensor Screw
Fig.10-21
[F] (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
Exhaust duct Take off the wire cleaner drive unit. ( P.10-11 "[B] Wire cleaner drive unit / Wire cleaner drive motor (M12)") Pull out the transfer/transport unit. Take off the left upper cover. ( P.2-46 "[I] Left upper cover") Open the left lower cover (exit cover). Disconnect 3 connectors and release the harness from 4 clamps. Remove 1 screw, slide the exhaust duct to the front side to release the hook, and then pull it out toward you.
Connector
Fig.10-22
Clamp
Connector
Screw
Exhoust duct
[G] Duct out fan (M27) / Exit section cooling fan (M29) (1) (2) (3) (4) Take off the exhaust duct. ( P.10-14 "[F] Exhaust duct") Disconnect 1 connector and pull out the duct out fan. Disconnect 1 connector, remove 2 screws, and then take off the exit section cooling fan with the bracket. Remove 2 screws and take off the exit section cooling fan from the bracket.
Duct out fan
Exit section cooling fan

Fig.10-23
10 - 14
[H] Ozone filter (1) (2) Remove 1 screw on the left face of the rear cover and pull out the ozone filter. Remove the ozone filter from the case.
Ozone filter
Fig.10-24
10
10 - 15
10 - 16
11. DRUM/CLEANER UNIT

11.1 Construction
This chapter describes the drum and cleaner unit. The cleaner unit consists of the drive section, cleaning section, recovered toner transport section, image quality sensor (S14), drum separation finger, etc.
Laser beam Drum cleaning blade Drum thermistor
Drum
Drum cleaning brush Recovered toner transport auger
Drum recovery blade
Image quality sensor Drum separation finger

Fig.11-1
11
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 DRUM/CLEANER UNIT
11 - 1
11.2 Functions
(1) Drum It is a cylindrical aluminum base on which an organic photosensitive material (photoconductor) is thinly applied. A photoconductor becomes insulative (high electric resistance) at dark places (out of the light), while it becomes conductive (low electric resistance) under the light, so it is called a photoconductor. Drum cleaning blade It is made of polyurethane rubber. It scrapes off the residual toner on the drum surface by being pressed against the drum with a certain pressure by the weight. You can separate the blade from the drum by turning the cam manually in order to release the pressure. Drum recovery blade It catches the toner scraped off by the drum cleaning blade. Recovered toner transport auger It corrects and transfers the toner scraped off by the drum cleaning blade and caught by the drum recovery blade. The toner is transferred to the recycle unit to be reused. Drum separation finger It separates paper not separated from the drum on the transfer belt. Image quality sensor (S14) It detects the adhered toner amount from the reflective rate for the test pattern formed on the drum in order to maintain a proper image density and line width. Drum thermistor (THM5) Since the charging amount changes depending on the temperature of the drum surface, the drum thermistor detects the temperature of the drum surface. Drum cleaning brush It eliminates the paper dust and extraneous substances adhering to the drum surface after the paper has been separated. It also decreases the friction of the drum cleaning blade to lengthen its life span, which improves the image reliability. Drum motor (M11) It drives the drum through the timing belt, pulleys and couplings.
(2)
(3) (4)
(5) (6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10) Cleaning brush driving motor (M13) It drives the drum cleaning brush and recovered toner transport auger through the timing belt, pulleys and gears. (11) Drum separation finger solenoid (SOL1) It works only when the leading edge of the paper is passing the drum. The drum separation finger is pressed against the drum by this solenoid and the finger separates the paper forcibly from the drum.
11 - 2 05/04
11.3 Drum Temperature Detection Circuit

The drum temperature detection circuit is composed as shown in the figure below. It converts the input voltage from the drum thermistor into a digital signal by means of the A/D converter embedded in the main CPU on the LGC board. The drum thermistor is an element whose resistance value is smaller when the temperature is higher. Therefore, when the temperature becomes higher, the input voltage to the main CPU becomes lower.
LGC board
+5.1VC
DRTH-0A
IC58 Main CPU
Drum thermistor
SG
SG
Fig.11-2
11
11 - 3
11.4 Image Quality Control

11.4.1 Outline
This equipment performs image quality control with the image quality sensor. Image quality control is for altering the image formation condition to minimize the changing of the image density and line width caused by the setting environment for the equipment and the life of consumables. The image quality sensor detects the density of the test pattern developed on the drum, and the image formation condition is changed depending on the result.
11.4.2
Construction
The construction of the control circuit is as follows. Image quality sensor: This sensor emits the light corresponding to the voltage of the light source amount signal output from the control section onto the drum, and outputs the voltage corresponding to the reflected light amount of the drum and the test pattern (toner image) on the drum. Control section (LGC board): This section performs image quality control mainly with the main CPU, which outputs the light source amount signal (CTDVR-1A) of the image quality sensor by a D/A converter, and converts the reflected light amount signal (CTDS-1) into a digital signal by mean of the A/D converter embedded in the main CPU and reads it, and then sets the image formation condition based on the read result. Image formation process system: This system consists of the process of charging, laser exposing and developing. Each process is operated based on the image formation condition set by the control section. When image quality control is performed, the laser unit exposes the test pattern on the drum.
Image formation process system Laser exposure LGC board
Various image formation conditions
Main charger Developing
Test pattern IC58

IC18 Light source amount signal (CTDVR-1A signal)
Drum
Main CPU
D/A converter
Reflected light amount signal (CTDS-1 signal) A/D converter
Image quality sensor
Fig.11-3
11 - 4
11.4.3
Principle of Image Quality Sensor
The image quality sensor applies the light to the drum and test pattern (toner image) developed on the drum and outputs the voltage corresponding to its reflected light amount. Toner amount on the drum is calculated from the reflected light amount obtained by this sensor.
Image quality sensor Light source intensity signal Reflected light intensity signal Light emitting element Light sensing element
Test pattern (Toner image)
Drum
Fig.11-4
11.4.4
Flow of control
11
Start controlling (e.g. during the pre-running after the power has been turned ON)
[1] Setting of the reference image formation condition
[2] Adjustment of the sensor
[3] Formation of the test pattern
[4] Reading of the value for the image quality sensor Back to [3]
[5] Determination (Is the toner amount of the test pattern within the permissible amount?)
YES
NO
[6] Changing of the image formation condition
[7] Finish controlling (Reflecting the determined image formation condition to the following printing)
11 - 5
11.5 Drum motor control circuit

The drum motor control circuit is composed as shown in the figure below. It drives the drum motor by the drive signal output from the main CPU on the LGC board, and rotates the drum. The drum motor is a stepping motor driven by the pulse signal (DRMA-0, DRMB-0, DRMAB-0, DRMBB0) output from the motor driver. These pulse signals are formed based on the reference clock signal (DRCLK-0), and output only when the enable signal (DRMEN-1) is L level. Also, the rotation speed or direction of the motor can be switched by changing the output timing of each pulse signal. The rotation speed can be switched by the motor current switch signal (DRMVR-0), and the rotation direction can be switched by the motor rotation direction switch signal (DRMCW-0).
LGC board
DRCLK-0 DRMCW-0 IC2 IC58 Main CPU
+5VSW
IC125 Buffer
MOT board
DRMA-0 DRMB-0 Motor driver DRMAB-0 DRMBB-0 Drum motor
DRMVR-0
DRMEN-1 Q60
IC13 Buffer
SG
Fig.11-5
Drum motor drive signal

DRCLK-0 Pulse signal Signal DRMEN-1 DRMVR-0 L L L L L H L H H DRMCW-0 L H L H Motor status Forward rotation when accelerating/decelerating Reverse rotation when accelerating/decelerating Forward rotation at a constant speed Reverse rotation at a constant speed Stop
11 - 6

[A] (1) (2) Cleaner unit Take off the main charger. ( P.10-9 "[A] Main charger") Disconnect 1 connector and remove 2 screws to pull out the cleaner unit.
Screw Screw
Cleaner unit
Fig.11-6
Main charger
[B] (1)
Drum thermistor (THM5) and Drum
Take off the cleaner unit ( P.11-7 "[A] Cleaner unit") (2) Disconnect 1 connector and remove 1 screw to take off the drum thermistor with its bracket. (3) Remove 1 screw to take off the drum thermistor. Note: When installing the thermistor, tighten it with the 0.2-0.6Nm torque.
Connector Screw
11
Drum thermistor
Fig.11-7
(4) (5)
Turn the cam to release the pressure of the cleaning blade. Remove 3 screws to take off the drum shaft.
Cam
Drum shaft
Fig.11-8
11 - 7
(6)
Take out the drum upward.
Fig.11-9
(7) (8)
Remove 3 screws to take off the flange on the front side. Pull out the drum upward.
Screw
Screw
Fig.11-10
<<Precaution when installing the drum shaft>> Make sure that the gap plate is not caught with the drum shaft. Be sure to install the drum shaft and cleaner frame without a gap. No foreign matter must be attached on the cleaner stay.
Cleaner stay Gap plate No gap
Fig.11-11
11 - 8
[C] Cleaning blade (1) (2) Take off the drum. ( P.11-7 "[B] Drum thermistor (THM5) and Drum") Remove 4 screws to take off the cleaner top cover.
Screw
Cleaner top cover Screw
Fig.11-12
(3)
Remove 1 screw to take off the cleaning blade by holding both sides of the plate. Note: Do not touch the edge of the cleaning blade.
Cleaning blade Screw
11
Fig.11-13
[D] Recovery blade (1) (2) Take off the cleaning blade. ( P.11-9 "[C] Cleaning blade") Separate the recovery blade gently.
Recovery blade
Fig.11-14
11 - 9
Notes: 1. When replacing the recovery blade, be sure to separate it completely because it is attached with the two-sided adhesive tape. 2. Attach the recovery blade by pushing its lower edge against the step of the cleaner frame. (A in the figure on the right)
Recovery blade Drum (A)
Cleaner flame
Fig.11-15
[E] (1) (2)
Cleaning brush Take off the drum. ( P.11-7 "[B] Drum thermistor (THM5) and Drum") Pull out the shaft held on the rear side to take out the cleaning brush.
Cleaning brush
Holding shaft
Fig.11-16
[F] (1) (2)
Image quality sensor (S14) Take off the cleaner unit. ( P.11-7 "[A] Cleaner unit") Disconnect 1 connector and remove 2 screws to take off the image quality sensor.
Image quality sensor

Fig.11-17
11 - 10
Note: Do not touch the board parts (especially the 3 variable resistors shown in the figure) of the image quality sensor.
Variable resistor
Variable resistor
Fig.11-18
[G] Drum separation finger (1) (2) (3) Take off the drum. ( P.11-7 "[B] Drum thermistor (THM5) and Drum") Take off the image quality sensor. ( P.11-10 "[F] Image quality sensor (S14)") Remove 2 screws to take off the plate on the rear side.
Screw
11
Screw
Fig.11-19
Plate
(4)
Remove the E-ring to take off the cam.
E-ring
Fig.11-20
Cam
11 - 11
(5) (6) (7)
Take off the shaft of the separation finger by sliding it to the front side. Remove 1 screw each to pull out the separation finger from the shaft. Remove 1 E-ring and 1 screw, and then take off the separation finger (in the middle) from the shaft.
Separation finger
(1) (2)
Fig.11-21
Notes: 1. When assembling, be sure that the arm is in the hole of the separation finger.
A
Hole Pin
B
Pin Hole
Fig.11-22
2. Make sure you assemble the drum separation finger with the weight screws in the correct direction. 3. Be sure to install the separation finger in the correct position because the shape of the separation finger in the middle and on the outer side is different.
Weight screw Weight screw
Fig.11-23
11 - 12
[H] Drum motor (M11) / Motor driving PC board (MOT) (1) (2) Take off the rear cover, SYS board and then hard disk with its bracket. Remove 3 screws to take off the drum wheel.
Drum wheel Screw
Screw
Fig.11-24
(3)
Disconnect 1 connector and remove 3 screws to take off the drum motor with its bracket. Note: When installing the drum motor, tighten the screw while the bracket is pushed against the motor in the direction of the arrow. Remove 3 screws to take off the drum motor.
Drum motor
Screw
Connector
(4)
Screw
Fig.11-25
11
[I] (1) (2)
Cleaning brush drive motor (M13) / Drum separation finger solenoid (SOL1) Take off the exhaust duct. ( P.10-14 "[F] Exhaust duct") Remove 1 screw and take off the stay.
Stay
Fig.11-26
11 - 13
(3)
Disconnect 2 connectors, remove 3 screws and take off the motor and solenoid with the bracket.
Bracket
Fig.11-27
(4) (5)
Remove 2 screws and take off the cleaning brush drive motor. Remove 2 screws and take off the drum separation finger solenoid.
Drum separation finger solenoid
Cleaning brush drive motor
Screw
Screw
Fig.11-28
11 - 14
12. DEVELOPER UNIT

12.1 Construction
This chapter describes about the following units related to the development process, parts, control circuit, etc. Toner cartridge drive unit Toner recycle unit Developer unit - Developer material - Mixer unit - Paddle - Transport sleeve (magnetic roller) - Upper/Lower developer sleeve - Doctor blade - Auto-toner sensor - Scattered toner recovery roller Developer unit drive section
Upper developer sleeve Lower developer sleeve Transport sleeve
Drum Doctor blade Mixer unit
12
Paddle Scattered toner recovery roller

Fig.12-1
Auto-toner sensor
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 DEVELOPER UNIT
12 - 1
12.2 Functions
(1) Toner cartridge The toner cartridge is filled with the toner and the toner is supplied to the developer unit. In this equipment, the toner cartridge can be replaced without stopping any operation when the toner cartridge becomes empty during printing. The remaining amount of the toner can be detected in the following 3 steps. Detecting that the toner in the toner cartridge has decreased The drive count of the new toner transport motor (M6) theoretically can be a detection of decreased toner amount in the toner cartridge. Detecting that the toner cartridge is empty The toner cartridge empty sensor (S10) detects that the toner cartridge has become empty. This sensor is installed on the toner cartridge holder, and detects the presence of the toner in the cartridge by the contact of the toner to the sensor surface. Even after the cartridge is detected as empty, a small amount of toner still remains in the subhopper. This remaining toner enables to print approx. 2,000 sheets of A4/LT paper so that the toner cartridge can be replaced during this printing, without stopping the printing operation. When the front cover (upper) is opened for the cartridge replacement during printing, the recycle toner transport motor (M8) continues running but the new toner supply motor (M5) is stopped. While the cover is opened, the equipment exits only a number of sheets specified in the code 08-1520. When the number of sheets being exited exceeds this specified number, the printing is interrupted. When the cover is closed, the printing is resumed. Detecting lowered toner density in the developer unit (printing is disabled) The auto-toner sensor (S12) detects that the toner in the developer unit has been consumed by detecting the toner density in the unit.
Note: Calculation of the pixel counter is not used for the above detection of the amount of toner remaining.
12 - 2 05/04
(2)
Toner cartridge drive unit The toner cartridge drive unit consists of the toner cartridge holder which rotates the toner cartridge, and the sub-hopper.
New toner supply motor Toner cartridge detection switch Toner cartridge holder
Toner cartridge empty sensor
New toner transport motor
Developer unit
Sub-hopper
Fig.12-2
Toner cartridge holder The toner cartridge holder includes a coupling to hold the toner cartridge, the new toner supply motor (M5) to rotate the cartridge, the toner cartridge detection switch (SW2) to detect the rotation of the cartridge, and the toner cartridge empty sensor (S10) to detect the empty status of the cartridge. New toner supply motor (M5) The drive of the new toner supply motor (M5) is transmitted to the toner cartridge holder through the pulley, timing belt and gear, and thus the coupling of the holder is rotated. The cartridge is rotated along with the rotation of the coupling to supply the toner. Toner cartridge detection switch (SW2) This switch detects the rotation of the toner cartridge. Toner cartridge empty sensor (S10) This sensor is a piezoelectric type sensor which detects the empty status of the cartridge. When the toner is adhered on the surface of this sensor, a correct detection cannot be performed. Therefore a blade to scrape off the toner adhered on the sensor surface is equipped on the toner cartridge holder. This blade is rotated by the drive of the new toner supply motor (M5). Sub-hopper The sub-hopper consists of the paddle to mix the toner transported from the cartridge, and the auger to transport the toner to the developer unit.
12
12 - 3
New toner transport motor (M6) The new toner transport motor (M6) drives the paddle and auger of the sub-hopper through the pulley, timing belt and gear. Therefore the drive of the toner cartridge holder differs from that of the sub-hopper.
(3)
Toner recycling unit A toner recycling system is adopted in this equipment. The toner, which has been recovered from the drum surface by the drum cleaner, is transported to the developer unit by the toner recycling unit, and thus the transported toner is recycled. This unit consists of the recycle toner hopper to collect and mix the recycle toner, and the pipe to transport the recycle toner from the drum cleaner to the recycle toner hopper.
Hopper motor Recycle toner transport motor
Pipe
Drum cleaner
Recycle toner
Recycle toner hopper
Developer unit
Fig.12-3
Recycle toner hopper This hopper includes the paddle and auger driven by the hopper motor (M7). Pipe The auger is equipped in the pipe to transport the toner. This auger is driven by the recycle toner transport motor (M8).
12 - 4
(4)
Developer unit The developer unit of the e-STUDIO850 has a different structure (driving gear) from that of eSTUDIO520/600/720 due to its copy speed. The developer unit of the e-STUDIO520/600/720 has a protrusion on its rear side to prevent a wrong installation. Developer material The developer material consists of the carrier and toner. The carrier is a conductive ferrite whose size is 30-100 m. The toner consists of 5-20 m size resin particles. The developer material requires a periodic maintenance since it deteriorates in a long-term use and print images may be influenced by this deterioration. Mixer The carrier and toner generate a friction when the developer material is mixed. The carrier is positively charged while the toner is negatively charged, and thus the toner is adhered on the drum by static electricity caused by this charging. Paddle The paddle supplies the developer material mixed by the mixer to the transport sleeve. Also the paddle returns the developer material separated from the lower developer sleeve to the mixer section. Transport sleeve / Developer sleeve (Magnetic roller) These sleeves are aluminum rollers which include a magnet in each. This magnetic force attracts the developer material to form a magnetic brush. This magnet is fixed, therefore only the sleeves are rotated. By this rotation, the developer material is transported from the transport sleeve to the developer sleeve, and the magnetic brush formed by the developer sleeve sweeps over the drum surface, thus the development is performed. Doctor blade The doctor blade controls the amount of the developer material transported from the transport sleeve so that the magnetic brush of the developer material can contact with the drum surface properly. Auto-toner sensor (S12) The ratio of the carrier and toner (= toner density) in the developer material should constantly be fixed at a certain level for a correct image printing. The auto-toner sensor (S12) detects the inclusion ratio of the toner in the developer material with a magnetic bridge circuit. When the toner becomes insufficient, the new toner supply motor (M6) and the hopper motor (M7) are driven to supply the toner from the toner cartridge and the recycle toner hopper. Scattered toner recovery roller This roller catches the toner scattered from the developer sleeve and puts the caught toner into the developer unit, so that the scattered toner will not fall out of the developer unit.
12
(5) (6)
Developer unit drive section The developer unit is driven by the developer unit motor (M10). Developer unit fan (M31) / Toner filter The developer unit fan (M31) suctions the toner scattered out of the developer unit, and the suctioned toner is then collected at the toner filter through the duct. Duct in fan (M30) This fan cools down the developer unit.
(7)
12 - 5
(8)
Developer unit detection switch (SW3) This switch detects whether the developer unit is installed or not.
12 - 6
e-STUDIO520/600/720
Drive from the developer motor Idle gear G48 || P25 Developer unit Idle gear P25 || G25 Paddle drive input gear G27 Front paddle gear G16 Idle gear G19 Transport sleeve G23 Front side
Developer unit drive

G15 Idle gear G30 || G16 Idle gear G20 Scattered toner recovery roller G20 Rear side Mixer-1 G19 || G45 Idle gear G24 Rear paddle gear G25 Idle gear G23 Upper developer sleeve Lower developer sleeve G17 Idle gear G48 || P25 Developer unit Idle gear P25 || G25 Paddle drive input gear G27 Front side Front paddle gear G18 Idle gear G19 Transport sleeve G23 G16 Idle gear G30 || G16 Idle gear G20 Scattered toner recovery roller G20 Upper developer sleeve Lower developer sleeve G17 Rear paddle gear G31 Idle gear G20 Rear side Mixer-1 G24 || G45 Idle gear G24
12.3 Developer Unit Drive
Motor shaft G10
Mixer-2 G45
Fig.12-4
12 - 7
e-STUDIO850
Drive from the developer motor
Motor shaft G10
Mixer-2 G45
12
12.4 Motor Control Circuit

12.4.1 New toner supply motor control circuit
The new toner supply motor, which is a DC motor driven by control signals from the main-CPU on the LGC board, rotates the toner cartridge. This motor is driven when the on/off signal (TNRMTON-0) output from the main-CPU moves to a high level. The motor rotation direction switching signal (TNRMTCW-0) switches the rotational direction of this motor.
LGC board
TNMTON-0 Q64 IC58 Main CPU TNMTCW-0
SG +5VSW
IC103 Buffer
New toner supply motor
Fig.12-5
Driving signal of new toner supply motor (L: Low level, H: High level)
Signal TNMTON-0 TNMTCW-0 L H L H H Motor Status Off Reverse rotation (detecting cartridge installation) Forward rotation (when supplying toner)
12 - 8
12.4.2
Developer unit motor control circuit
The developer unit motor, which is a DC motor driven by control signals from the ASIC on the LGC board, drives the developer unit. A driving PC board is embedded in this motor to perform the following controls.
LGC board
IC58 Main CPU Wave correction IC97 Buffer DEVCK-1 Phase comparator Difference Voltage detection circuit +24VA +5.1VC +5.1VC +24VA
Developer unit motor
[PC board section]
[Motor section]
FG pulse Phase V
Speed comparator Difference
Excitation phase switching section
Phase W Hall element A
Phase U
IC56 DEVON-0 ASIC DVMBK-0
IC62 Buffer
Hall element C Rotation control Rotor position detection Hall element B
IC97 Buffer
Fig.12-6
1) ASIC outputs the control signals for the developer unit motor rotation. (DEVON signal: Motor rotation command) 2) The excitation phase switching section excites each phase of the developer unit motor. The developer unit motor is rotated. 3) Hall elements A, B and C detect the rotation position of the motor (rotor). 4) The excitation phase switching section switches the excitation of each phase. (The motor keeps rotating by repeating from 2) to 4).) 5) An FG (Frequency Generator) pulse is generated by the rotation of the motor. 6) The FG pulse and the reference frequency from the ASIC are compared in terms of the phase and speed, and the difference is added to the excitation phase switching section. Fluctuations in the power supply voltage are also added to the value. (Signal generation) 7) According to the result of step 6), the switching timing of the excitation phase switching section is changed, namely, the FG pulse and the reference clock are controlled to be equal. The developer unit motor rotates at a constant speed. (Lock range) 8) When the DVMBK signal from the ASIC moves to a low level, the developer unit motor is braked. When the DEVON signal moves to a high level, the motor is stopped.
12
12 - 9
Control signal of developer unit motor DEVON signal: This signal switches the on/off of the developer unit motor. When this signal moves to a low level, the motor is rotated, and when this moves to a high level, the motor is stopped. DEVCK signal: This signal is a reference clock which keeps the developer unit motor rotation at a constant speed. When the cyclic change of the FG pulse period against this reference signal is within 6.25%, this is defined as a lock range (= the normal rotation of the motor). When the cyclic change is within this range, the LED on the driving PC board of this motor is lit. DVMBK signal: This signal applies a brake on the developer unit motor. When this signal moves to a low level, a brake is applied to the rotation of the motor.
12 - 10
12.5 Auto-toner Circuit

1) Function of the auto-toner circuit - Detects the toner density in the developer material, and supplies toner when the density is lowered to a certain level. - Detects that there is no toner left in the developer unit.
12
12 - 11
2) Configuration of the auto-toner circuit - Auto-toner sensor: Detects the toner density. Toner cartridge empty sensor: Detects that the new toner is almost consumed. (The toner cartridge is empty.) Control section: Controls each section to maintain the toner density of the developer material at a constant ratio. Control panel: Displays a status that the toner cartridge is nearly empty. New toner supply section: The new toner supply motor and the new toner transport motor in this section supply the new toner to the developer unit from the toner cartridge. Recycle toner supply section: The hopper motor in this section supplies the recycle toner to the developer unit from the recycle toner hopper.
Control section SYS board
IC17 IC9 FRAM System CPU
Control panel
IC16
LCD panel
IC23 ASIC Temperature/humidity sensor
North Bridge
LGC board Developer unit

New toner supply section Toner cartridge Recycle toner supply section Recycle toner hopper Hopper motor New toner New toner supply motor IC58 Main CPU IC27 NVRAM
Sub hopper New toner transport motor A/D converter
Recycle toner
New toner
Toner density signal Auto-toner sensor
IC56 ASIC IC18
Control voltage signal Developer material A/D converter
Fig.12-7
12 - 12
12.5.2
Operation of auto-toner sensor
1) Functions of the auto-toner sensor - Initializing function: When the copier is set up or when the developer material is replaced The automatic adjustment is made so that the output of the auto-toner sensor (input value of the main-CPU) will be 2.45 to 2.85V for the toner density of new developer material. Toner density stabilizing function: During the printing operation Through the following phases, the toner density is kept constant. The toner is consumed. The toner density is lowered. The output change of the auto-toner sensor caused by humidity is detected. The new toner transport motor, new toner supply motor and hopper motor are driven. (The new toner supply motor and the hopper motor are driven only when the new toner is left in the toner cartridge and also the front cover (upper) is closed.) The toner is supplied to the developer unit from the sub-hopper (toner cartridge) and the recycle toner hopper. Detection and release of empty status of the developer unit The empty status of the developer unit is detected in the following procedure. The new toner supply motor and the new toner transport motor are driven. The output value of the auto-toner sensor remains the same. The toner density is not changed. The developer unit is judged as empty. The empty status of the developer unit is released in the following procedure. The new toner supply motor and the new toner transport motor are driven. The new toner is supplied to the developer unit from the toner cartridge. The output value of the auto-toner sensor is changed. The toner density returns to its normal value. The empty status of the developer unit is released.
12
12 - 13
2) Auto-toner sensor drive circuit The auto-toner sensor is composed of the following circuits. - Drive winding: Magnetic head (primary side) with a high-frequency magnetic field, which forms a magnetic circuit in the developer material Detection winding: Receiving the changes in the magnetic resistance of the developer material via a magnetic circuit (secondary side) DC conversion circuit: Converting the high-frequency output from the detection winding to a DC signal (auto-toner output ATS-1A)
Developer material
Magnetic resistance
Drive winding
Detection winding
DC conversion circuit
Auto-toner sensor output To the main-CPU (LGC board) ATS-1A
Magnetic circuit
Fig.12-8
When the toner density is low: Toner ratio to the carrier in the developer material decreased Magnetic resistance decreased Detection output increased Auto-toner output ATS-1A increased When the toner density is high: Toner ratio to the carrier in the developer material increased Magnetic resistance increased Detection output decreased Auto-toner output ATS-1A decreased
12 - 14

[A] [A-1] (1) (2) (3) (4) Toner cartridge drive unit Toner cartridge drive unit Take off the right front inner cover. ( P.2-43 "[B] Front right inner cover") Disconnect 1 connector. Loosen 1 screw to take off the bracket. Pull down the fixing pin and rotate it by 90.
Screw
Bracket
Fixing pin
Fig.12-9
(5)
Pull out the toner cartridge drive unit up to approx. 30, and then take it off in the direction of the arrow.
Toner cartridge drive unit
12
Fig.12-10
[A-2] (1) (2)
Toner cartridge switch (SW2) Disconnect 2 connectors, remove 1 screw, and then take off the toner cartridge switch with the bracket. Remove 2 screws to take off the toner cartridge switch.
Top cover
Screw
Screw
Toner cartridge detection switch

Fig.12-11
12 - 15
[A-3] (1) (2)
New toner supply motor (M5) Remove 3 screws to take off the top cover. Disconnect 1 connector, remove 2 screws, and then take off the new toner supply motor.
New toner supply motor
Screw
Connector
Fig.12-12
[A-4] (1)
Toner cartridge empty sensor (S10)
Remove 2 screws, and then take off the toner cartridge empty sensor with the harness. (2) Disconnect 1 connector from the toner cartridge empty sensor. Note: Be careful not to damage the sensor when connecting and disconnecting the connector.
Toner cartridge empty sensor

Fig.12-13
[A-5] (1)
New toner transport motor (M6) Remove 3 screws to take off the top cover.
Top cover Screw
Screw
Fig.12-14
12 - 16
(2)
Disconnect 1 connector to release the harness from the clamp.
Connector
Connector Clamp
Fig.12-15
(3) (4) (5)
Remove 2 screws to take off the inner cover. Remove 1 screw. Remove 3 screws to take off the toner drive section.
Cover
Drive unit
Fig.12-16
(6) (7)
Disconnect 1 connector to release the harness from the clamp. Remove 2 screws to take off the motor with bracket.
Connector
12
Bracket
Gear
Fig.12-17
12 - 17
(8) (9)
Remove 2 E-rings and then 2 gears. Remove 2 screws to take off the new toner transport motor.
Gear
New toner transport motor
Gear
Fig.12-18
[B] [B-1] (1) (2) (3)
Toner recycle unit Toner recycle unit Take off the toner cartridge drive unit. ( P.12-15 "[A] Toner cartridge drive unit") Remove 2 screws to take off the left inner cover. Disconnect 1 connector, remove 2 screws, and then take off the toner recycle unit.
Connector
Toner recycle unit
Fig.12-19
Notes: 1. Be extremely careful when handling this unit because toner may spill out from the joint with the toner recycle unit, cleaner unit and developer unit. 2. Install the window of the shutter section on the toner recycle unit so that it matches with the protrusion of the developer unit. 3. Be careful to allow as little vibration as possible to the unit when installing and removing the toner recycle unit. Vibration could cause stains on the image after assembling, especially when the remaining toner amount in the cartridge is small.
Protrusion
Fig.12-20
12 - 18
[B-2] (1) (2)
Recycle toner transport motor (M8) and Hopper motor (M7) Disconnect 1 connector, remove 2 screws, and then take off the recycle toner transport motor. Disconnect 1 connector, remove 2 screws, and then take off the hopper motor.
Hopper motor
Connector
Screw Screw Recycle toner transport motor

Fig.12-21
[C] Developer unit (1) (2) (3) Take off the toner recycle unit. ( P.12-18 "[B] Toner recycle unit") Rotate the L-shaped shaft upward to release the lock. Disconnect 1 connector and pull out the developer unit to the front side.
Developer unit
L-shaped shaft
12
Fig.12-22
[D] Developer material (1) (2) Take off the developer unit. ( P.12-19 "[C] Developer unit") Remove 2 screws to take off the top cover.
Top cover
Fig.12-23
12 - 19
(3)
Tilt the developer unit and take out the old developer material by rotating the gear on the rear side.
Gear
Fig.12-24
(4) (5)
Put in the new developer material. Rotate the gear on the rear side several times so that the developer material is mixed evenly.
Gear
Fig.12-25
Note: When installing the top cover, make sure that the latches insert completely, the cover does not catch in the urethane seal and the urethane sheets are overlapped correctly.
Urethane seal (outside)
Urethane seal (inside) Urethane seal

Fig.12-26
12 - 20
[E] (1) (2)
Doctor blade Take out the developer material. ( P.12-19 "[D] Developer material") Remove 2 screws and take off the doctor blade.
Screw
Screw Doctor blade
Fig.12-27
Note: When installing the doctor blade, butt both edges to the protrusion on the front and rear side frame and tighten the screw. (The doctor sleeve gap does not need to be adjusted.)
Doctor blade
Protrusion
Fig.12-28
[F] (1) (2) (3)
Auto-toner sensor (S12) Take out the developer material. ( P.12-19 "[D] Developer material") Release the harness from the clamp and pull out the harness. Remove 2 screws to take off the auto-toner sensor.
12
Auto-toner sensor
Fig.12-29
12 - 21
[G] Guide roller [G-1] (1) (2) Guide roller on the front side Take off the developer unit. ( P.12-19 "[C] Developer unit") Remove 2 screws, take off the bracket and then remove 3 gears.
Screw
Bracket
Screw
Fig.12-30
(3) (4)
Remove 1 E-ring and then the spring. Remove 2 E-rings and take off 2 guide rollers.
E-ring Guide roller
Spring
E-ring
Fig.12-31
[G-2] (1) (2) (3) (4)
Guide roller on the rear side Take off the developer unit. ( P.12-19 "[C] Developer unit") Remove 1 E-ring and then the gear. Remove 1 E-ring, 1 spring and then the bushing. Remove 4 screws, the rear side frame and then disconnect the bias connector.
Screw
Bias connector
E-ring Bushing
Screw
Gear
E-ring
Fig.12-32
Screw Spring
12 - 22
(5) (6)
Remove the bias plate and the spring. Remove 2 E-rings and take off 2 guide rollers. Note: Make sure that the color of the guide roller is correct when assembling. (upper side: white, lower side: black)
Spring
E-ring Bias plate
Guide roller (Whit)
Guide roller (Black) E-ring

Fig.12-33
[H] Scattered toner recovery roller / Developer sleeves (Magnetic roller) (1) (2) Take off the guide roller. ( P.12-22 "[G] Guide roller") Remove 3 screws to take off the front side plate.
Screw
Front side plate
Screw
Fig.12-34
(3) (4)
Take off the toner recovery roller. Remove 2 screws of the developer sleeve holder on the front side.
12
Screw
Developer sleeve holder
Scattered toner recovery roller

Fig.12-35
12 - 23
(5) (6) (7)
Remove the bearing, the E-ring, and then the gear and the parallel pin. Remove 2 screws of the developer sleeve holder on the rear side. Take off the upper and lower developer sleeve with the holder.
Screw
Bearing, E-ring, Gear, Pin

Fig.12-36
(8) (9)
Remove 2 pole position fixing bushings, and then 2 E-rings. Remove 4 E-rings and then 2 gears.
Pole position fixing bushing
Fig.12-37
(10) Remove the developer sleeve holder on the front and rear side.
Gear
Fig.12-38
12 - 24
(11) Remove 2 seals, 4 shield bushings, the scraper, and then take off the upper and lower developer sleeves. (12) Replace the oil seal pressed into 2 shield bushings on the rear side, if necessary. * Procedure for replacing an oil seal: ( P.12-27 "Fig.12-47 ")
Shield bushing
Shield bushing Oil seal
Scraper
Fig.12-39
[I] (1)
Transport sleeve Remove 1 screw and then the pole position fixing bushing on the rear side.
Screw
Pole position fixing bushing
Fig.12-40
(2) (3)
Remove the gear, E-ring and bearing on the front side, and then take off the transport sleeve. Replace 1 oil seal pressed into the front side of the frame, if necessary. * Procedure for replacing an oil seal: ( P.12-27 "Fig.12-47 ")
12
Gear
Bearing
E-ring
Transport sleeve
Fig.12-41
12 - 25
[J] (1)
Mixer
Take off the auto-toner sensor. ( P.12-21 "[F] Auto-toner sensor (S12)") (2) Remove 2 E-rings and then 2 gears on the rear side. (3) Remove 2 bearings and replace 2 oil seals pressed into the frame, if necessary. Note: Apply grease (Alvania No. 2) all around the mixer shaft before installing the bearings. (4) Take off the cover.
Gear
E-ring
Fig.12-42
(5) (6) (7)
Remove 2 E-rings, 2 screws and then take off the mixer nozzle on the front side. Pull out 2 mixers. Replace the oil seal pressed into the mixer nozzle, if necessary. * Procedure for replacing an oil seal: ( P.12-27 "Fig.12-47 ")
Cover
Mixer
Mixer nozzle
Fig.12-43
[K] (1) (2)
Paddle Take off the mixer. ( P.12-26 "[J] Mixer") Remove 1 E-ring, the gear and parallel pin on the rear side.
Gear
E-ring
Fig.12-44
12 - 26
(3) (4)
Remove 1 screw, 1 E-ring and then the paddle bushing on the rear side. Replace the oil seal pressed into the paddle bushing, if necessary. * Procedure for replacing an oil seal: ( P.12-27 "Fig.12-47 ")
Paddle bushing
Fig.12-45
(5) (6) (7)
Remove the gear, 1 E-ring and then paddle bushing on the front side. Replace the oil seal pressed into the paddle bushing, if necessary. Take out the paddle. * Procedure for replacing an oil seal: ( P.12-27 "Fig.12-47 ")
Paddle Paddle bushing

Fig.12-46
<< Procedure for replacing an oil seal>> In the developer unit, the oil seals are used at the following 9 places. Rear side of the upper and lower developer sleeve (1 for each) Front side of the transport sleeve (1) Rear and front side of the mixer (2 for each) Rear and front side of the paddle (1 for each) Replace the oil seal according to the procedure below. 1) Insert the fine screwdriver or the like into the inside of the oil seal, and then take out the oil seal by hooking it out. 2) Make sure of the direction of the new oil seal and push it in parallel to the frame, bushing or the like. (See the figure on the right.) 3) Apply the grease (Alvania No. 2; approx. 2 grains of rice) all around the inside diameter of the oil seal. Note: Wipe off the grease which has run off to the inner side of the oil seal.
12
Inside
Outside
Grease
Oil seal
Fig.12-47
12 - 27
[L] (1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
Developer unit motor (M10) Take off the rear cover. ( P.2-47 "[L] Rear cover") Take off the SYS board case. ( P.2-48 "[A] System control PC board (SYS board) / SYS board case") Remove 3 screws to take off the flywheel. Disconnect 1 connector, remove 3 screws and then take off the developer unit motor with bracket. Remove 2 screws to take off the motor from the bracket.
Developer unit motor
Connector
Screw
Screw
Screw
Fig.12-48
[M] Developer unit detection switch (SW3) (1) (2) Take off the cleaner unit. ( P.11-7 "[A] Cleaner unit") Disconnect 1 connector, remove 1 screw and then take off the sensor bracket.
Screw
Sensor braket
Fig.12-49
(3)
Disconnect 2 connectors, remove 1 screw and then take off the developer unit detection switch.
Screw
Connector
Developer unit detection switch

Fig.12-50
12 - 28
[N] Toner filter unit / Developer unit fan (M31) (1) (2) (3) (4) Take off the right rear cover. ( P.2-45 "[H] Right rear cover") Pull out the toner filter. Remove 2 screws to pull out the filter duct. Disconnect 1 connector of the fan.
Toner filter
Filter duct
Fig.12-51
(5)
Remove 3 screws to take off the fan.
Developer unit fan
Fig.12-52
[O] Toner bag full detection sensor (S11) (1) (2) Take off the SYS board case. ( P.2-48 "[A] System control PC board (SYS board) / SYS board case") Disconnect 1 connector and remove 1 screw to take off the toner bag full detection sensor.
12
Toner bag full detection sensor
Fig.12-53
12 - 29
[P] (1) (2) (3)
Used toner transport motor (M9) Take off the rear cover ( P.2-47 "[L] Rear cover") Take off the left rear cover ( P.2-46 "[K] Left rear cover") Disconnect 1 connector and remove 2 screws to take off the used toner transport motor.
Used toner transport motor

Fig.12-54
12 - 30
13. TRANSFER/TRANSPORT UNIT

13.1 General Description
The transfer/transport unit consists of the following 3 sections. Transfer section: Separates the paper from the drum with the transfer belt, and transports the paper to the fuser unit. Fuser unit: Fuses the toner onto the paper. Horizontal transport section: Transports the reversed paper to the intermediate transport roller during duplex printing. The general descriptions of the transfer section and the horizontal transport section are shown below. (The general description of the fuser unit is written in Chapter 14.) Transfer section: The paper transported from the registration roller and the toner on the drum are transferred to the transfer belt by a static attraction (the paper is separated from the drum here), and then the separated paper is transported to the fuser unit. The toner adhered on the transfer belt is cleaned in the belt cleaning mechanism, and then transported to the used toner bag. The transfer section is driven by the transfer belt motor (M14). Horizontal transport section: The reversed paper for duplex printing is transported to the horizontal transport section. At the horizontal transport section, the paper is transported to the intermediate transport roller. The section includes 4 transport rollers controlled by 3 clutches (CLT1/2/3). The fuser motor (M3) drives the operation of this section.
Transfer section
1 5 6 4 7 3 2
13
10
11
12
Horizontal transport section

Fig.13-1
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6
Name Follower roller Power supply roller Transfer belt Transfer belt drive roller Cleaning brush Recovery auger
No. 7 8 9 10 11 12
Name Cleaning blade Transport guid Horizontal transport roller-1 Horizontal transport roller-2 Horizontal transport roller-3 Horizontal transport roller-4
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 TRANSFER/TRANSPORT UNIT
13 - 1
13.2 Functions
(1) Transfer belt unit The transfer belt unit is a main unit of the transfer section. This unit is divided into 2 parts; the belt support/power supply section which supports and rotates the belt and supplies the power to the belt, and the cleaning mechanism section which scrapes off the toner adhered on the belt surface. The transfer belt motor (M14) drives the transfer belt unit. The drive from the transfer belt motor (M14) is transmitted to the drive gear and drive roller through the timing belt and relay gears. The drive is transmitted to the transfer/transport unit with a gear having a planetary joint. (2) Transfer belt support/power supply section The transfer belt is supported by 3 rollers; transfer belt drive roller, follower roller and power supply roller. A voltage, whose polarity is reverse to that of the toner on the photoconductive drum, is applied on the power supply roller. The current flowing to the transfer belt is controlled at a constant current of 70 A (85 A: e-STUDIO850). (The voltage is normally between +2 kV and +5 kV, while the applied voltage changes due to this constant-current control.) A voltage of +510 V is applied on the follower roller by a varistor. A high-voltage probe is required for this measurement. Do not use a digital voltmeter for your safety. Transfer belt The transfer belt is a high-precision flat rubber belt with coating, holding electrical resistance, which electrostatically attracts the paper (toner). Transfer belt cleaning mechanism The transfer belt cleaning mechanism section scrapes off the residual toner or paper dusts on the transfer belt surface with the transfer belt cleaning blade and transfer belt cleaning brush, and also transports the used toner with the recovery auger. Transfer belt cleaning blade The cleaning blade removes paper dusts and foreign objects left on the transfer belt surface after the separation of the paper. Transfer belt cleaning brush The cleaning brush is a conductive part to clean the toner electrostatically, and the voltage whose polarity is reverse to that of toner is applied on it. The current flowing to the cleaning brush is controlled at a constant current of 5 A. (The voltage is normally between +100V and +500V, while the applied voltage changes due to this constant-current control.) A high-voltage probe is required for this measurement. Do not use a digital voltmeter for your safety. Recovery auger The recovery auger transports the residual toner scraped off with the transfer belt cleaning blade and transfer belt cleaning brush to the used toner transport auger section. Transport guide The transport guide leads the electrostatically attracted paper to the fuser unit. The guide is made of a material which prevents a frictional charge caused by the paper.
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
13 - 2 05/04
(9)
Transfer/transport unit lock/unlock mechanism The transfer/transport unit lock/release mechanism locks the unit in the equipment, and unlocks it to draw the unit out to the front side when the paper jam is being cleared. The mechanism also separates the transfer belt unit from the drum when the transfer/transport unit is drawn out. When the unit is being drawn out, the mechanism can prevent the erroneous operation of the handle. When the handle is turned clockwise (in a horizontal position), the unit can be drawn out. Insert the transfer/transport unit into the equipment and turn the handle counterclockwise (in a vertical position), so that the unit can be locked in. If the unit is not inserted completely, the handle cannot be turned from the horizontal position.
(10) Transfer belt unit contact/release mechanism When printing is completed or a paper jam has occurred, the mechanism releases the transfer belt unit from the photoconductive drum. When printing is started, the mechanism contacts the unit with the photoconductive drum. The cam is rotated by the drive of the transfer belt cam motor (M15). Along with this rotation, the lever on the rear side of the transfer/transport unit moves up and down, and thus the transfer belt unit and the drum are contacted or released. The phase of the cam is controlled by the transfer belt release detection sensor (S15) and the transfer belt contact detection sensor (S16). (11) Drum damp heater (DH3) (condensation prevention) The drum damp heater (DH3) is installed under the transfer belt. The power is supplied to this heater when the main switch (SW6) is turned OFF. (12) Horizontal transport section The paper reversed for duplex printing is transported to the horizontal transport section. At this section, the paper is transported to the intermediate transport roller. This section is driven by the fuser motor (M3) and controlled by the horizontal transport section driving clutches-1 (CLT1), -2 (CLT2) and -3 (CLT3), and this drive is transmitted to the transport roller. The horizontal transport sensors-1 (S19), -2 (S20) and -3 (S21) detect the paper transport.
13
13 - 3
13.3 General Description of Transfer Belt Unit Operation

1) The transfer belt unit is released from the photoconductive drum in the ready status. 2) The transfer belt is lifted, as well as rotated, and contacted with the photoconductive drum at the start of printing. 3) The voltage of the high-voltage transformer is applied on the transfer belt through the power supply roller. 4) Since the surface of the transfer belt is positively charged by a dielectric polarization, the belt electrostatically attracts the paper from the drum. Thus the processes of transfer, separation and paper transport are continuously performed. 5) The transfer belt unit is lowered, stops rotating, and waits at the released position from the photoconductive drum after the completion of printing.
13 - 4
13.4 Transfer belt motor control circuit

The transfer belt motor is a stepping motor driven by the control signal output from the main CPU on the LGC board and rotates the transfer belt. The transfer belt motor is driven by the pulse signal (TRMA-0, TRMB-0, TRMAB-0, TRMBB-0) output from the motor driver. These pulse signals are formed based on the reference clock signal (TRMCK-0) and output only when the enable signal (TRMEN-1) is L level. Also, the rotation speed of the motor can be switched by changing the output timing of each pulse signal.
LGC board
TRMCK-0 IC125 Buffer
MOT board
TRMA-0 TRMB-0
TRMVR-0 IC58 Main CPU

+5VSW
IC1 Motor driver TRMAB-0 TRMBB-0 IC13 Buffer Q61
Transfer belt motor
TRMEN-1
SG
Fig.13-2
Transfer belt motor drive signal

TRMCK-0 Pulse signal Signal TRMEN-1 L L H TRMVR-0 L H Motor status Rotation when accelerating/decelerating Rotation at a constant speed Stop
13
13 - 5

[A] (1) Transfer unit Open the front cover and take out the transfer/transport unit by turning the lever clockwise.
Transfer/transport unit
Fig.13-3
(2) (3)
Remove 1 screw to take off the handle. Remove 2 screws to take off the cover.
Screw
Cover
Screw
Handle
Fig.13-4
Screw
(4)
(5) (6) (7)
Disconnect 2 connectors. (Raise the belt when disconnecting the connector on the right side.) Remove 1 clip and slide the bearing on the front side to inside. Remove 4 screws. Slide the transfer unit to the rear side and raise the front side to take it off.
Bearing Clip
Screw
Connector
Screw
Fig.13-5
Screw
13 - 6
Note: When installing the transfer unit, make sure that the lever comes under the cam.
Cam
Lever
Fig.13-6
[B] (1) (2)
Transfer belt Take off the transfer unit. ( P.13-6 "[A] Transfer unit") Turn the transfer belt unit 90 and pull it out upward.
Transfer belt unit
Transfer unit
Fig.13-7
(3)
Remove 2 screws.
Screw Link plate
13
Screw
Fig.13-8
13 - 7
(4)
Turn the driving roller to the direction of the arrow. (5) Pull out the transfer belt. Notes: 1. Install the transfer belt in the middle so that it does not move to one side. 2. Do not touch the surface of the belt. 3. Fix the link plate securely by pressing the rear and front side of the plate to the direction of the arrow.
Transfer belt
Fig.13-9
[C] Cleaning brush (1) Take off the transfer unit. ( P.13-6 "[A] Transfer unit") (2) Take off the transfer belt unit. ( P.13-7 "[B] Transfer belt") (3) Remove 1 clip and then 3 gears. Notes: 1. There are latches on gear "a" and "c". Remove gear "a", "b" and then "c". 2. When installing the gear, be sure that the latch is securely inserted into the groove of the shaft. (4) (5)
Transport guide
Screw
Plate spring
c a
Fig.13-10
Remove 1 screw and then the plate spring. Slide the transport guide to the rear side to pull it out upward. (6) Remove 1 clip and then the bushing. (7) Push the brush to the rear side, take off the shaft on the front side and then pull it out to the upper front side. Note: Do not touch the surface of the brush.
Cleaning brush
Bush Clip
Fig.13-11
13 - 8
[D] Cleaning blade (1) (2) Take off the transfer unit. ( P.13-6 "[A] Transfer unit") Remove 3 screws to take off the cleaning blade.
Cleaning blade
Screw
Fig.13-12
Notes: 1. When installing the blade, fix the boss on both sides with the screws. 2. Be careful not to touch, scratch or damage the blade. 3. After installing the blade, be sure that the seals on both sides are not damaged.
Urethan seal
Cleaning blade
Fig.13-13
[E] (1)
Transfer/Transport unit
Take off the transfer unit. ( P.13-6 "[A] Transfer unit") (2) Take off the fuser unit. ( P.14-18 "[B] Fuser unit") Note: Make sure to take off the fuser unit and transfer unit before the transfer/transport unit.
13
Transfer/transport unit
Fig.13-14
13 - 9
(3)
Remove 2 stepped screws fixing the slide rail.
Slide rail
Slide rail
Screw
Screw
Fig.13-15
(4) (5)
Hold A (shaft) or B (stay) with your left hand. Hold the slide rail on the right with your right hand.
A B
Fig.13-16
(6) (7)
Lift up the transfer/transport unit to release the hook. Push in the slide rail while loosening the slide rail on the right side.
Catch-up section
Fig.13-17
13 - 10
(8) (9)
Shift A or B from your left to your right hand and then hold C in your left hand. Take off the transfer/transport unit from the slide rail by lifting it up.
Notes: 1. When lifting up the transfer/transport unit, do not hold D (Transport guide) because it may cause damage to the transport guide. 2. When installing, follow the procedure below. (10) Pull out the slide rail on the left side completely. (11) Hook the transfer/transport unit on the slide rail on the left side properly. (12) Extend the slide rail on the right side. Make sure to extend the leading edge of the slide rail completely. (13) Hook the transfer/transport unit on the slide rail on the right side. (14) Fix the transfer/transport unit with 2 stepped screws. (15) Assemble it in the reverse order of the disassembling procedure. [F] (1)
C D
Fig.13-18
Horizontal transport sensor-1, -2 and -3 (S19, S20, S21)
Take off the transfer unit. ( P.13-6 "[A] Transfer unit") (2) Take off the fuser unit. ( P.14-18 "[B] Fuser unit") (3) Remove 1 screw to take off each sensor with its bracket. (4) Disconnect 1 connector and release the latch to take off each sensor. Note: The horizontal transport sensor-3 (S21) can be replaced without the transport unit being taken off.
Horizontal transport sensor-1
13
Screw Screw

Fig.13-19
13 - 11
[G] Horizontal transport section driving clutch-2 (CLT2)/ -3 (CLT3) (1) (2) Remove the transfer/transport unit. ( P.13-9 "[E] Transfer/Transport unit") Disconnect 1 connector and remove 1 E-ring to take off the each clutch.
Horizontal transport section driving clutch-2
E-ring
E-ring

Fig.13-20
[H] Horizontal transport section driving clutch-1 (CLT1) (1) (2) (3) Take off the transfer/transport unit ( P.13-9 "[E] Transfer/Transport unit") Disconnect 1 connector. Remove 1 E-ring and 3 screws to take off the bracket.
Bracket
Screw
Screw
Fig.13-21
E-ring
(4) Take off the driving clutch from the shaft. Note: Fix the stopper of the clutch in the "R" marked side.
Black
Fig.13-22
13 - 12
Notes: 1. When fixing the clutch with the E-ring, be sure that the one side of the E-ring latch does not overlap the flat part of the shaft. 2. Be sure that the stopper of the clutch is inserted into the groove of the bracket. 3. Make sure that the bearing and gear are installed correctly.
E-ring
Fig.13-23
[I] (1)
Transfer belt drive motor unit / Transfer belt motor (M14)
Take off the rear cover. ( P.2-47 "[L] Rear cover") (2) Remove 3 screws to take off the flywheel. (3) Disconnect 1 connector, and then remove 1 spring and 2 screws to take off the drive motor unit. (4) Remove 3 screws to take off the bracket. (5) Remove 2 screws to take off the transfer belt motor. Note: When installing the motor, fix it by rotating it counterclockwise.
Connector
Screw
Screw
Fig.13-24
Spring
[J] (1) (2) (3)
Transfer belt contact/release cam driving unit Take off the rear cover. ( P.2-47 "[L] Rear cover") Remove 3 screws to take off the flywheel. Disconnect 1 connector and remove 2 screws to take off the cam driving unit.
13
Screw
Transfer belt contact/release cam drive unit

Fig.13-25
13 - 13
(4) (5)
Remove 1 screw to take off the transfer belt release detection sensor (S15). Remove 1 screw to take off the transfer belt contact detection sensor (S16).
Transfer belt release detection sensor
Transfer belt contact detection sensor
Fig.13-26
[K] (1)
Transfer belt cam motor (M15) Take off the transfer belt contact/release cam driving unit. ( P.13-13 "[J] Transfer belt contact/release cam driving unit") Remove 2 screws and disconnect 1 connector to take off the transfer belt cam motor.
(2)
Transfer belt cam motor

Fig.13-27
13 - 14
14. FUSER UNIT

14.1 Outline
The toner is fused on the paper separated from the photoconductive drum by having heat and pressure applied to it. The paper is then discharged through the paper exit section. The fuser unit consists of the IH coil (IH-COIL), fuser roller, pressure roller, separation fingers, cleaning web, thermistors (THM1, 2, 3 and 4), thermostat (THMO1 and 2), fuser exit rollers, fuser transport sensor (S9), etc.
Web pushing roller Cleaning web
Web detection sensor
Web motor
Fuser roller thermistor
Fuser roller thermostat Fuser exit roller IH coil Separation finger Fuser transport sensor Fuser roller
Pressure roller thermistor
Pressure roller
Fig.14-1
14
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 FUSER UNIT
14 - 1
14.2 Operation
At the fuser unit, the toner is fused on the paper which has been separated and transported from the photoconductive drum by having heat and pressure applied to it. The pressure and fuser rollers are rotated by the driving of the fuser motor (M3). The fuser roller has an IH coil (IH-COIL) inside, which does not rotate itself. The fuser and pressure rollers are always pressured by a spring force. After being fused, the paper is separated smoothly from the fuser roller by the separation fingers. The thermistors (THM1, 2 and 3) detect the fuser roller temperature to control it, and when the temperature becomes abnormally high, which is detected by thermostats (THMO1 and 2), the power supply to the IH coil (IH-COIL) is cut off.
14 - 2
14.3 Functions
(1) IH coil (IH-COIL) (IH: Induction heating) The IH coil is inside the fuser roller and applies the induction heat to the fuser roller. This IH coil (IH-COIL) is divided into two parts, the center IH coil heating the center of the fuser roller and the side IH coil heating both ends of the fuser roller. Those parts become ON/OFF separately in order to maintain the fuser roller at a certain temperature without wasting excessive electric power. Fuser roller The fuser roller is made of iron and induction-heated by an IH coil (IH-COIL). It is pressed by the pressure roller, which is mentioned below, and the toner is fused on the paper while the paper is passing between these two rollers with the toner image on the paper facing the fuser roller. So, the toner is made to soak into the fibers of the paper by being melted with the heat of the fuser roller and having heat conductivity improved due to pressure from the pressure roller. The surface of the fuser roller is coated with fluoroplastic to prevent the toner adhering to it (this is called "offset") and help it become separated from the roller. Pressure roller The pressure roller is made of rubber (PFA tube roller) to make it easier to press against the fuser roller and its pressure is always derived from a spring force. Separation fingers The separation fingers are for removing paper that has stuck to the fuser and pressure rollers. Cleaning web The cleaning web is attached touching the fuser roller by means of the web pushing roller to remove any toner or paper dust that has stuck to the fuser roller during the fusing process. It is rolled up by the web motor (M4) with its clean surface always touching the fuser roller. It also contains silicone oil for coating the surface of the fuser roller, which makes it easier to clean up any toner or paper dust. The cleaning web rolled around the roller has been made thinner and lengthened. This has increased the web rolling up speed and improved the cleaning performance. The cleaning web's cleaning performance is the same as that of the cleaning roller, so this equipment does not have a cleaning roller. (6) Fuser exit roller The fuser exit roller transports the paper separated from the fuser and pressure rollers with the separation fingers through the fuser unit. Fuser transport sensor (S9) This sensor is for detecting that the trailing edge of the paper has reached the fuser unit exit sensor and also for the detecting of paper jams at the fuser unit exit section. Fuser roller center thermistor (THM2) and Fuser roller rear thermistor (THM3) These thermistors (THM2 and 3) detect the temperature of the fuser roller to maintain it within a certain range, which is higher than the lower limit which would cause poor fusing and lower than the upper limit which would cause a high temperature offset. When the temperature of the fuser roller is lower than the preset temperature, it is turned ON to supply power to the IH coil (IHCOIL), and when it is higher than the preset temperature, it is turned OFF to cut the supply. It also detects the slight difference of the temperatures at the center and rear end of the fuser roller to control the ON/OFF of the center and side IH coil to keep the fuser roller at a certain temperature.
(2)
(3)
(4) (5)
14
(7)
(8)
14 - 3
(9)
Fuser roller front thermistor (THM1) This thermistor cannot be used for the temperature control of the fuser roller. It detects a temperature abnormality at the side area of the fuser roller where the paper does not pass through.
(10) Fuser roller center thermostat (THMO1) and Fuser roller side thermostat (THMO2) These thermostats cut off the power supply to the IH coil (IH-COIL) when the fuser roller becomes abnormally hot as the result of a problem such as a thermistors (THM1, 2 and 3) malfunction. The thermostats (THMO1 and 2) of this equipment are used to prevent abnormal operation, and when any abnormality is detected, they must be replaced altogether with the other damaged parts of the fuser unit.
14 - 4
14.4 Fuser Control Circuit

14.4.1 Configuration
Side thermostat Front thermistor Center thermistor
Center thermostat Rear thermistor
IH coil
Fuser roller
Power cable Pressure roller Pressure roller thermistor Noise filter Breaker
IH board LGC board

Coil output N L AC input Fuse
Main CPU +5VSW Power supply for photocoupler Switching signal of power setting ASIC IH status signal IH coil energization permitting signal Duty ratio changing signal +5.1VC
IH power source / drive circuit
Photocoupler Control circuit including CPU
Temperature control circuit
AC line DC line
Fig.14-2
14
14 - 5
14.4.2
Heating principle of IH coil
The magnetic field is generated by applying a high frequency current to the IH coil inside the fuser roller, which then produces the eddy current in it. When the eddy current flows, the Joule heat is generated by the resistance element of the fuser roller, which is then heated. In the IH coil method, the thermal efficiency is higher than the lamp method because the fuser roller is directly heated. IH coil is divided into two parts to decrease the temperature difference between the center and both ends of the fuser roller. Image of current flowing from A to B
Center IH coil Current flowing on the surface of the fuser roller
B High frequency power source A
Side IH coil
High frequency magnetic field
Eddy current
Current flowing inside the fuser roller
Fig.14-3
Block diagram of IH board

Control circuit for high frequency current Fuser roller IH coil
Ripple filter circuit
C1
Q1
IGBT driver
(IGBT) C2 D1 T1 Input current CPU C31 Q11 IGBT driver
Input voltage
Monitoring input voltage
I/F circuit for LGC board
Fig.14-4
Photocoupler
Monitoring input current
14 - 6
14.4.3
IH control circuit interface
The IH control circuit uses a photocoupler as an insulator against the secondary circuit. The interface signals are as followed.
Connector No. CN455-1 CN455-2 CN455-3 CN455-4 CN455-5 CN455-6 CN455-7 CN455-8 CN455-9 CN455-10 CN455-11 CN455-12 CN455-13 CN455-14 Signal IH2ON +5VSW H1PWR1 H1PWR2 H1PWR3 H2PWR1 H2PWR2 H2PWR3 IH1ON SG IHDUTY IHERR1 IHERR2 IHERR3 Direction LGC board to IH board Definition IH coil energization permitting signal Switching signal of power setting
IH board to LGC board
IH coil energization permitting signal Duty ratio changing signal IH status signal
14.4.4
Abnormality in the IH control circuit
When an abnormality is detected in the IH control circuit, it stops the power supply to the IH coil and displays a message "call for service".
LGC board +5VSW IH board Vcc
H1ERR1-0 IC56 CPU ASIC H1ERR2-0
14
H1ERR3-0
Fig.14-5
14 - 7
Relation between IH status signal and IH errors (L: Low level, H: High level)
Checking timing Front cover (upper) is closed at power ON On usual IHERR1 L Signal IHERR2 L IHERR3 L Status Abnormality detected at initialization * An abnormal status is detected at the initialization. Power voltage abnormality * AC power is not supplied to the IH board. Power voltage upper limit abnormality (Surge detection) * AC input voltage has exceeded 122% of the rated voltage Switching element (IGBT) abnormality * Wire breakings, shortcircuits abnormal fluctuations or overheating (= insufficient cooling) of IGBT IH abnormality No abnormality Power voltage lower limit detection (not error) * AC input voltage has dropped to less than 85% of rated voltage Input current lower limit abnormality * Wire breakings or improper installation of IH coil Power voltage lower limit abnormality * AC input voltage has dropped to less than 75% of rated voltage Power voltage abnormality when the front cover (upper) is opened * An abnormal status is detected when the cover is opened Error code C471 Counter (08-400) 11
C472
12
C473
13
C481
14
L H H
H L H
H L H
C480 -
15 -
C490
16
C474
17
Front cover (upper) is opened
L X (Other than the above)
C475
10
14 - 8
14.4.5
Temperature detection section
To maintain the fuser roller at a constant temperature, the two fuser roller thermistors (front and rear) detect the fuser roller temperature and control the on/off of the IH coil. The abnormal temperature of the IH coil is detected by the three fuser roller thermistors (front, center and rear), while that of the pressure roller is detected by the pressure roller thermistor. 1) Relation between the thermistor output voltage and surface temperature of the fuser roller
Output voltages of thermistors [V] Approx. 0.5 Approx. 2.0 Approx. 3.4 Approx. 3.6 Approx. 3.8 Approx. 4.0 Surface temperatures of fuser roller [C] 40 100 160 170 185 200
2) Control of the surface temperature of the fuser roller

Temperature e-STUDIO520/600/720 200C or above 200C (185C *1) 160 to 200C (150 to 200C *1) (155 to 200C *2) 170C or below 160Cor below (160C or below *1) (150C or below *1) (155C or below *2) e-STUDIO850 200C or above 200C 170 to 200C (160 to 200C *1) Fusing control IH coil OFF Ready status IH coil ON Copying is interrupted and the fuser roller is heated. (Waiting status)
*1: Only for the JPD model *2: Only for the TWD model
Warming-up C Ready During printing Ready During printing During waiting
200
170
14
Temperature of fuser roller

(Example: e-STUDIO850)
IH coil ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF ON OFF
ON
ON
0
Fig.14-6
14 - 9
3) Temperature control for the both ends of the fuser roller During a continuous printing, the temperature of the both ends of the fuser roller (areas where the paper does not pass on) tends to be higher than that of the other areas (where the paper passes on). For this reason, the temperature of the both ends of the fuser roller is detected by the fuser roller front thermistor. If this thermistor has detected an abnormal temperature (270C or above), the IH coil is preferentially turned off regardless of the temperature of the areas where the paper passes on. 4) Temperature control at Energy Saving Mode This equipment has the following two types of temperature control for saving energy and returns to ready status to perform printing in each mode upon printing request. The period of time from the printing request to this mode can be set in "Setting Mode (08)" or by an administrator. Administrator setting procedure: [USER FUNCTIONS] button [ADMIN] (input of administrator's password) [GENERAL] [ENERGY SAVER] Auto Power Save Mode (Setting Mode (08-205)): When the printing is not performed in a specified period of time (default setting: 15 min.) after the previous printing is completed, the equipment enters to Auto Power Save Mode to turn OFF the IH coil. Auto Shut Off Mode (Setting Mode (08-206)): When the printing is not performed in a specified period of time (default setting: 90 min). * after the equipment entered to Auto Power Save Mode, the equipment then enters to Auto Shut Off Mode to turn OFF the IH coil.
Warming-up C Ready During printing Fixed time (08-205) Auto Power Save Mode (IH coil OFF) Fixed time (08-206) 200 Auto Shut Off Mode
Temperature of fuser roller

(Example: e-STUDIO850)
OFF IH coil ON
Fig.14-7
14 - 10
5) Fuser unit error status counter control - To enhance the safety of the fusing section unit, main-CPU provides the following protection: When the third [C411] error has occurred after two consecutive [C411] errors, the IH coil is not turned ON and error [C412] is displayed immediately even if an operator turns OFF the power and back ON. However, if the equipment goes into a ready state normally with the fuser unit error status counter "1" or below, the counter is cleared to "0". If the error codes [C411] to [C490] are displayed and still not cleared even though the thermistor, thermostat and IH coil have been repaired (and the power ON/OFF does not clear the error), check the Setting Mode (08-400) to set the fuser unit error status counter to "0". Remark: The fuser unit error status counter (Setting Mode (08-400)) never has values other than 0 to 29. If the IH coil does not turn ON and the service call [C411] or [C412] is displayed immediately after the power is ON, ensure the fuser unit error status counter is "2" or over. If it is "2" or over, be sure to check the thermistor, thermostat and IH coil. Reset the counter to "0" after repairing them, then turn ON the power. If the fuser unit error status counter is "30" or over (e.g., 31), the data in NVRAM or NVRAM itself may possibly have been ruined due to causes such as leakage from the chargers. Check the bias, high-voltage transformers and charge wires to see if any of them is defective, and also look through all the data in the NVRAM. When the thermistors detect overheating, the main-CPU decides the error code and counter value of the fuser unit error status. After turning OFF each output (the IH coil, exposure lamp, control panel display, motors and so on), the main-CPU turns OFF the power to protect the fuser unit. Error code: C449 ([C] and [8]) Counter value of the fuser unit error status: 9 (08-400) Thermistors continue detecting the abnormal temperature even after the error codes and counter values are decided. Even if the power is turned ON immediately, it is automatically turned OFF again when the surface temperature of the fuser roller is still higher than the abnormal temperature detected. Wait until the surface temperature of the fuser roller is lowered enough, and turn ON the power to check the counter value while it is turned OFF again. After confirming that it is the fuser unit abnormality, correct the abnormality and reset the counter value (08-400) to "0" to start up the equipment normally.
14
14 - 11
6) Temperature detection circuit Thermistors are elements whose resistance decreases as they detect a higher temperature. Thus, the input voltage to the main-CPU is changed and the main-CPU judges whether this change is abnormal or not. If one of these thermistors is broken, the control circuit judges that the temperature of the fuser roller or the pressure roller is extremely low. Then the circuit keeps turning the IH coil on. As a result of this, the fuser roller temperature rises, and this may activate the thermostats, a safety protection element. To prevent this problem in advance, the main-CPU works to detect the wire breaking of each thermistor. These thermistors also check the temperature of the fuser roller or the pressure roller regularly to prevent them from excessive heating caused by a circuit abnormality or a thermistor abnormality. If the temperature of these rollers has exceeded a specified level, the thermistors automatically turn the power of the equipment OFF.
+5.1VC
Fuser roller center thermistor
MTH--1A
+5.1VC
Fuser roller rear thermistor
STH--1A
IC58 Main CPU
+5.1VC THMCH-1 Fuser roller front thermistor
ETH--1A
1 0
+5.1VC
IC24 Analog multiplexer
PTH--1A
Fig.14-8
14 - 12
7) Abnormality detection by the thermistors The table below shows the judging conditions of abnormal temperatures of the fuser roller and the pressure roller, and their checking timing.
Temperature judged Checking timing Condition Center thermistor 240C or above 2 40C or below 150C or above 240C or above 2 40C or below 240C or above 2 100C or below 240C or above Rear thermistor 250C or above 150C or above 40C or below 250C or above 40C or below 250C or above 100C or below 250C or above Front thermistor 270C or above 270C or above 270C or above 270C or above Pressure roller thermistor 250C or above 250C or above 250C or above C449 22 On usual C468 C446 (C443) 18 3 (6) Fixed time C449 19 On usual C468 C412 (C411) 18 2 (1) Fixed time C449 19 On usual C468 C412 8 2 Error code Counter (08-400) Error judging timing Power ON
Power ON
C449
Detecting 40C
Detecting 100C
14
When prerunning end temperature / ready temperature is detected
14 - 13
Temperature judged Checking timing Condition Center thermistor 240C or above 2 40C or below During printing 1 240C or above 2 40C or below At Energy Saving Mode 1 240C or above At paper jam 1 240C or above Rear thermistor 250C or above 40C or below 250C or above 40C or below 250C or above 250C or above Front thermistor 270C or above 40C or below 270C or above 40C or below 270C or above 270C or above Pressure roller thermistor 0C or below 0C or below 250C or above 250C or above C468 28 C468 C449 26 29 On usual C467 C449 27 On usual C447 24 C467 C449 25 On usual C447 7 Error code Counter (08-400) Error judging timing On usual
During ready
C449
23
* *
The figures in the "Condition" field denote the priority of error checking. The figures in the "Error code" and "Counter" fields with parentheses denote that an error status has not yet been determined (= error status is detected only once).
14 - 14
14.5 Fuser Motor Control Circuit

The fuser motor, which is a DC motor driven by control signals from the ASIC on the LGC board, drives the fuser roller. A driving PC board is embedded in this motor to perform the following controls.
LGC board
IC58 Main CPU Wave correction IC39 Buffer HTRCK-1 +5.1VC Pressure roller thermistor temperature detection signal +5.1VC IC56 ASIC SG HTRML-0 Q39 IC62 Buffer + SG IC77 Comparator IC31 Buffer Counter Speed comparator Difference Phase comparator Difference Voltage detection circuit +36VA +5.1VC +5.1VC +36VA
Fuser motor
[PC board section]
[Motor section]
FG pulse Phase V
Excitation phase switching section
Phase W Hall element A
Phase U
Hall element C Rotation control Rotor position detection Hall element B
SG HTRMT-0
Fig.14-9
1) ASIC outputs the control signals for the fuser motor rotation. (HTRMT signal: Motor rotation command) 2) The excitation phase switching section excites each phase of the fuser motor. The fuser motor is rotated. 3) Hall elements A, B and C detect the rotation position of the motor (rotor). 4) The excitation phase switching section switches the excitation of each phase. (The motor keeps rotating by repeating from 2) to 4).) 5) An FG (Frequency Generator) pulse is generated by the rotation of the motor. 6) The FG pulse and the reference frequency from the ASIC are compared in terms of the phase and speed, and the difference is added to the excitation phase switching section. Fluctuations in the power supply voltage are also added to the value. (Signal generation) 7) According to the result of step 6), the switching timing of the excitation phase switching section is changed, namely, the FG pulse and the reference clock are controlled to be equal. The fuser motor is rotated at a constant speed. (= Lock range) 8) When the HTRMT signal moves to a high level, the fuser motor is stopped. 9) When the pressure roller temperature is lowered to less than the reference value during the ready status, the HTRML signal output from the ASIC moves to a low level. Thus the motor is rotated at a low speed.
14
14 - 15
Control signal of fuser motor HTRMT signal: This signal switches the on/off of the fuser motor. When this signal moves to a low level, the motor is rotated, and when this moves to a high level, the motor is stopped. HTRCK signal: This signal is a reference clock which keeps the fuser motor rotation at a constant speed. When the cyclic change of the FG pulse period against this reference signal is within 6.25%, this is defined as a lock range (= the normal rotation of the motor). When the cyclic change is within this range, the LED on the driving PC board of this motor is lit. HTRML signal: This signal rotates the fuser motor at a low speed. When this signal moves to a low level, the motor is rotated at a low speed, and when this moves to a high level, the motor is roated at a high speed.
14 - 16

[A] (1) Heater control PC board (IH board) Open the front cover. Then pull out the transfer/transport unit by turning its handle clockwise.
Fig.14-10
(2)
Remove 2 screws and open the IH cover-1 carefully to the front side.
IH cover-1
Screw
Screw
Fig.14-11
(3)
Remove 4 screws and then release 4 power supply harnesses of the IH coil. Notes: 1. Be sure that each of these harnesses is connected to the proper position. 2. Use tightening torques of 1.2-2.0 Nm for the 4 screws connecting these power supply harnesses. 3. Since the IH board is a high-voltage section, be sure to pull out the power cable before starting maintenance or checking. Especially do not touch the IGBT when the power is ON since it is generating high-voltage.
Red
Blue
14
IGBT
Fig.14-12
Black (Without tag)
14 - 17
(4)
Disconnect 3 connectors and remove 6 screws to take off the IH board.
Heater control PC board Screw
Screw
Screw Connector (Yellow)
Connector
Screw
Fig.14-13
Connector (White)
[B] (1) (2)
Fuser unit Remove 2 screws and open the IH cover-1 carefully to the front side. Remove 2 screws to take off a knob cover.
Knob cover
Screw
Fig.14-14
(3) (4) (5)
Remove 4 screws and then release 4 power supply harnesses of the IH coil. Disconnect 4 connectors. Remove 2 screws and open the IH cover-2 to the front side.
IH cover-2
Screw Screw
Connector
Screw
Connector
Fig.14-15
14 - 18
(6)
Remove 1 screw, move the fuser unit forward and lift it off upward. Notes: 1. When installing or taking off the fuser unit, grab the section "A" in the figure. 2. Be sure that the temperature of the fuser unit has lowered enough before taking it off. If the unit still heated should be taken off, wear a pair of gloves before working. 3. Hold B sections of the fuser unit when installing/removing it.
Screw
Fig.14-16
[C] Cleaning web unit / Cleaning web (1) Remove 2 black screws to take off the cleaning web unit. Note: The cleaning web unit can be taken off without removing the fuser unit.
Screw
Fig.14-17
(2) (3)
Remove 4 E-rings. Then remove 4 bushings to take off the cleaning web. Remove 1 E-ring, 1 bushing, 1 E-ring, 2 gears, 1 pin, and 1 bushing in order from the shaft.
E-ring
Cleaning web
14
E-ring
Fig.14-18
E-ring
14 - 19
Note: When the cleaning web has been installed, be sure that the web is tightly reeled.
Fig.14-19
(4)
Remove 2 E-rings, 2 washers, and 2 oneWasher One-way bearing way bearings. Then take off the web pushing roller. Notes: 1. When assembling the unit, be sure that the one-way bearings are in the correct directions. Mark side 2. Be sure that the web pushing roller rolls only in the direction of the arrow in the figure. Web pushing roller
One-way bearing
Mark side
Fig.14-20
Washer
14 - 20
Notes: 1. When replacing the cleaning web, make sure to attach the pin.
Pin
2. The remaining portion of the cleaning web can be checked from the small square hole of the fuser unit.
Fig.14-21
Full
Low
Fig.14-22
14
14 - 21
Notes: When the web has been replaced, check the following items. 1. When the web pushing roller has been replaced, reel the web for 3 to 5 turns by hand. 2. Check if the cleaning web is tightly reeled after it has been installed in the fuser unit. 3. Turn the jam access knob of the fuser unit for 10 to 15 times to fit the web and the fuser roller. 4. Check if there are not any slacks or creases on the cleaning web. 5. Start the PM Support Mode (6S) to reset the counter of the cleaning web. At the first power-ON after this counter reset, the web motor rotates for 65 seconds. 6. Turn the power of the equipment ON. Then confirm that the message "READY" has appeared on the touch panel. 7. Perform the final check of the fuser unit (cleaning web), the same checking as Step 4. 8. When the web motor is rotated at the output check in the Test Mode (03-124), the cleaning web may be slackened. Do not rotate the motor for more than 10 seconds to prevent the web from being slackened. [D] IH coil (1) (2) (3) Take off the fuser unit ( P.14-18 "[B] Fuser unit"). Take off the cleaning web unit ( P.14-19 "[C] Cleaning web unit / Cleaning web"). Remove 2 screws to take off the fuser unit front cover.
Fuser unit cover (front)
Screw
Screw
Fig.14-23
14 - 22
(4) (5)
Open 2 clamps and remove 2 connectors. Remove 2 screws and take off the bracket.
Clamp
Bracket
Screw
Connector
Fig.14-24
Note: When installing the bracket, be sure that the harnesses are not caught. (6) Pull out the IH coil. Note: When installing the IH coil, be sure that the marks "C" and "S" of the power supply harnesses come at the left side.
C(Blue) S(Red)
IH coil
Black
Fig.14-25
[E] (1) (2) (3) (4)
Upper separation finger unit / Upper separation finger Take off the fuser unit ( P.14-18 "[B] Fuser unit"). Take off the cleaning web unit ( P.14-19 "[C] Cleaning web unit / Cleaning web"). Remove 2 screws to take off the fuser unit front cover. Remove 2 stepped screws. Then take off the upper separation finger unit and a crank bracket by sliding them to the rear side.
Screw
Upper separation finger unit
Screw
14
Crank plate
Fig.14-26
14 - 23
(5)
Remove the spring to take off the upper separation fingers.
Spring
Upper separation finger

Fig.14-27
[F] (1) (2) (3)
Lower separation finger unit / Lower separation finger Take off the fuser unit ( P.14-18 "[B] Fuser unit"). Remove 2 screws and open the lower separation finger unit. Remove the spring to take off the lower separation fingers.
Spring
Lower separation finger

Fig.14-28
[G] Fuser roller front/center/rear thermistor (THM1 / THM 2 / THM 3), Fuser roller center/side thermostat (THMO1 / THMO2) (1) (2) (3) Take off the fuser unit ( P.14-18 "[B] Fuser unit"). Take off the cleaning web unit ( P.14-19 "[C] Cleaning web unit / Cleaning web"). Loosen 2 pressure screws completely.
Pressure screw
Fig.14-29
14 - 24
(4)
Remove 2 screws and take off the stay.

Screw Stay Screw
Fig.14-30
(5)
Disconnect each connector, remove each screw and take off the thermistor and thermostat.
Thermistor
Thermostat
Thermistor
Screw
Screw
Screw
Fig.14-31
Notes: 1. When installing the thermostats, be careful not to deform the thermostats and their brackets. 2. Adjust the gap between each thermostat and the fuser roller to be 2.0-2.5 mm.
2.0~2.5mm
14
Thermostat Heat roller
Fig.14-32
14 - 25
[H] Fuser roller (1) (2) (3) Take off the fuser unit ( P.14-18 "[B] Fuser unit"). Take off the cleaning web unit ( P.14-19 "[C] Cleaning web unit / Cleaning web"). Loosen 2 pressure screws completely.
Pressure screw
Fig.14-33
(4) (5) (6)
Remove 2 screws and take off the fuser unit cover (rear). Open the lower separation finger unit ( P.14-24 "[F] Lower separation finger unit / Lower separation finger"). Remove 2 screws and open the entrance guide unit.
Fuser unit cover (rear) Screw
Entrance guide unit

Fig.14-34
(7)
Remove 2 screws, release 2 harness clamp and take off the bracket with releasing the catching section.
Screw Bracket Harness clamp
Screw
Fig.14-35
14 - 26
(8) (9)
Remove 2 screws and disconnect 1 connector. Remove 1 C-ring (rear).
Screw
C-ring (rear)
Connector Screw
Fig.14-36
(10) Remove 1 E-ring and take off the gear and one-way clutch. (11) Remove 2 screws and take off the bearing (rear).
Bearing (rear)
Screw E-ring
Screw
Gear, One-way clutch

Fig.14-37
(12) Remove 1 C-ring (front).
C-ring (front)
14
Fig.14-38
14 - 27
(13) Take off the fuser roller covering it with paper and such not to make scars on it.
Fuser roller
Fig.14-39
[I] (1) (2) (3)
Pressure roller Take off the fuser roller ( P.14-26 "[H] Fuser roller"). Take off the pressure roller with its bearing. Remove 2 bearings and 2 collars from the pressure roller.
Pressure roller
Fig.14-40
[J] (1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
Web detection sensor (S8) Take off the fuser unit ( P.14-18 "[B] Fuser unit"). Take off the cleaning web unit ( P.14-19 "[C] Cleaning web unit / Cleaning web"). Take off the fuser unit front cover. Disconnect 1 connector and remove 1 screw to take off the web detection sensor with its bracket. Release the latch of the sensor to take off the web detection sensor.
Web detection sensor
Screw
Fig.14-41
14 - 28
[K] (1) (2) (3)
Web motor (M4) / Fuser transport sensor (S9) Take off the fuser unit ( P.14-18 "[B] Fuser unit"). Take off the cleaning web unit ( P.14-19 "[C] Cleaning web unit / Cleaning web"). Remove 2 screws to take off the fuser unit front cover.
Fuser unit front cover
Fig.14-42
(4)
Remove 2 screws and open the lower separation finger unit.
Lower separation finger unit

Fig.14-43
(5) (6)
Release the clamp and disconnect 1 connector. Remove 2 screws and take off the web motor.
14
Web motor
Fig.14-44
14 - 29
(7)
Disconnect 1 connector to take off the fuser transport sensor.
Fuser transport sensor

Fig.14-45
[L] (1)
Pressure roller thermistor (THM4)
Take off the fuser unit ( P.14-18 "[B] Fuser unit"). (2) Disconnect 1 connector of the pressure roller thermistor. (3) Remove 2 screws to take off the lower entrance guide. (4) Remove 1 screw to take off the harness cover. (5) Remove 1 screw to take off the pressure roller thermistor. Notes: 1. Use tightening torques of 0.4-0.6 Nm to prevent the thermistors from damage. 2. Be sure that the thermistor is contacting with the pressure roller when it has been installed.
Harness cover
Fig.14-46
14 - 30
15. EXIT/REVERSE SECTION

This equipment conducts a paper reverse operation when printing more than 2 sheet of paper or carrying out a duplex printing. Its reversing device once transports the paper from the fuser unit to the reverse path where the paper is switched back and reversed, and then transports it to the exit roller or transfer section.
Exit roller
Exit/reverse gate Reverse path roller-1 Reverse path sensor-1 Reverse section cooling fan-1 and -2
Reverse path roller-2
Reverse path sensor-2
Fig.15-1
15
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 EXIT/REVERSE SECTION
15 - 1
15.2 Functions
1) Exit/reverse gate This gate switches the paper from the fuser unit in the direction of the exit roller or reverse path. This is operated by the gate solenoid (SOL2). 2) Exit roller The exit roller exits the paper from the fuser unit to the outside of the equipment. This is driven by the exit motor (M18). 3) Reverse path rollers The path roller feeds the paper and switches back at the reverse path. This is driven by the reverse motor (M19) and switches the feeding speed to "high" after the trailing edge of paper goes through the fuser transport sensor (S9). 4) Reverse section cooling fan-1 and -2 (M24, M25) These fans are equipped to cool down the reverse section. 5) Reverse sensor-1 and -2 (S23, S24) These sensors detect the state of paper feeding.
15 - 2
15.3 Driving of Exit/Reverse section

The paper feeding roller in the exit/reverse section is driven by the following mechanism. Exit motor (G19) Gears (G21, G20, G19) Exit roller Reverse motor (T21) Timing belt and Pulleys (T23, T23) Reverse path roller
15
15 - 3
15.4 Operation
The paper from the fuser unit is transported to the reverse path by the exit/reverse gate, which is usually directed toward the reverse path and switched by the gate solenoid (SOL2) only when the reverse operation is not carried out. When the trailing edge of the paper has passed through the fuser transport sensor (S9), the paper transport speed at the reverse path is switched to a high one and switched back in a specified time after that. The paper is transported to the exit roller with keeping the high speed and discharged to the outside of the equipment. When carrying out a duplex printing, the paper switched back at the reverse path is transported to the horizontal transport section, which is under the transfer/transport unit and switches the paper transport speed to a normal one at this time, and it is again transported to the transfer section and fused there. Then, after the duplex paper has passed through the fuser unit and the exit/reverse gate has been switched, it is discharged to the outside of the equipment by the exit roller without being transported to the reverse path.
15 - 4
3 sheets 1 copy Single-sided printing operation (A4/LT)

[3] [1] [2]
Step 1
Step 6
[1] [2]
[3]
Step 2
Step 7
[2]
[3] [3]
[1]
Step 3
Step 8
[2] [1]
[3]
Step 4
15
[3]
[2]
Step 5
Fig.15-2
15 - 5
5 sheets 1 copy Duplex printing operation (A4/LT)

[1] [4] [3] [2]
Step 1
Step 6
[2]
[2]
[5]
[1]
Step 2
[4]
[3]
Step 7
[3]
[3]
[5]
[2]
[1]
[4]
Step 3
Step 8
[1]
[3]
[3] [4] [2] [5]
Step 4
Step 9
[1]
[4]
[4]
[5]
[3]
[2]
Step 5
Step 10
Fig.15-3
15 - 6
3 sheets 1 copy Single-sided printing operation (A3/LD/B4/LG/A4-R/LT-R)

[3] [1]
Step 1
Step 6
[2]
[3] [2] [2] [1]
Step 2
Step 7
[2]
Step 3
Step 8
[1]
[3]
[2] [1] [3]
Step 4
Step 9
15
[3]
[2]
Step 5
Fig.15-4
15 - 7
4 sheets 1 copy Duplex printing operation (A3/LD/B4/LG/A4-R/LT-R)

[1] [2] [4]
[3]
Step 1
Step 6
[2]
[3]
[1]
Step 2
[4]
Step 7
[1]
[3]
[4] [2]
Step 3
Step 8
[1]
[3]
[4]
[2]
Step 4
Step 9
[2]
[4]
[3]
Step 5
Step 10
Fig.15-5
15 - 8
15.5 Exit motor control circuit

The exit motor is a stepping motor driven by the control signal output from the PFC CPU on the LGC board and rotates the exit roller. The PFC CPU outputs each phase signal (EXTMA-0, EXTMB-0, EXTMC-0, EXTMD-0) to the motor driver. The motor driver converts this phase signal into a +24 V pulse signal (EXTMA-0A, EXTMB-0A, EXTMC-0A, EXTMD-0A) and outputs it to the motor. Also, the rotation speed of the motor can be switched by changing the output timing of each pulse signal.
LGC board
Q57 EXMVR-0
+5.1VC
EXTMA-0A
IC57
SG
EXTMB-0A EXTMA-0 EXTMB-0 EXTMC-0 EXTMD-0 EXTMD-0A IC83 Exit motor Motor driver EXTMC-0A
PFC CPU
Fig.15-6
Exit motor drive signal

Signal EXTMA-0 EXTMB-0 EXMVR-0 EXTMC-0 EXTMD-0 Pulse signal L H
Motor status
Rotation when accelerating/decelerating Rotation at a constant speed
15
15 - 9
15.6 Reverse motor control circuit

The reverse motor is a stepping motor driven by the control signal output from the PFC CPU on the LGC board and rotates the reverse motor-1 and -2. The reverse motor is driven by the pulse signal (MTMA-0, MTMB-0, MTMAB-0, MTMBB-0) output from the driver IC. These pulse signals are formed based on the reference clock signal (REVMC-0) and output only when the enable signal (REVME-0) is L level. Also, the rotation speed or direction of the motor can be switched by changing the output timing of each pulse signal. The rotation direction can be switched by the motor rotation direction switch signal (REVCW-0).
LGC board
REVMC-0 REVCW-0 IC1 IC57 PFC CPU
+5VSW
IC103 Buffer
MOT2-RV board
MTMA-0 MTMB-0 Motor driver MTMAB-0 MTMBB-0 Reverse motor
RVMVR-0
REVME-0 Q63
SG
Fig.15-7
Reverse motor drive signal

Signal REVMC-0 Pulse signal REVME-0 L L L L H RVMVR-0 L L H H REVCW-0 L H L H Motor status Forward rotation when accelerating/ decelerating Reverse rotation when accelerating/ decelerating Forward rotation at a constant speed Reverse rotation at a constant speed Stop
15 - 10

[A] (1) (2) Exit/Reverse unit Take off the left lower cover (= exit cover) ( P.2-46 "[J] Left lower cover (Exit cover)"). Open the exit/reverse unit and remove 1 screw.
Exit/Reverse unit
Fig.15-8
(3)
Disconnect 1 connector. Then take off the exit/reverse unit by lifting it up.
Exit/Reverse unit
Fig.15-9
[B] (1) (2) (3)
Reverse section cooling fan-1 [M24] / Reverse section cooling fan-2 [M25] Take off the left lower cover (= exit cover) ( P.2-46 "[J] Left lower cover (Exit cover)"). Disconnect 1 connector, remove 2 screws and then take off the reverse section cooling fan-1. Disconnect 1 connector, remove 2 screws and then take off the reverse section cooling fan-2.
Reverse section cooling fan-1
15
Reverse section cooling fan-2

Fig.15-10
15 - 11
[C] Exit sensor [S22] (1) (2) Take off the left lower cover (= exit cover) ( P.2-46 "[J] Left lower cover (Exit cover)"). Disconnect 1 connector, remove 1 screw and then take off the sensor with its bracket.
Exit sensor
Fig.15-11
(3)
Release the latch to take off the exit sensor.

Exit sensor
Fig.15-12
[D] Reverse sensor-1 [S23] / Reverse sensor-2 [S24] (1) (2) (3) Take off the left lower cover (= exit cover) ( P.2-46 "[J] Left lower cover (Exit cover)"). Disconnect 1 connector, remove 2 screws and then take off the reverse sensor-1. Disconnect 1 connector, remove 1 screw and then take off the reverse sensor-2.
Reverse sensor-1
Reverse sensor-2
Fig.15-13
15 - 12
[E] (1) (2)
Exit cover switch [SW5] Take off the left lower cover (= exit cover) ( P.2-46 "[J] Left lower cover (Exit cover)"). Open the exit/reverse unit. Then disconnect the connector and release the latch to take off the exit cover switch.
Exit cover switch
Fig.15-14
[F] (1) (2)
Gate solenoid [SOL2] Take off the left lower cover (= exit cover) ( P.2-46 "[J] Left lower cover (Exit cover)"). Open the exit/reverse unit. Then disconnect 1 connector, release the clamp and remove 3 screws to take off the gate solenoid.
Gate solenoid
Fig.15-15
Note: The solenoid is normally screwed at the position A shown in the figure at right. However, the position of the solenoid can be adjusted by moving this screw to the position B when the flap valve of the solenoid is not pulled enough.
15
Fig.15-16
15 - 13
[G] Exit roller (1) (2) (3) Take off the exit/reverse unit ( P.15-11 "[A] Exit/Reverse unit"). Remove the E-ring, gear and pin. Remove 2 E-rings and take off the exit roller by sliding 2 bearings to the inside.
Exit roller
Gear
Pin
Fig.15-17
[H] Reverse section driving unit / Reverse motor driving PC board (MOT2-RV board) (1) (2) Take off the exit/reverse unit ( P.15-11 "[A] Exit/Reverse unit"). Disconnect 1 connector, remove 6 screws and then take off the reverse section driving unit.
Reverse section driving unit
Fig.15-18
(3)
Release 4 locking supports to take off the MOT2-RV board.
Reverse motor driving PC board
Fig.15-19
15 - 14
[I] (1)
Reverse motor [M19] Take off the reverse section driving unit ( P.15-14 "[H] Reverse section driving unit / Reverse motor driving PC board (MOT2-RV board)"). Disconnect 1 connector, remove 2 screws and then take off the reverse motor.
Reverse motor
(2)
Fig.15-20
[J] (1)
Reverse roller-1 / Reverse roller-2 Take off the reverse section driving unit ( P.15-14 "[H] Reverse section driving unit / Reverse motor driving PC board (MOT2-RV board)"). Take off the reverse motor ( P.15-15 "[I] Reverse motor [M19]"). Remove 2 E-rings, 2 gears and 2 belts.
(2) (3)
Belt
Gear
Belt Gear
Fig.15-21
(4) (5)
Remove 2 E-rings and 2 bearings to take off the reverse roller-1. Remove 2 E-rings and 2 bearings to take off the reverse roller-2.
Reverse roller-2
Reverse roller-1
15
Bearing
Bearing
Fig.15-22
15 - 15
[K] (1)
Exit motor [M18] Take off the reverse section driving unit ( P.15-14 "[H] Reverse section driving unit / Reverse motor driving PC board (MOT2-RV board)"). Take off the rear cover ( P.2-47 "[L] Rear cover"). Take off the LGC board cover and disconnect 1 connector. Remove 2 screws and take off the exit motor.
Exit motor
(2) (3) (4)
Fig.15-23
[L] O-ring When installing the receiving tray, add the O-rings (service parts) to the exit roller in order to improve the paper stacking condition. (1) (2) Remove 6 screws and take off the left lower cover (exit cover). ( P.2-46 "[J] Left lower cover (Exit cover)") Remove 2 E-rings and move the 2 bearings toward the inside.
E-ring
Bearing
Fig.15-24
(3)
Move the exit roller to the near side and install 2 O-rings to the grooves of the exit roller. Note: O-ring: Refer to the parts list for the parts number and so on.
O-ring
Fig.15-25
15 - 16 05/07
16. REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (RADF)

The Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (RADF) is a device that automatically feeds originals one by one to the ADF original glass and discharges them to the receiving tray after scanning is finished. RADF consists of the following sections. Original feeding section This section, consisting of the pickup belt, feed roller, separation roller, registration roller, etc., feeds originals one by one to the ADF original glass. Original transporting/scanning section This section, consisting of the read roller, transport roller, etc, transports an original on the ADF original glass and scans it at the same time. Original reverse/exit section This section, consisting of the exit roller, reverse flapper, reverse roller, etc., discharges an original to either the large or small receiving tray after scanning is finished. When two-sided scanning is carried out, the original is reversed by switching the reverse flapper and fed again to the ADF original glass.
Original length detection sensor Original registration sensor Original width detection sensor Registration roller Separation roller Feed roller Original empty sensor Small original exit sensor Reverse flapper 1st roller Small original exit roller Pickup belt Original tray sensor
Original intermediate transport roller Large original exit roller Read sensor Small original reverse roller
2nd roller Read roller 3rd roller
Large original exit sensor 4th roller Intermediate transport sensor
Small original reverse sensor Small original reverse flapper
Large original exit flapper
Small original exit flapper
Fig.16-1
Note: Large-sized original: A3, A4-R, B4, B5-R, LD, LG, LT-R Small-sized original: A4, B5, A5-R, LT, ST-R
16
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (RADF)
16 - 1
16.2 Operation
Jam access cover Drive/control section Original feeding tray
Feeding/transporting section Small original receiving section Large original receiving section
Fig.16-2
Feeding/transporting section
Apparatus Jam access cover Pickup belt Feed roller Separation roller Registration roller Read roller Exit/Reverse roller Intermediate transport roller Small original reverse roller Small original exit roller
Original feeding tray Drive/control section
Original feeding tray
Electric parts Original empty sensor (S60) Lifting tray upper limit detection sensor (S59) Lifting tray lower limit detection sensor (S62) Jam access cover open/close sensor (S61) Original length detection sensor (S63) Original registration sensor (S55) Original width detection sensor 1, 2, 3 (S56, 57, 58) Read sensor (S69) Original intermediate transport sensor (S70) Large original exit sensor (S68) Small original reverse sensor (S66) Small original exit sensor (S67) Original tray sensor (S53) Original tray width sensor (S54) Document feed motor (M37) Tray lift motor (M38) Read motor (M36) Large original exit motor (M39) Large original exit roller release solenoid (SOL6) Large original exit solenoid (SOL5) Small original exit solenoid (SOL4) RADF open/close sensor (S65) APS operation sensor (S64) Jam access cover open/close switch (SW10) RADF open/close switch (SW9)
16 - 2
16.3 Drive System

1) Document feed motor (M37) rotating forward (seen in front)
One-way pulley lock One-way pulley idling
Document feed motor
Rear
Document feed motor rotates clockwise to feed originals.
Registration roller
Front
Fig.16-3
2) Document feed motor (M37) rotating in reverse (seen in front)

One-way pulley idling One-way pulley lock
Rear
16
Document feed motor rotates counterclockwise to feed originals.
Front
Fig.16-4
16 - 3
3) Read motor (M36) rotating in reverse (seen in front)

Large original exit roller Large original exit motor Large original exit motor switches to the backside of an original by rotating clockwise and registers that side. Read motor Intermediate transport roller
Rear
Read motor rotates counterclockwise to transport, scan and discharge originals. Read roller
Fig.16-5
Front
4) large original exit motor (M39) rotating in reverse (seen in front)

One-way pulley Large original exit motor Small original exit motor rotates clockwise to transport and discharge originals. Small original exit motor
Rear
Small original exit roller Large original exit roller Intermediate transport roller Small original reverse roller
Large original exit motor rotates counterclockwise to discharge and reverse originals. Front
Fig.16-6
16 - 4
5) Tray lift motor (M38) rotating forward (seen in front)
Tray lift motor
Tray lift motor rotates clockwise to lower the tray. Lifting tray
Fig.16-7
6) Tray lift motor (M38) rotating in reverse (seen in front)
Tray lift motor
Tray lift motor rotates counterclockwise to lift the tray. Lifting tray
Fig.16-8
16
16 - 5
16.4 Signal Block Diagram

Engine RADF (Reversing automatic document reader) SW10 SW9 S53 S54 S55 S56 S57 S58 S59 S60 S61 S62 S63 S64 S65 S66 S67 S68 S69 S70 M36 RXD SGND TXD ACK REQ SCN_STR DF_ACK DF_REQ DF_CNT M39 Communication circuit CPU SOL6 SOL5 Sensor input circuit SOL4 EEPROM
Driver M37
M38
DC +24V DC +24V DC +5V DC +5V
Irruptive current control circuit
M40
Fig.16-9
The following 8 lines are used for sending/receiving of signals between the engine and RADF. REQ ......................Communication request signal (engine to RADF) DF-REQ ...............Communication request signal (RADF to engine) DF-ACK.................Response signal to communication request signal (RADF to engine) ACK.......................Response signal to communication request signal (engine to RADF) TxD .......................Data sent to RADF from engine RxD .......................Data sent to engine from RADF SCN_STR .............Scanning start signal DF_CNT................Detection signal of connection to RADF The data communication (RxD and TxD) between the engine and RADF is adopting a serial communication system which makes it impossible to check with a testing device whether signals are sent/ received properly.
16 - 6
16.5 Operations
16.5.1 A4 single-sided feeding (Operational condition: A4 original/ Reproduction ratio: 100%)
1) Original setting The original empty sensor (S60) turns ON when the original has been set on the original feeding tray.
Fig.16-10
2) Lifting of the lifting tray The tray lift motor (M38) rotates to lift the tray after receiving the original feeding signal from the engine. With a specified delay after the lifting tray upper limit detection sensor (S59) has detected a top side of the original, the tray lift motor (M38) stops rotating.
Fig.16-11
16
16 - 7
3) Start of separation The document feed motor (M37) starts to rotate forward. When the original length detection sensor (S63) detects the leading edge of the original, the tray lift motor (M38) starts to rotate to lower the tray to a specified level. The document feed motor (M37) stops rotating when the original has been transported a specified distance after the original registration sensor (S55) had detected the leading edge of the original. From 2nd original, feeding starts after the admission signal to start feeding is received.
Fig.16-12
4) Start of feeding The document feed motor (M37) starts to rotate in reverse. After the document feed motor (M37) has finished accelerating, the read motor (M36) starts to rotate forward. With 1st original, both the document feed and read motors (M37, M36) start to slow down when the leading edge of the original has come to a specified distance before the read sensor (S69). From 2nd original, the document feed motor (M37) starts to slow down when the leading edge of the original has come to a specified distance before the 1st roller. The document feed motor (M37) stops rotating when the original length detection sensor (S63) has detected the trailing edge of the original. At the same time, the tray lift motor (M38) starts to rotate to lift the tray. When the tray has come to a specified level after the lifting tray upper limit detection sensor (S62) had detected the top side of the original, it stops rotating. The original empty sensor (S60) detects whether or not there is a next original with a specified delay after the original length detection sensor (S63) has detected the trailing edge of the original. Without a next original, the tray lift motor (M38) starts to lower the tray to turn the original set signal OFF. When the lifting tray lower limit detection sensor (S62) has detected the tray, it stops rotating. With a next original, the separation begins at the same time the scanning begins. When the original has been transported a specified distance by the read motor (M36) after the read sensor (S69) had detected the leading edge of the original, the read motor (M36) stops rotating and the original stop signal turns ON.
Fig.16-13
16 - 8
5) Start of 1st original scanning The scanning begins after receiving the original transport signal from the engine. At the same time, the original stop signal is reset. Then the read motor (M36) starts to rotate forward and to separate the next original. The SCN-STR turns ON when the leading edge of the original has reached the scanning section. When it has been transported to the intermediate transport section and come to a specified distance before the intermediate transport roller, the large original exit motor (M39) starts to rotate in reverse. Feeding of 2nd original starts when the original has been transported a specified distance by the read motor (M36) after the original length detection sensor (S63) had detected the trailing edge of the original.
Fig.16-14
The SCN-STR turns OFF when the trailing edge of the original has passed the scanning section, and before the trailing edge of the original passes the 3rd roller, 2nd original reaches the scanning waiting section and stops being transported.
Fig.16-15
16
16 - 9
6) Start of 2nd original scanning Scanning begins after receiving the original transport signal from the engine. At the same time, the original stop signal is reset. Then the read motor (M36) starts to rotate forward and the large original exit motor (M39) starts to rotate in reverse. The SCN-SCR turns ON when the leading edge of the original has reached the scanning section. When the trailing edge of 1st original has proceeded a specified distance after passing the 3rd roller, the large original exit motor (M39) starts to accelerate.
Fig.16-16
When the leading edge of the original has been transported to the intermediate transport section and come to a specified distance before the intermediate transport roller, The large original exit motor (M39) starts to rotate in reverse.
Fig.16-17
The SCN-SCR turns OFF when the leading edge of the original has reached the scanning section. When the trailing edge of the original has proceeded a specified distance after passing the 3rd roller, the large original exit motor (M39) starts to accelerate.
Fig.16-18
16 - 10
7) After the original trailing edge has passed the 3rd roller When the leading edge of the original has come to a specified distance before the small original exit roller, the small original exit motor (M40) starts to rotate forward.
Fig.16-19
When the original intermediate transport sensor (S70) detects the trailing edge of 1st original, the large original exit motor (M39) stops rotating unless the leading edge of 2nd original has come to a given place. If it has, the large original exit motor (M39) slows down to the speed of scanning. When the trailing edge of the original has come to a specified distance before the small original exit roller, the small original exit motor (M40) starts to slow down.
Fig.16-20
When the original has proceeded a specified distance after the small original exit sensor (S67) had detected the trailing edge of the original, the small original exit motor (M40) stops rotating. Then the operation ends after 2nd original has been discharged.
16
Fig.16-21
16 - 11
16.5.2
A4 two-sided feeding (Operational condition: A4 original/ Reproduction ratio: 100%)
1) Original setting Same operation as 16.5.1. 1) 2) Lifting of the lifting tray Same operation as 16.5.1. 2) 3) Start of separation Same operation as 16.5.1. 3) 4) Start of feeding Same operation as 16.5.1. 4)
16 - 12
5) Start of top side scanning Scanning starts after receiving the original transport signal from the engine. At the same time, the original stop signal is reset. The read motor (M36) starts to rotate forward and to separate 2nd original. When the leading edge of the original has reached the scanning section, both the SCN-STR and the large original exit solenoid (SOL5) turn ON. When the leading edge of the original has been transported to the large original exit side and reached to the 3rd roller, the large original exit motor (M39) starts to rotate in reverse.
Fig.16-22
The SCN-STR turns OFF after the trailing edge of the original has passed the scanning section, and at the same time, both the read and large original exit motors (M36, M39) start to accelerate. After the trailing edge of the original has passed the 4th roller and proceeded a specified distance, the large original exit motor (M39) slows down. After the large original exit sensor (S68) has detected the trailing edge of the original, the read motor (M36) stops rotating soon and the large original exit motor (M39) stops rotating when the original has proceeded a specified distance. Then the original is nipped by the large original exit roller. The large original exit solenoid (SOL5) turns OFF when the large original exit motor (M39) stops rotating.
Fig.16-23
16
16 - 13
6) Start of 1st original back side registering The large original exit motor (M39) starts to rotate forward. After the large original exit sensor (S68) has detected the leading edge of the original then the original has proceeded a specified distance and been registered, the large original exit motor (M39) stops rotating.
Fig.16-24
7) Start of 1st original back side feeding Both the large original exit and read motors (M39, M36) start to rotate forward, and when the leading edge of the original has come to a specified distance before the read sensor (S69), they start to slow down. They stop to rotate when the leading edge of the original has reached the read sensor (S69) then the original has been transported a specified distance by the read motor (M36). At the same time, the original stop signal is set.
Fig.16-25
16 - 14
8) Start of 1st original back side scanning Scanning starts after receiving the original transport signal from the engine. At the same time, the original stop signal is reset. When the read motor (M36) starts to rotate forward, the large original exit motor (M39) also starts to rotate forward and the large original exit roller release solenoid (SOL6) turns ON. The SCN-STR turns ON when the leading edge of the original has reached the scanning section. The large original exit motor (M39) stops rotating when the large original exit roller release solenoid (SOL6) has turned ON. When the leading edge of the original has been transported to the intermediate transport section and come to a specified distance before the intermediate transport roller, the large original exit motor (M39) starts to rotate in reverse and the small original exit motor (M40) also starts to rotate in reverse and the small original exit solenoid (SOL4) turns ON. Feeding of the next original starts when the read motor (M36) has counted a specified time since the start of the scanning operation.
Fig.16-26
The SCN-STR turns OFF when the trailing edge of the original has passed the scanning section. At the same time, the large original exit roller release solenoid (SOL6) also turns OFF. The next original reaches the scanning waiting position and stops before the trailing edge of the original passes the 3rd roller.
Fig.16-27
16
16 - 15
9) Start of 2nd original back side scanning Scanning begins after receiving the original transport signal from the engine. At the same time the original stop signal is reset. The read motor (M36) starts to rotate forward and the large original exit motor (M39) starts to rotate in reverse. The SCN-STR turns ON when the leading edge of the original has reached the scanning section, and the large original exit solenoid (SOL5) turns ON, too. The large original exit motor (M39) starts to accelerate when the trailing edge of 1st original has passed the 3rd roller and proceeded a specified distance.
Fig.16-28
When the leading edge of the original has been transported to the large original exit side and come to the 3rd roller, the large original exit roller release solenoid (SOL6) turns ON. The large original exit motor (M39) starts to slow down when the trailing edge of 1st original has passed the intermediate transport roller. The SCN-STR turns OFF when the trailing edge of the original has passed the scanning section. At the same time, both the read and the large original exit motors (M36, M39) start to accelerate and the large original exit roller release solenoid (SOL6) turns OFF.
Fig.16-29
When the trailing edge of the original has passed the 4th roller then proceeded a specified distance, the large original exit motor (M39) starts to slow down. After the large original exit sensor (S68) has detected the trailing edge of the original, the read motor (M36) stops rotating soon and the large original exit motor (M39) stops rotating when the original has proceeded a specified distance. The large original exit solenoid (SOL5) turns OFF when the large original exit motor (M39) stops rotating.
16 - 16
Fig.16-30
10)Start of 2nd original back side registering Same operation as 6)
Fig.16-31
11)Start of 2nd original back side feeding Same operation as 7)
Fig.16-32
16
16 - 17
12)Start of 2nd original back side scanning Scanning begins after receiving the original transport signal from the engine. At the same time, the original transport signal turns OFF. When the read motor (M36) starts to rotate forward, the large original exit motor (M39) also starts to rotate forward and the large original exit roller release solenoid (SOL6) turns ON. The SCN-STR turns ON when the leading edge of the original has reached the scanning section. The large original exit motor (M39) stops when the large original exit roller release solenoid (SOL6) has turned ON. When the leading edge of the original has been transported to the intermediate transport section and come to a specified distance before the intermediate transport roller, both the large and small original exit motors (M39, M40) start to rotate in reverse. (The small original exit solenoid (SOL4) has been ON from 1st original.) Both the SCN-STR and the large original exit roller release solenoid (SOL6) turn OFF when the trailing edge of the original has passed the scanning section. The large original exit motor (M39) starts to accelerate when the trailing edge of the original has passed the 3rd roller and proceeded a specified distance.
Fig.16-33
16 - 18
13)After the original trailing edge has passed the 3rd roller The large original exit motor (M39) stops rotating when the trailing edge of the original has been detected by the original intermediate transport sensor (S70) then proceeded a specified distance. The small original exit motor (M40) starts to slow down when the trailing edge of the original has come to a specified distance before the small original reverse sensor (S66). Then it stops rotating when the trailing edge of the original has been detected by the small original reverse sensor (S66) and proceeded a specified distance.
Fig.16-34
The small original exit motor (M40) starts to rotate forward. Then it starts to slow down with a specified time delay after the small original reverse sensor (S66) has detected the leading edge of the original.
Fig.16-35
The small original exit motor (M40) stops rotating when the trailing edge of the original has been detected by the small original exit sensor (S67) then proceeded a specified distance. The small original exit solenoid (SOL4) turns OFF and the operation ends when the original has been discharged.
16
Fig.16-36
16 - 19
16.5.3
A4 single-sided feeding (Operational condition: A3 original/ Reproduction ratio: 100%)
1) Original setting Same operation as 16.5.1. 1) 2) Lifting of the lifting tray Same operation as 16.5.1. 2) 3) Start of separating Same operation as 16.5.1. 3)
16 - 20
4) Start of feeding The document feed motor (M37) starts to rotate in reverse. When the document feed motor (M37) has completed acceleration, the read motor (M36) starts to rotate forward. Both the document feed and read motors (M37, M36) start to slow down when the leading edge of the original has come to a specified distance before the read sensor (S69). They stop rotating and the original stop signal turns ON when the leading edge of the original has been detected by the read sensor (S69) then proceeded a specified distance.
Fig.16-37
5) Start of 1st original scanning Scanning begins after receiving the original transport signal from the engine. At the same time the original stop signal is reset. When the read motor (M36) starts to rotate forward, the feed document motor (M37) also starts to rotate in reverse and the large original exit solenoid (SOL5) turns ON. The SCN-STR turns ON when the leading edge of the original has reached the scanning section. The large original exit motor (M39) starts to rotate in reverse when the leading edge of the original has been transported to the large original exit side and come to the 3rd roller. When the original registration sensor (S55) has detected the trailing edge of the original, the document feed motor (M37) stops rotating and the tray lift motor (M38) starts to rotate to lift the tray. The tray lift motor (M38) stops rotating when a specified number of counts is counted after the lifting tray upper limit detection sensor (S59) has detected the top side of the original. The original empty sensor (S60) detects whether or not there is a next original when a specified time passes after the original registration sensor (S55) has detected the trailing edge of the original. With a next original, separating of the next original begins.
16
Fig.16-38
When the trailing edge of the original has passed the scanning section, the SCN-STR turns OFF and both the read and large original exit motors (M36, M39) start to accelerate.
16 - 21
Fig.16-39
Feeding of 2nd original begins when the trailing edge of the original has passed the 4th roller.
Fig.16-40
When the trailing edge of the original has passed the 4th roller then proceeded a specified distance, the large original exit motor (M39) starts to slow down. After the large original exit sensor (S68) has detected the trailing edge of the original, the read motor (M36) stops rotating soon and the large original exit motor (M39) stops rotating when the original has proceeded a specified distance. Then the original is discharged. Both the read and document feed motors (M36, 37) stop when 2nd original has reached the scanning waiting section.
Fig.16-41
16 - 22
6) Start of 2nd original scanning Scanning begins after receiving the original transport signal from the engine. At the same time the original stop signal is reset. When the read motor (M36) starts to rotate forward, the document feed motor (M37) also starts to rotate in reverse. (The large original exit solenoid (SOL5) has been ON from 1st original.) The SCN-STR turns ON when the leading edge of the original has reached the scanning section. The large original exit motor (M39) starts to rotate in reverse when the leading edge of the original has been transported to the large original exit side and come to the 3rd roller. When the original registration sensor (S55) has detected the trailing edge of the original, the document feed motor (M37) stops rotating and the tray lift motor (M38) starts to rotate to lift the tray. The tray lift motor (M38) stops rotating when a specified number of counts is counted after the lifting tray upper limit detection sensor (S59) has detected the top side of the original. The original empty sensor (S60) detects whether or not there is a next original when a specified time passes after the original registration sensor (S55) has detected the trailing edge of the original. If not, the tray lift motor (M38) starts to rotate to lower the tray and the original set signal turns OFF. The tray lift motor (M38) stops rotating when the lifting tray lower limit detection sensor (S62) has detected the tray. When the trailing edge of the original has passed the scanning section, the SCN-STR turns OFF and both the read and large original exit motors (M36, M39) start to accelerate.
Fig.16-42
When the trailing edge of the original has passed the 4th roller then proceeded a specified distance, the large original exit motor (M39) starts to slow down and the read motor (M36) stops rotating. The large original exit motor (M39) stops rotating when the trailing edge of the original has been detected by the large original exit sensor (S68) then proceeded a specified distance. The large original exit solenoid (SOL5) turns OFF and the operation ends when the original has been discharged.
16
Fig.16-43
16 - 23
16.5.4
A3 two-sided feeding (Operational condition: A3 original/ Reproduction ratio: 100%)
1) Original setting Same operation as 16.5.1. 1) 2) Lifting of the lifting tray Same operation as 16.5.1. 2) 3) Start of separation Same operation as 16.5.1. 3) 4) Start of feeding Same operation as 16.5.1. 4)
Fig.16-44
16 - 24
5) Start of 1st original top side scanning Scanning begins after receiving the original transport signal from the engine. At the same time the original stop signal is reset. When the read motor (M36) starts to rotate forward, the document feed motor (M37) also starts to rotate in reverse and the large original exit solenoid (SOL5) turns ON. The SCN-STR turns ON when the leading edge of the original has reached the scanning section. The large original exit motor (M39) starts to rotate in reverse when the leading edge of the original has been transported to the large original exit side and come to the 3rd roller. When the original registration sensor (S55) has detected the trailing edge of the original, the document feed motor (M37) stops rotating and the tray lift motor (M38) starts to rotate to lift the tray. The tray lift motor (M38) stops rotating when a specified number of counts is counted after the lifting tray upper limit detection sensor (S59) has detected the top side of the original. The original empty sensor (S60) detects whether or not there is a next original when a specified time passes after the registration sensor (S55) has detected the trailing edge of the original. With a next original, separating of the next original begins.
Fig.16-45
When the trailing edge of the original has passed the scanning section, the SCN-STR turns OFF and both the read and large original exit motors (M36, M39) start to accelerate.
Fig.16-46
The large original exit motor (M39) slows down when the trailing edge of the original has passed the 4th roller and proceeded a specified distance. After the large original exit sensor (S68) has detected the trailing edge of the original, the read motor (M36) stops rotating soon and the large original exit motor (M39) stops rotating when the original has proceeded a specified distance. Then the original is nipped by the large original exit roller.
16
16 - 25
Fig.16-47
6) Start of 1st original back side registering Same operation as 16.5.2. 6) 7) Start of 1st original back side feeding Same operation as 16.5.2. 7)
Fig.16-48
16 - 26
8) Start of 1st original back side scanning Scanning begins after receiving the original transport signal from the engine. At the same time, the original transport signal is reset. When the read motor (M36) starts to rotate forward, the large original exit motor (M39) also starts to rotate forward and the large original exit roller release solenoid (SOL6) turns ON. (The large original exit solenoid (SOL5) has been ON from 1st original.) The SCN-STR turns ON when the leading edge of the original has reached the scanning section. The large original exit motor (M39) stops when the large original exit roller release solenoid (SOL6) has turned ON. When the leading edge of the original has been transported to the large original exit side and come the 3rd roller, the large original exit motor (M39) starts to rotate in reverse.
Fig.16-49
The SCN-STR turns OFF when the trailing edge of the original has passed the scanning section. At the same time, both the read and large original exit motors (M36, M39) start to accelerate and the large original exit roller release solenoid (SOL6) turns OFF.
Fig.16-50
16
16 - 27
Fig.16-51
16 - 28
9) Reversing and discharging of 1st original Both the large original exit and read motors (M39, M36) start to rotate forward. When the leading edge of the original has reached the read sensor (S69) then been transported a specified distance by the read motor (M36), the large original exit roller release solenoid (SOL6) turns ON. The large original exit motor (M39) stops when the large original exit roller release solenoid (SOL6) has turned ON. When the leading edge of the original has been transported to the large original exit and reached the 3rd roller, and the large original exit motor (M39) starts to rotate in reverse.
Fig.16-52
Feeding of 2nd original begins when the trailing edge of the original has passed the 4th roller.(Same operation as 16.5.1 4))
Fig.16-53
When the trailing edge of the original has passed the 4th roller and proceeded a specified distance, the large original exit motor (M39) starts to slow down. When the trailing edge of the original has been detected by the large original exit sensor (S68) and proceeded a specified distance, it stops rotating. Then the original is discharged. Both the read and document feed motors (M36, M37) stop rotating when 2nd original has reached the scanning waiting position.
16
Fig.16-54
16 - 29
10)Start of 2nd original top side scanning Scanning begins after receiving the original transport signal from the engine. At the same time the original stop signal is reset. When the read motor (M36) starts to rotate forward, the document feed motor (M37) also starts to rotate in reverse. (The large original exit solenoid (SOL5) has been ON from 1st original.) The SCN-STR turns ON when the leading edge of the original has reached the scanning section. The large original exit motor (M39) starts to rotate in reverse when the leading edge of the original has been transported to the large original exit side and come to the 3rd roller. When the original registration sensor (S55) has detected the trailing edge of the original, the document feed motor (M37) stops rotating and the tray lift motor (M38) starts to rotate to lift the tray. The tray lift motor (M38) stops rotating when a specified number of counts is counter after the lifting tray upper limit detection sensor (S59) has detected the top side of the original. The original empty sensor (S60) detects whether or not there is a next original when a specified time passes after the registration sensor (S55) has detected the trailing edge of the original. If not, the tray lift motor (M38) starts to rotate to lower the tray and the original set signal is reset. The tray lift motor (M38) stops rotating when the lifting tray lower limit detection sensor (S62) has detected the tray. When the trailing edge of the original has passed the scanning section, the SCN-STR turns OFF and both the read and large original exit motors (M36, M39) start to accelerate.
Fig.16-55
Fig.16-56
11)Start of 2nd original back side registering Same operation as 16.5.2. 6)
16 - 30
12)Start of 2nd original back side feeding Same operation as 16.5.2. 7) 13)Start of 2nd original back side scanning Same operation as 16.5.2. 8)
Fig.16-57
14)Idle reversing and discharging of 2nd original Both the large original exit and read motors (M39, M36) start to rotate forward. When the leading edge of the original has reached the read sensor (S69) then been transported a specified distance by the read motor (M36), the large original exit roller release solenoid (SOL6) turns ON. The large original exit motor (M39) stops when the large original exit roller release solenoid (SOL6) has turned ON. When the leading edge of the original has been transported to the large original exit side and reached the 3rd roller and, the large original exit motor (M39) starts to rotate in reverse. The large original exit motor (M39) starts to slow down when the trailing edge of the original has passed the 4th roller and proceeded a specified distance. The read motor (M36) stops rotating without a next original. The large original exit motor (M36) stops rotating when the trailing edge of the original has been detected by the large original exit sensor (S68) and proceeded a specified distance. The large original exit solenoid (SOL5) turns OFF and the operation ends when the original has been discharged.
Fig.16-58
16
16 - 31
16.5.5
Single-sided feeding at mixed-original mode (Operational condition: A4-R and FOLIO originals/Reproduction ratio: 100%)
1) Original setting Same operation as 16.5.1. 1) 2) Lift of the lifting tray Same operation as 16.5.1. 2) 3) Start of separation Same operation as 16.5.1. 3)
16 - 32
4) Start of feeding The document feed motor (M37) starts to rotate in reverse. After the document feed motor (M37) has finished accelerating, the read motor (M36) starts to rotate forward. Both the document feed and read motors (M37, M36) start to slow down when the leading edge of the original has come to a specified distance before the read sensor (S69). The original is transported a specified distance by the read motor (M36) after the read sensor (S69) detects the leading edge of the original. Then after the original size is detected and the idle reversing is judged to be necessary, both the document feed and read motors (M37, M36) start to accelerate and the large original exit solenoid (SOL5) turns ON.
Fig.16-59
The large original exit motor (M39) starts to rotate in reverse when the leading edge of the original has been transported to the large original exit side and passed the 3rd roller. When the original registration sensor (S55) detects the trailing edge of the original, the document feed motor (M37) stops rotating and the tray lift motor (M38) starts to rotate to lift the tray. Then the tray lift motor (M38) stops lifting the tray when a specified number of counts is counted after the lifting tray upper limit detection sensor (S59) has detected the top side of the original. The original empty sensor (S60) detects whether or not there is a next original when a specified time passes after the original registration sensor (S55) has detected the trailing edge of the original. With a next original, separating begins. Without it, the tray lift motor (M38) starts to rotate to lower the tray and the original set signal is reset. The tray lift motor (M38) stops rotating when the lifting tray lower limit detection sensor (S62) has detected the tray. The large original exit motor (M39) starts to slow down when the trailing edge of the original has proceeded a specified distance after passing the 4th roller. After the large original exit sensor (S68) has detected the trailing edge of the original, the read motor (M36) stops rotating soon and the large original exit motor (M39) stops rotating when the original has proceeded a specified distance. The original is nipped by the large original exit roller.
16
Fig.16-60
16 - 33
5) Start of back side registering Same operation as 16.5.2. 6) 6) Start of back side feeding Both the large original exit and read motors (M39, M36) start to rotate forward. After the leading edge of the original has reached the read sensor (S69) and been transported a specified distance by the read motor (M36), the large original exit roller release solenoid (SOL6) turns ON. Then the large original exit motor (M39) stops rotating. The large original exit motor (M39) starts to rotate in reverse after the original has been transported to the large original exit and the leading edge of the original has reached the 3rd roller.
Fig.16-61
The large original exit motor (M39) starts to slow down when the trailing edge of the original has proceeded a specified distance after passing the 4th roller. After the large original exit sensor (S68) has detected the trailing edge of the original, the read motor (M36) stops rotating soon and the large original exit motor (M39) stops rotating when the original has proceeded a specified distance. The original is nipped by the large original exit roller.
Fig.16-62
7) Back side registering to set the top side Same operation as 16.5.2. 6)
16 - 34
8) Start of top side feeding Same operation as 16.5.2. 7)
Fig.16-63
16
16 - 35
9) Start of scanning Scanning begins after receiving the original transport signal from the engine, and at the same time, the original stop signal is reset. The read motor (M36) starts to rotate forward and so does the large original exit motor (M39). Then the large original exit roller release solenoid (SOL6) turns ON. (The large original exit solenoid (SOL5) has been ON since the original was idle reversed.) The SCN-STR turns ON when the leading edge of the original has reached the scanning section. When the leading edge of the original is transported to the large original exit and reaches the 3rd roller, the large original exit motor (M39) starts to rotate in reverse.
Fig.16-64
When the trailing edge of the original has passed the scanning section, the SCN-STR turns OFF, and at the same time, both the read and large original exit motors (M36, M39) start to accelerate. Then the large original exit roller release solenoid (SOL6) turns OFF. With a next original, feeding of the original begins when the trailing edge of the original has passed the 4th roller.
Fig.16-65
The large original exit motor (M39) starts to slow down when the trailing edge of the original has proceeded a specified distance after passing the 4th roller. At the same time, the read motor (M36) stops rotating unless there is a next original. The large original exit motor (M39) stops rotating when the trailing edge of the original has proceeded a specified distance after being detected by the large original exit sensor (S68). Then the original is discharged. If this is the last original, the operation ends when the large original exit solenoid (SOL5) turns OFF.
16 - 36
16.6 Jams
16.6.1 Jams at feeding section
1) Original jammed not reaching the original length detection sensor (S63) : E711 - Jam detection This jam is detected during the time after the document feed motor (M37) begins to rotate forward to start separation until an original reaches the original length detection sensor (S63). - Jam timer setting The setting value for the jam timer is three times as much time as it takes to transport an original from the pickup position (where the original empty sensor (S60) detects the original) to the original length detection sensor (S63). 2) Original jammed not reaching the original registration sensor (S55) : E712 - Jam detection This jam is detected during the time after an original comes to the position 10 mm short of the original registration sensor (S55) (24.6mm further from the original length detection sensor (S63)) until it reaches the original registration sensor (S55). - Jam timer setting The setting value for the jam timer is three times as much time as it takes to transport an original from the middle position between the original length detection sensor (S63) and original registration sensor (S55) to the registration sensor. 3) Time-out of lifting tray up : E715 - Detection range This jam is detected during the time after the lifting tray starts to be lifted until the lifting tray upper limit sensor (S59) detects. - Jam pulse setting The setting value for the jam pulse is the motor driving pulse 1.5 times as mush as the normal pulse when the lifting tray moves from the lower to upper limit. 4) Time-out of lifting tray down : E716 - Detection range This jam is detected during the time after the lifting tray starts to be lowered until the lifting tray upper limit sensor (S62) detects. - Jam pulse setting The setting value for the jam pulse is the motor driving pulse 1.5 times as mush as the normal pulse when the lifting tray moves from the upper to lower limit.
16.6.2
Jams at transporting section

16
1) Original jammed at the original length detection sensor (S63) : E713 - Jam detection This jam is detected during time after the document feed motor (M37) starts to rotate in reverse so that the registration roller starts to transport an original to the read roller until the trailing edge of the original passes through the original length detection sensor (S63). - Jam pulse setting The setting value for the jam pulse is the equivalent number of pulses it takes for the longest original (LD) to pass through the original length detection sensor (S63) and proceed more 60 mm.
16 - 37
2) Original jammed at the original registration sensor (S55) : E724 - Jam detection This jam is detected during the time after the original passes through the original length detection sensor (S63) until it passes through the original registration sensor (S55). - Jam pulse setting The setting value for the jam pulse is the equivalent number of pulses it takes for an original to proceed the distance from the original length detection sensor (S63) to the original registration sensor (S55) plus 60 mm. 3) Original jammed not reaching the read sensor (S69) : E721 - Jam detection This jam is detected during the time after an original comes to the 1st roller until it reaches the read sensor (S69). - Jam pulse setting The setting value for the jam pulse is the equivalent number of pulses it takes for an original to proceed the distance from the 1st roller to the read sensor (S69) plus 60 mm. 4) Original jammed at the read sensor (S69) (from the feeding side) : E725 - Jam detection This jam is detected during the time after an original passes through the 1st roller until it passes through the read sensor (S69). - Jam pulse setting The setting value for the jam pulse is the equivalent number of pulses it takes for an original to proceed the distance from the 1st roller to the read sensor (S69) plus 30 mm. 5) Original jammed at the read sensor (S69) (from the large original exit side) : E725 - Jam detection This jam is detected during the time after the scanning of an original from the large original exit side set at the scanning position until the original passes through the read sensor (S69). - Jam pulse setting The setting value for the jam pulse is the equivalent number of pulses it takes for the longest original (LD) to pass through the read sensor (S69) and proceed more 30 mm.
16.6.3
Jams at large original exit section
1) Original jammed not reaching the large original exit sensor (S68) (while discharging) : E722 - Jam detection This jam is detected during the time after an original comes to the 4th roller until it reaches the large original exit sensor (S68). - Jam pulse setting The setting value for the jam pulse is the equivalent number of pulses it takes for an original to proceed the distance from the 4th roller to the large original exit sensor (S68) plus 30 mm. 2) Original jammed at the large original exit sensor (S68) (while discharging) : E731 - Jam detection This jam is detected during the time after the leading edge of an original passes the position 20 mm further from the 4th roller until it passes through the large original exit sensor (S68). - Jam pulse setting The setting value for the jam pulse is the equivalent number of pulses it takes for the leading edge of an original to proceed the distance from the position 20 mm further from the 4th roller to the end of the large original exit sensor (S68) plus 60 mm.
16 - 38
3) Original jammed not reaching the large original exit sensor (S68) (while registering the back side) : E733 - Jam detection This jam is detected during the time after the back side registration or transportation to the 1st roller starts until an original reaches the large original exit sensor (S68). - Jam pulse setting The setting value for the jam pulse is the equivalent number of pulses it takes for an original to proceed the distance from the large original exit roller to the large original exit sensor (S68) plus 60 mm.
16.6.4
Jams at small original reverse section
1) Original jammed not reaching the small original reverse sensor (S66) (to the small original reverse side) : E723 - Jam detection This jam is detected during the time after an original reaches the intermediate transport roller until it reaches the small original reverse sensor (S66). - Jam pulse setting The setting value of the jam pulse is equivalent number of pulses it takes for an original to proceed the distance from the intermediate transport roller to the small original reverse sensor (S66) plus 60 mm. 2) Original jammed at the small original reverse sensor (S66) (to the small original reverse side) : E741 - Jam detection This jam is detected during the time after the deceleration, which is set to finish at the position 20 mm short of the small original reverse sensor (S66), starts until an original passes through the small original reverse sensor (S66). - Jam timer setting The setting value for the jam timer is the time mentioned above plus necessary time for an original to proceed 60 mm. 3) Original jammed not reaching the small original reverse sensor (S66) (from the small original reverse side to the small original exit side) : E742 - Jam detection This jam is detected during the time after discharging starts at the small original reverse section until an original reaches the small original reverse sensor (S66). - Jam timer setting The setting value for the jam timer is three times as much time as mentioned above. 4) Original jammed at the small original exit sensor (S67) (from the small original reverse side to the small original exit side) : E741 - Jam detection This jam is detected during the time after an original reaches the small original exit sensor (S66) until it passes through the small original reverse sensor. - Jam timer setting The setting value for the jam timer is 1.5 times as much time as it takes for an LT, which is the longest original (of all kinds of small-sized paper) when discharging small originals, to pass through the small original reverse sensor (S66).
16
16 - 39
16.6.5
Jams at small original exit section
1) Original jammed not reaching the small original exit sensor (S67) (from the intermediate transport section side) : E728 - Jam detection This jam is detected during the time after an original reaches the intermediate transport roller until it reaches the small original exit sensor (S67). - Jam pulse setting The setting value for the jam pulse is the equivalent number of pulses it takes for an original to proceed the distance from the intermediate transport roller to the small original exit sensor (S67) plus 60 mm. 2) Original jammed at the small original exit sensor (S67) (from the intermediate transport section side) : E732 - Jam detection This jam is detected during the time after the deceleration, which is set to finish at the position 20 mm short of the small original exit sensor (S67), starts until an original passes through the small original exit sensor (S67). - Jam timer setting The setting value for the jam timer is the time mentioned above plus necessary time for an original to proceed 60 mm. 3) Original jammed not reaching the small original exit sensor (from the small original reverse side) : E743 - Jam detection This jam is detected during the time after an original reaches the small original reverse sensor (S66) until it reaches the small original exit sensor (S67). - Jam timer setting The setting value for the jam timer is the time mentioned above plus necessary time for an original to proceed 60 mm. 4) Original jammed at the small original exit sensor (S67) (from the small original reverse side) : E732 - Jam detection This jam is detected during the time after the deceleration, which is set to finish at the position 20 mm short of the small original exit sensor (S67), starts until an original passes through the small original exit sensor (S67). - Jam timer setting The setting value for the jam timer is the time mentioned above plus necessary time for an original to proceed 60 mm.
16.6.6
Jams at intermediate transport section
1) Original jammed not reaching the original intermediate transport sensor (S70) : E752 - Jam detection This jam is detected during the time after an original reaches the 3rd roller until it reaches the original intermediate transport sensor (S70). - Jam pulse setting The setting value for the jam pulse is the equivalent number of pulses it takes for an original to proceed the distance from the 3rd roller to the original intermediate transport sensor (S70) plus 30 mm.
16 - 40
2) Original jammed at the original intermediate transport sensor (S70) : E751 - Jam detection This jam is detected during the time after the trailing edge of an original passes the position 20 mm further from the 3rd roller until it has passed through the original intermediate transport sensor (S70). - Jam pulse setting The setting value for the jam pulse is the equivalent number of pulses it takes for the trailing edge of an original to proceed the distance from the position 20 mm further from the 3rd roller to the original intermediate transport sensor (S70) plus 60 mm.
16.6.7
Jams when the cover is open
1) Jams when RADF is open : E870 - Detection range This jam is detected during copying. - Detection timing This detection is judged as jam immediately after the RADF is detected to be open during copying. 2) Jams when RADF jam access cover is open : E860 - Detection range This jam is detected during copying. - Detection timing This detection is judged as jam immediately after the RADF jam access cover is detected to be open during copying.
16.6.8
Jams when 24V power is OFF
1) Jams when 24V is OFF : E800 - Detection range This jam is detected during standby or copying (when power is ON). - Detection timing This detection is judged as jam when the RADF is instructed to be started without the supply of 24V power.
16.6.9
Jams when paper remains
1) Jams when paper remains at each sensor - Detection range This jam is detected during standby or copying (when power is ON). E761 E762 E763 E764 E765 E766 E767 E768 : Original length detection sensor (S63) : Original registration sensor (S55) : Original width detection sensor (S56) : Read sensor (S69) : Original intermediate transport sensor (S70) : Small original reverse sensor (S66) : Small original exit sensor (S67) : Large original exit sensor (S68)
16
Detection timing This detection is judged as jam when power is turned ON or the RADF and RADF jam access cover are closed.
16 - 41
16.7 Errors
Errors can be divided into the sensor adjustment error, EEPROM error, tray lift motor(M38) error and temperature detector error. 1) Sensor adjustment error There are 4 kinds of sensor adjustment errors: - Original length detection sensor (S63) adjustment error : C830 - Read sensor (S69) adjustment error : C820 - Large original exit sensor (S68) adjustment error : C860 - Small original reverse sensor (S66) adjustment error : C840 The D/A output voltage is adjusted so that the A/D input voltage for each sensor is kept within the range between 3.16V and 3.55V while carrying out the all-sensor adjust ment at the adjustment mode. At this time, the sensor adjustment error occurs when the D/A output voltage cannot be adjusted within the range between 0.04V and 2.90V. 2) EEPROM error : C730 The EEPROM error occurs when the initialization value cannot be written on the EEPROM while carrying out the EEPROM initialization at the adjustment mode or when data cannot be read out from the EEPROM after turning ON the power. 3) Tray lift motor (M38) error : C850 The tray lift motor (M38) error occurs when a feeding jam because of which the upper limit/lower limit cannot be detected within a specified time while lifting/lowering the tray takes place 3 times continuously. 4) Temperature detector error : C870 The temperature detector error occurs when the temperature detector on the ADF board detects having exceeded the upper or lower limit of the specified temperature. The detection timing is when the power is turned ON or the operation is started. After detecting the error, the ADF operates with the lower motor speed as the temperature rise mode.
16 - 42
16.8 Original Size Detection

The original position base code is transmitted to the engine during the time after the feed signal is sent until 1st original passes through the original width detection sensors (S56, S57, S58). The original size is detected whenever feeding an original and transmitted to the engine as a code before scanning starts.
16.8.1
Original size detection method
1) Original position base code The tray guide width is measured and stored when the feed signal is received. Altering of the tray guide position during the operation is ignored. 2) Width direction size The status of the original width detection sensor 1 to 3 (S56, S57, S58) are stored when the leading edge of an original reaches the position 10 mm further from the 1st roller after feeding has started with the original at the pre-feeding position. 3) Feeding direction size When the leading edge of an original reaches the position 7 mm further from the read sensor (S69), the original size is decided by considering the information whether or not the original length detection sensor (S63) is ON, original position base code and status of the original width detection sensor 1 to 3 (S56, S57, S58). Then it is transmitted to the engine. However, when the original length detection sensor (S63) is ON at the mixed-original mode, the original size for some combinations cannot be decided. In this case, the size is decided by taking into consideration the document feed motor (M37) pulses counted during the time after the original is idle reversed until it passes through the original length detection sensor (S63) and transmitted to the engine.
16
16 - 43
16.8.2
A4 series
Original size detection chart

Tray guide width decided receiving ORG-IN (mm) 79 148 182 OFF ON ~196 OFF ON ~234 210 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON NO YES OFF ON NO ~314 ~357 357~ YES ~268 257 OFF ON OFF OFF ~277 ~314 ~357 357~ OFF ON 268~ 279 OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF NO YES OFF ON NO ~314 ~357 357~ YES OFF ON ON OFF ON 297 330 384 OFF ON OFF ON ON 257 297 330 384 297 330 384 OFF OFF OFF ON Original length detection sensor at scanning standby position Reversal without reading length detected (mm) Reversal without reading length decided (mm)
Tray guide width Not over detected 160mm? receiving ORG-IN (mm) NO ~114 ~165
Size 2 (width 268.4 mm or over)
Size 1 Mixed (Width originals 196.0 mm mode? or over)
Original Switch tray back prosensor receiving hibited? ORG-IN
Size width Size decided (288.2 mm or over) A5-R A5-R B5-R A5-R B5-R B5-R A4 B5-R A4-R FOLIO A4-R FOLIO A3 A4-R B5 B5-R A4-R FOLIO A3 B4 B4 B5 B5 LT A4 A4-R FOLIO A4-R FOLIO A3 A4-R B4 LD A3 A5-R A4-R
YES
~114 114~
79 148
16 - 44
LT series
Tray guide width Not over detected 160mm? receiving ORG-IN (mm) NO ~110 ~178 ~237 Tray guide width decided receiving ORG-IN (mm) 79 140 216 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON NO YES OFF ON ~305 ~343 ~394 394~ ~268 257 OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF NO YES OFF ON ~305 ~343 ~394 394~ OFF ON 268~ 279 OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF NO YES OFF ON ~305 ~343 ~394 394~ OFF ON YES ~110 110~ 79 140 ON OFF ON 279 330 356 432 OFF ON OFF ON ON 279 330 356 432 OFF ON 297 330 356 432 Original length detection sensor at scanning standby position Size 2 (width 268.4 mm or over) Size 1 Mixed (Width originals 196.0 mm mode? or over) Original Switch tray back prosensor receiving hibited? ORG-IN Reversal without reading length detected (mm) Reversal without reading length decided (mm) Size width Size decided (288.2 mm or over)
16
16 - 45
16.9 Flow Chart

1) Power ON Start of communication line
Power ON
Jig board installed?
NO
YES
Program rewritten
Data read from EEPROM
A Cover closed?
NO
YES
Sensor adjusted
Communication started
Fig.16-66
16 - 46
2) Rewriting of flash ROM

A
Normal ROM installed on jig board?
NO
YES
Flash ROM deleted
ROM abnormality displayed on LED
Flash ROM succeeded to delete?
NO
YES
Flash ROM rewritten
Failure of deleting flash ROM displayed on LED
Flash ROM rewriting succeeded?
NO
YES
Success of rewriting displayed on LED
Failure of rewriting displayed on LED
Flash ROM rewriting completed
Fig.16-67
16
16 - 47
3) Start of communication line Operation monitoring

B 3 1
Cover closed?
NO
Operation started
YES
All sensors OFF?
NO
Operation completed?
NO
YES
YES
Initialization
Cover opened?
NO
YES
Initialization detected jam? NO
YES
YES
Finished due to jam?
NO
Cover open?
YES 4
NO
NO
Original setting signal received? YES
Cover opened?
NO
Fig.16-68
16 - 48
4) Initialization
Initialization started
Document feed motor reverse rotation
Read motor forward rotation
Large original exit motor reverse rotation
Small original exit motor forward rotation
For paper no removal detection, specified time passed?
Original found on the transporting path?
YES
NO
Paper no removal detection
16
Initialization completed
Fig.16-69
Jam
16 - 49
5) Control for separation

Control for Separation started 1 2
Lifting tray up
Original registration sensor ON?
NO
From original length detection sensor ON, specified pulse passed?
NO
YES
YES
Lifting tray up completed?
NO
Document feed motor stopped
Original registration sensor ON? YES
NO
YES
Document feed motor forward rotation
Original registration sensor OFF? YES
NO
Specified pulse passed? YES
NO
Original length detection sensor ON? YES
NO
Document feed motor forward rotation
Lifting tray down
Pre-feeding control from registration roller started
Pre-feeding trailing edge control started
Control for Separation completed
Fig.16-70
16 - 50
6) Control for pre-feeding from registration roller

Control for pre-feeding from registration roller started Control for pre-feeding from the 1st roller started
Feed acceptable?
NO
Read sensor ON?
NO
YES
YES
Specified pulse passed?
NO
YES
Document feed motor accelerationcompleted?
NO Size detected
YES
First copy?
NO
Size detection succeeded? YES
NO
YES Read motor forward rotation
Read motor stopped
Reversal without reading started
Reached the 1st roller?
NO
Control for leading edge scanning started
YES
Pre-feeding control from the 1st roller started
Control for pre-feeding from the 1st roller completed
16
Control for pre-feeding from registration roller completed
Fig.16-71
16 - 51
7) Trailing edge control for pre-feeding

Trailing edge control for pre-feeding started
Original trailing edge passed original length sensor?
NO
Small original?
YES
YES
NO
Original length data acquired
Small original?
NO
Next original detection started
YES
Midpoint between registration roller and the 1st roller passed?
NO
YES Next original detection started

Trailing edge control for pre-feeding completed
Original registration sensor OFF? YES
NO
1
Fig.16-72
16 - 52
8) Control for next original detection

Control for next original detection started
Lifting tray up YES
Specified time passed?
NO
YES
Next original?
NO
YES
Lifting tray up completed? YES
NO
Lifting tray down
Lifting tray down completed? Next original separation started YES
NO
Control for next original detection completed
Fig.16-73
16
16 - 53
9) Leading edge control during scanning

Leading edge control during scanning started
Original trailing edge on separation side?
NO
Leading edge transported to large original exit side?
NO
YES
YES
Original trailing edge passed original length detection sensor?
YES
Large original exit motor forward rotation
Large original exit solenoid ON
NO
Large original exit roller release solenoid ON
Original trailing edge on large original exit side?
NO
YES
Previous original trailing edge passed the 3rd roller?
YES
Large original exit roller release solenoid ON completed?
NO
NO YES Large original exit motor reverse rotation
Large original exit motor stopped
Read motor started The 3rd roller reached? NO
Scanning position reached? YES
NO
YES
C Scanning start signal set
1
Fig.16-74
16 - 54
Leading edge transported to large original exit side?
NO
YES
Large original exit motor used in RADF transporting operation?
NO
Large edge control during transporting started
YES
Large original exit roller release solenoid ON
Large original exit motor stopped? YES
NO
Large original exit motor started
The 4th roller reached?
NO
YES
Large original exit sensor ON? YES
NO
16
Large original exit roller reached? YES NO
Leading edge control during scanning completed
Fig.16-75
16 - 55
10)Trailing edge control during scanning

Trailing edge control during scanning started
Original trailing edge on separation side?
NO
Transported to large original exit side?
NO
YES
YES
Original trailing edge passed the 1st roller?
NO
Read motor accelerated until max. speed
YES
Read sensor OFF?
NO
Large original exit motor accelerated until max. speed
YES
Scanning position passed? YES
NO
Large original exit roller release solenoid OFF
2 Scanning start signal reset
1
Fig.16-76
16 - 56
The 3rd roller passed?
NO
YES
Transported to large original exit side?
NO
YES
The 4th roller passed?
NO
The 3rd roller pass margin passed? YES
NO
YES
The 4th roller pass margin passed? YES
Trailing edge control during transporting started
Trailing edge control for large original discharging started
Trailing edge control during scanning completed
Fig.16-77
16
16 - 57
11)Trailing edge control for large original discharge

Trailing edge control for large original discharging started
Large original exit motor decelerated
Back side aligned?
YES
NO
Large original sensor OFF? YES
NO
Original reversed?
NO
Read motor forward rotation
YES Large original exit roller passed?

After transporting the specified pulse, large original exit motor stopped
NO Large original exit sensor ON? NO
YES YES
Large original exit roller pass margin passed?
NO Read motor stopped YES
Back side aligned?
YES
Large original exit motor stopped Discharged on large original exit side? YES The 1st roller reached? NO
NO
NO
Large original exit solenoid OFF
YES
Pre-feeding control from the 1st roller started
YES
Large original exit motor stopped?
NO
Trailing edge control for large original discharging completed
Fig.16-78
16 - 58
12)Leading edge control during transporting

Leading edge control during transporting started
Specified pulse of original leading edge passed from the 3rd roller?
NO
Intermediate transport roller reached?
NO
YES
NO
Large original exit motor reverse rotation Back side? NO
YES Back side? NO
YES
Small original exit motor reversal sensor ON?
NO
Small original exit solenoid ON
YES
Leading edge control during transporting completed
Small original exit motor reverse rotation
Original intermediate transport sensor ON? YES
NO
1
Fig.16-79
16
16 - 59
13)Trailing edge control during transporting

Trailing edge control during transporting started
Original intermediate transport sensor OFF? YES
NO
Small original reversal sensor OFF?
NO
YES
Specified pulse of original trailing edge passed NO from intermediate transport roller?
NO
After counting specified pulse, small original exit motor stopped
YES
Next original leading NO edge reached?
NO
YES
Large original exit motor speed changed to scanning one
Small original reversal sensor ON?
NO
YES
Front side?
NO
Small original exit sensor ON?
NO
YES Specified pulse passed? NO Trailing edge control for small original discharging started NO
YES
YES
Trailing edge control for small original discharging started
Small original exit motor decelerated
Trailing edge control during transporting completed
Fig.16-80
16 - 60
14) Leading edge / trailing edge control for small original discharging
Leading edge control for small original discharging started Trailing edge control for small original discharging started
Specified pulse of original leading edge passed from intermediate transport roller?
NO
Back side?
NO
YES
YES
Small original reversal sensor OFF? YES
NO
Small original exit sensor ON? YES
NO
NO
Leading edge control for small original discharging completed
Small original exit motor decelerated
Small original exit sensor OFF? YES
NO
Small original exit roller passed?
NO
YES
Small original exit motor stopped
16
Trailing edge control for small original discharging completed
Fig.16-81
16 - 61
[A]
Unit : ms 500 1000 1500 2000 2500
313 1825
Lifting tray upper limit detection sensor
OFF ON
Lifting tray lower limit detection sensor 323 563 603 2075 2115 1795 1835
16.10 Timing Chart
Tray lift motor
Original empty sensor 398 682 1028 941 810 1016 927 553 739 806 622 980 809 1016 941 759 1028 1210 1121 1143 927 1785 1682 2065 2134 1143 1121 348 662 1806 1860 1795 643 1910 2155
Document feed motor
2587 2174
OFF ON Upword Stop Downward OFF ON CW Stop CCW (L) CCW (M) CCW (H)
Original length detection sensor
2644
Two sheets of A3 single-sided original
Original registration sensor
Read sensor
2337 2487 2460 2460
Read motor
OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON CW (H) CW (L)
Fig.16-82

1340 2460 1362 1121 2487 2597 2611 1557 2678
16 - 62
Reading start signal (SCN-STR)
Large original exit motor
Stop OFF ON CW (H) CW (L)
Large original exit solenoid
Large original exit roller release solenoid
Large original exit sensor
Original intermediate transport sensor
Small original exit motor
Stop CCW (L) CCW (H) OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON CW (H) CW (L)
Small original reverse sensor
Small original exit sensor
Small original exit solenoid
Stop CCW (L) CCW (H) OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
2500
3000
3500
4000
4500
Unit : ms 5000
3735 4063 3705 4073

3745 3750 2587 2937 2846 2715 2832 2644 3592 3695 2890 2832 3053 4532 3031 3120 4370 4370 2926 2846 2937 4247 4397 4507 2711 2926 3053 3705 3031 3716 2847 2611 2836 2597 3272 4397 4507 3250 4370 4521 4746 4777 4757 2678 3467 4588
OFF ON
Lifting tray lower limit detection sensor
Tray lift motor
Original empty sensor
Document feed motor
Read sensor
Fig.16-83
Read motor
16 - 63
16
[B]
Unit : ms 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500
OFF ON
313
1825
Lifting tray lower limit detection sensor 323 1795 1835 2075 2115 563 603
Tray lift motor
Original empty sensor 398 682 348 941 810 927 553 622 980 809 1016 1143 941 759 1210 1028 1121 927 1785 739 1682 806 2065 1016 1143 662 1028 1121 1910 1806 1860 1795 643
Document feed motor
2155 2195 2147 2204 2481 2476
Two sheets of A3 two-sided original
2134 2337 2487 2460 2460 2688
Read sensor
Read motor
Fig.16-84

1340 2460 1362 1121 2487 2597 2611 1557 2687
16 - 64
Unit : ms 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000

3218 2688 3366 4698 3344 3448 4698 4951 4999 5029 3366 3578 3344 3600 4725 4698 2687 2782 3344 4916 4835 3459 4698 4849 4948 3448 4959 4979 3112 4575 4725 4926 5049 2713 3165 3239 3179 3062 3250 2611 2597 2763 2721 2741 2710 3112 3165 3031 3239 3179 3042 3062 3250
OFF ON
Tray lift motor
Document feed motor
Read sensor
Read motor
Fig.16-85
16 - 65
16
Unit : ms 5000 5500 6000 6500 7000 7500
OFF ON
7231 7559 7201
Tray lift motor
7241 7246
7569
Document feed motor 6148 6433 6347 6216 6333 6205 6212 6422 6549 6527
7212 7201 7088 7191
Original registration sensor 5245 6386 6333 6549 6527 6616 6422 6347 6433 5029 5427 5342 6106 6331 5477 5256 5932 6173 6092 6342 5317 5049 5870
Read sensor
Read motor
Fig.16-86

6746 6768 6963
16 - 66
Unit : ms 7500 8000 8500 9000 9500 10,000

7743 7893 8772 10104 8750 8854 10104 7866 7866 8119 8468 8656 8094 8518 8571 8645 8585 8624 9981 10131 8772 8854 8984 8750 8865 9006 10131 8750 8084 8188 10104 10104 7866 7893 8003 8017 8169 8127 8147 8116 8518 8437 8448 8468 8571 8645 8585 8656
OFF ON
Tray lift motor
Document feed motor
Read sensor
Read motor
Fig.16-87
16 - 67
16
Unit : ms 10,000 10,500 11,000 11,500
Lifting tray upper limit detection sensor Lifting tray lower limit detection sensor Tray lift motor
OFF ON
Original empty sensor Document feed motor
Original length detection sensor Original registration sensor Read sensor Read motor 10104 10104 10435 10357 10405 10723 10833 10748 10883 10662 10322 10131 10332 10455 10651
11276 11468
Fig.16-88

Reading start signal (SCN-STR) Large original exit motor 10104 10131 10104 Stop OFF ON CW (H) CW (L) 11493 11718 11482 11707 11468 11338 11549 11738 Large original exit solenoid Large original exit roller release solenoid Large original exit sensor Original intermediate transport sensor Small original exit motor Stop CCW (L) CCW (H) OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON CW (H) CW (L) 10365 10385 10255 10354 10241 Small original reverse sensor Small original exit sensor Small original exit solenoid Stop CCW (L) CCW (H) OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
16 - 68
Unit : ms 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500
Lifting tray upper limit detection sensor 2126 323 979 563 1269 1813 2136 1309 603 1019 1768 1808

313 1009 1798 398 1104 1779 1543 1768 1259 1131 998 810 1017 760 1054 1143 942 1029 1076 928 1823 1768 1834 1881 1859 1948 2573 1645 1328 1787 1446 1758 1936 2450 1526 1054 348 811 553 622 740 969 807 991 942 979 928 1350 1389 1369 644 683 663 1522 1544 1834 1823 1859 1977 1881 2004 2203 2217 1672 2016 2183 2331 2348 1996 2477 2542 2508 2050 2428
OFF ON
Tray lift motor
Document feed motor
[C] Two sheets of A4 single-sided original
Read sensor
Fig.16-89
Read motor
16 - 69
16
Unit : ms 2500 3000
Lifting tray upper limit detection sensor Lifting tray lower limit detection sensor Tray lift motor
OFF ON
Original empty sensor Document feed motor
Original length detection sensor Original registration sensor Read sensor Read motor
OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON CW (H) CW (L) 2573
2742 2753
Fig.16-90

Reading start signal (SCN-STR) Large original exit motor Stop OFF ON CW (H) CW (L) 2993 2742 2769 2968 Large original exit solenoid Large original exit roller release solenoid Large original exit sensor Original intermediate transport sensor Small original exit motor 2948 2542 2508 3096 3273 3113 3281 Stop CCW (L) CCW (H) OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON CW (H) CW (L) Small original reverse sensor Small original exit sensor Small original exit solenoid Stop CCW (L) CCW (H) OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON 2806 3183
16 - 70
Unit : ms 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500

313 991 323 961 563 603 1336 1376 1001 398 1171 1741 1737 1121 348 662 810 553 622 980 809 1016 941 759 1028 1210 1121 1143 1835 1835 1986 2074 2431 2481 2400 1835 1362 1210 1862 1972 1986 2132 2090 2110 2079 1340 2110 927 1712 1862 1942 2063 2481 2534 2608 2548 2619 1198 1395 2587 739 951 1326 806 973 941 961 927 1416 1455 1435 1446 643 682 2534 2608 2548 2619 2411 2431 1557 2053 2151
OFF ON
Tray lift motor
[D] Two sheets of A4 two-sided original
Document feed motor
Read sensor
Read motor
Fig.16-91
16 - 71
16
Unit : ms 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000
Lifting tray upper limit detection sensor 3792 3434 3802 3479 3474
OFF ON
3464
Tray lift motor
Document feed motor 3110 3201 3434 3167 3184 3424 3671 2587 2534 2735 3489 2817 3442 2608 2817 3196 3489 3734 3218 3478 3616 3683 3761 2713 3442 2882 3346 3940 4259 3196 4092 3246 3787 3793 4030 3960 4308 4027 4335 4445 2619 2713 2828 3594 3985 4005 4308 4459 2548 2735 3683 3500 3594 3616 4308 2713 4308 4459 3319 3453 4185 4335 4445 3445
Read sensor
5071 4965 5018 4536 5032 4547 4915 4965 5018 4616 4574 4594 4563 4594 4884 5032 4895 4915 5103 5092 5103 5092
Read motor 2608 2548 2619 2534
Fig.16-92

4526 4635 4629 4806 4646 4189 4209 4178 4078 4152 4339 3176 4553 4716 4814
16 - 72
Unit : ms 5000 5500 6000 6500 7000

OFF ON OFF ON Upword Stop Downward OFF ON CW Stop CCW (L) CCW (M) CCW (H) 5071 5018 5092 5032 5103 6095 5301 5926 6106 5197 5219 5803 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON CW (H) CW (L) Stop OFF ON CW (H) CW (L) 5219 5301 5680 5197 5702 6122 5197 5366 5830 6301 6620 5680 6453 5730 6148 6439 6993 7170 7010 6550 6570 6539 6513 6703 6917 7080 7198 7178 5926 6321 5312 6095 6346 5018 5092 5032 5103 Stop CCW (L) CCW (H) OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON CW (H) CW (L) Stop CCW (L) CCW (H) OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
Tray lift motor
Document feed motor
Read sensor
Read motor
Fig.16-93
16 - 73
16
16.11 Circuits
1) Input circuits for read sensor (S69), large original exit sensor (S68), small original reverse sensor (S66) and original length detection sensor (S63) Since the read sensor (S69), large original exit sensor (S68), small original reverse sensor (S66) and original length detection sensor (S63) have almost the same circuitries, only the input circuit for the read sensor (S69) is described as followed.
Fig.16-94
This circuit consists of the voltage-current conversion circuit, which adjusts the amount of light of the infrared LED, and the voltage comparison circuit, which compares the voltage output from a phototransistor (PTr) with a reference voltage and converts the output voltage into digital signals. The read sensor (S69) is a mirror reflection sensor, and consists of a pair of emission elements (infrared LEDs) and a light receiving element (PTr). Both elements have a light axis running in the same direction. There is a mirror on the extended light axis of these elements. When there is no original between the elements and the mirror, infrared light emitted from LED is reflected by PTr in high reflectance. If there is an original, light emission to the mirror and reflected light from the mirror are blocked by the original, and the reflected light entering PTr becomes extremely small. When a large amount of light is entering PTr (this means there is no original) the optical current flowing in the PTr is increased, and the voltage of IC6-8 pin becomes higher due to a drop in voltage caused by R109. IC6 is a comparator which compares the reference voltage input to 9 pin (nonreverse input terminal) with the signal voltage of 8 pin (reverse input terminal). If the voltage of 8 pin is higher, the output level (IC6-14 pin) is "L". On the contrary, when the amount of the incoming light is small (this means there is an original), the voltage of 14 pin is low and the voltage of IC6-14 pin becomes "H". R56, C56 and C57 are noise filters. This circuit has an automatic sensitivity adjustment function to control the unevenness of the sensor sensitivity. Uneven sensor sensitivity is corrected by controlling the machine to have a constant PTr voltage when there is no original. The intensity of the infrared light emitted from the LEDs is changed to adjust the PTr voltage. When the sensor sensitivity adjustment mode is selected, the PTr output voltage (analog value) is measured by the A-D input terminals of CPU. The output voltage of the D-A converter is changed to keep the PTr output voltage to a certain level, and the LED current is adjusted by a voltage-current conversion circuit consisting of IC11, R65, Q6, etc. Each machine; has a different D-A output voltage value, which is stored in the volatile memory.
16 - 74
2) Irruptive current control circuit
Fig.16-95
This circuit controls the irruptive current flowing into the current regeneration condensers mounted on the drive circuits for the motors to a certain value. The circuit consists of a posister (PTH1) which controls the current and FET (Q12) which supplies the current in normal conditions. Base current is not supplied to Q2 and it becomes OFF after the RADF open/close switch (SW9) and jam access cover open/close switch (SW10) are turned OFF till the cathode voltage of ZD3 reaches the zener voltage. At this time, both voltages are set by R36 and C107. Q12 is turned OFF correspondingly to supply the current to PTH1, and the current regeneration condensers are charged. After the current regeneration condensers are fully charged and when the cathode voltage of ZD3 exceeds the zener voltage after the time allowance given by C107 and R36, a base current is supplied to Q2 to turn it ON and Q12 comes ON correspondingly. The current limitation is canceled and the current flowing in the PTH1 starts to be supplied to Q12. R66, R67, R68 and R69 are discharge resistors to capture charge stored in the current regeneration condensers right after either of the RADF open/close switch (SW9) or jam access cover open/close switch (SW10) is opened. The circuit consisted of PTH2 and D1 captures the charge stored in C107 right after either the RADF open/close switch (SW10) or the jam access cover open/close switch (SW10) is opened, and also controls incoming current for instantaneous opening/closing of the cover.
16
16 - 75
3) Drive circuit for read motor (M36)
Fig.16-96
This circuit controls the rotation/stoppage and the direction of rotation, excitation mode and motor current of the read motor (M36). A drive clock signal (RMOT_CLK) and rotation direction signal (RMOT_CWB) are input to control the speed and direction of the motor rotation. M1 and M2 are the exciting mode setting signals. The PWM signal of RMOT_CU is separated and smoothed at R101, R80, R42, R76, C140 and C91, and it is input into IC10-19 pin (Vref) to set the motor current value. The motor current value can be changed by altering duties of the PWM signal. 4) Drive circuit for document feed motor (M37), large original exit motor (M39), small original exit motor (M40) and tray lift motor Since the document feed motor, large original exit motor, small original exit motor and tray lift motor have almost the same circuitries, only the drive circuit for the document feed motor is described as follows.
Fig.16-97
This circuit controls the rotation/stoppage, the direction of the rotation of the document feed motor (M37) and the motor current. The drive pattern signal is input into IC15-5, 6, 16, 17 pin to control the speed and direction of the motor rotation. The PWM signal is input into KMOT_CU and separated and smoothed at R102, R103, R89, R87 and C89, and it is input into IC15-3 pin (RefA), -14 pin (RefB) to set the motor current value. The motor current value can be changed by altering duties of the PWM signal.
16 - 76
5) Drive circuit for large original exit roller release solenoid (SOL6), small original exit solenoid (SOL4) and large original exit solenoid (SOL5) This circuit controls the closing/opening of the flappers of the large original exit roller release solenoid, small original exit and large original exit solenoids (SOL6, SOL4, SOL5). When the level of ESSOL, SSOL, LSOL is H, Q9, Q10, Q11 are turned ON and the flappers are closed. The drive signal for the large original exit roller release solenoid (SOL6) is a PWM signal. The flappers are closed in the maximum torque of the solenoids and the duty value becomes 100% when the flappers start to be closed. After finishing closing, the duty value is decreased down to 50% and the flappers are kept closed while the temperature rise of the solenoids is being lowered.
Fig.16-98
6) Reset circuit
Fig.16-99
This circuit generates a CPU reset signal when the power is turned ON and the power voltage is detected to have become lower. The level of IC5-6 pin (OUT) is normally "H" after the power is turned ON. However, when the power is turned OFF or the voltage of the +5 V power supply is decreased to 4.25V or lower for some reason, the level of IC5-6 pin becomes "L" and the CPU is reset.
16
16 - 77
7) EEPROM circuit
Fig.16-100
This circuit is an EEPROM to store RADF data and its peripheral circuit. IC3 is a memory to store the adjustment value for reflection-type sensors, and data are sent/ received between IC3 and CPU using a 4-line type serial interface. Data saved in the IC3 is not erased even if the power is turned OFF. IC3-1 pin (CS) is a chip selection terminal and its level is "H" when data are being sent/received. IC3-2 pin (SK) is a serial clock terminal, and the serial data are sent in synchronization with the clock input which is input to this terminal. IC3-3 pin (DI) is a input terminal for serial data and IC3-4 pin (DO) is an output terminal for serial data. 8) Conversion circuit for D-A
Fig.16-101
This is a circuit of the D-A converter to converse the digital signal from CPU to the analog signal. Controls of CPU are done by the serial communications of each DI, CLK, LD signal. The analog output signals from Ao1 to Ao4 are used to adjust the light intensity of the light emitting diode (LED) of the reflective sensor. Also, Ao5 and Ao6 output 5 V or 0 V and are used as the output ports.
16 - 78
9) Analog multiplexer circuit
Fig.16-102
This is a circuit to connect to COM with one of the four analog input signals. As following table shows, the digital signals input into IC7-11 pin (A), IC7-10 pin (B) and IC7-9 pin (C) switch the corresponding channels and IC7-3 pin (COM) at a high speed, and they are input into the A-D input terminal of CPU. Each channel signal is an analog output signal of the reflective sensor and used to adjust the sensor automatically.
C L L L L B L L H H A L H L H Corresponding channel 0 1 2 3
16
16 - 79
16.12 Input/Output Signals

1) TXD/ACK/REQ signals
Fig.16-103
This is an input circuit to communicate with the engine. 1 substitutes 5 V and 0 substitutes 0 V. The same logic is used in both the connector and CPU input port.
16 - 80
2) RXD / SCN-STR / DF_ACK / DF_REQ signals
Fig.16-104
This is an input circuit to communicate with the copier. 1 substitutes 5 V and 0 substitutes 0 V. The same logic is used in both the connector and CPU output port.
16
16 - 81
3) Input circuits for each sensor
RADF open/close sensor APS operation sensor Original width detetion sensor 1 Original width detetion sensor 2 Original width detetion sensor 3 Original registration sensor Original empty sensor Lifting tray upper limit detetion sensor Lifting tray lower limit detetion sensor Original intermediate transport sensor Small original exit sensor Jam access cover open/close sensor Original tray sensor Original tray width sensor
Fig.16-105
16 - 82
Read sensor
Fig.16-106
These are the input circuits from each photosensor.
16
16 - 83
Signal logic
Sensor RADF open/close sensor (S65) APS operation (S64) Jam access cover open/close sensor (S61) Original empty sensor (S60) Lifting tray upper limit detection sensor (S59) Original width detection sensor 1 (S56) Original width detection sensor 2 (S57) Original width detection sensor 3 (S58) Original registration (S55) Original tray sensor (S53) Lifting tray lower limit detection sensor (S62) Original intermediate transport sensor (S70) Small original exit sensor (S67) Read sensor (S69) Small original reverse sensor (S66) Large original exit sensor (S68) Original length detection sensor (S63) Sensor Original tray width sensor (S54) Connector level 5V (1) RADF open APS OFF Cover close No original Upper limit Original existing Original existing Original existing Original existing Original existing Lower limit Original existing Original existing No original No original No original No original Connector level 0V (0) RADF close APS ON Cover open Original existing No original No original No original No original No original No original No original Original existing Original existing Original existing Original existing
Connector level more than 4 V Connector level less than 1 V Guide maximum Guide minimum
16 - 84

[A] (1) (2) Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (RADF) unit Take off the rear cover ( P.2-47 "[L] Rear cover"). Disconnect 1 connector.
Connector
Fig.16-107
(3)
Remove 2 screws. Then take off the RADF unit by sliding it to the rear side and lifting it up while the unit is opened.
Screw
Screw
Fig.16-108
[B] [B-1] (1)
Cover ADF front cover Open the jam access cover. Then remove 3 screws to take off the ADF front cover.
Screw
ADF front cover
16
Screw
Fig.16-109
16 - 85
[B-2] (1)
ADF rear cover Open the jam access cover. Then remove 4 screws to take off the ADF rear cover.
ADF rear cover
Fig.16-110
[B-3] (1)
ADF left cover
Remove 2 screws. Then release the hook by sliding it downward to take off the ADF left cover. Note: The screw on the front side is a stepped screw.
ADF left cover
Stepped screw
Fig.16-111
[B-4] (1) (2)
ADF right cover Take off the ADF front cover and ADF rear cover ( P.16-85 "[B-1] ADF front cover", P.16-86 "[B-2] ADF rear cover"). Remove 4 screws to take off the ADF right cover.
Screw Screw
ADF right cover

Fig.16-112
16 - 86
[C] RADF control PC board (ADF board) (1) (2) (3) (4) Take off the ADF rear cover ( P.16-86 "[B-2] ADF rear cover"). Disconnect all of 15 connectors of the ADF board. Remove 2 screws. Then release the harness from the clamp to take off the ADF board with its bracket. Remove 1 screw and release 2 locking supports to take off the ADF board.
Screw
Locking support
ADF board
Fig.16-113
[D] Roller [D-1] (1) (2) Pickup belt / Feed roller Open the jam access cover. Remove 2 screws to take off the upper guide cover.
Screw
Upper guide cover
Fig.16-114
(3)
Remove 2 clips of the pickup unit. Then slide 2 bushings to take off the pickup unit.
Clip
16
Bushing
Fig.16-115
16 - 87
(4) (5)
Remove 1 clip to pull out the shaft. Remove 1 clip to pull out the shaft, and then take off the pickup belt. (6) Remove 1 clip to pull out the shaft, and then take off the feed roller. Notes: 1. There are 3 types of clips with different sizes. 2. Be sure to install the feed roller in the proper direction.
Pickup belt Metal bushing
Clip (large) Clip (small) Clip (middle)
Feed roller
Fig.16-116
[D-2] (1) (2)
Separation roller Take off the pickup unit ( P.16-87 "[D-1] Pickup belt / Feed roller"). Remove 2 screws to take off the upper guide unit.
Screw
Upper guide unit Screw
Fig.16-117
(3)
Remove 2 screws to take off the paper separating unit.
Screw
Paper separating unit

Fig.16-118
16 - 88
(4)
Remove 1 clip on the rear side. Then slide the bushing to take out the separation roller with its shaft.
Separation roller
Bushing Clip
Fig.16-119
(5)
Remove the clip. Then pull out the pulley and pin from the shaft to pull out the separation roller.
Separation roller
Pulley, Pin
Clip
Fig.16-120
16
16 - 89
[E] [E-1] (1) (2) (3) (4)
Motor Document feed motor (M37) Take off the ADF rear cover ( P.16-86 "[B-2] ADF rear cover"). Remove 2 screws of the harness duct to slacken the harness. Disconnect 1 connector and remove the tension spring. Then remove 2 screws to take off the document feed motor with its bracket. Remove 2 screws to take off the document feed motor from its bracket. <Installation procedure> When the document feed motor has been installed on the tension bracket, move the motor to the direction of the white arrow in the figure. Then fix it temporarily with 2 screws. Hang the timing belt over the pulley of the motor. Loosen the screws fixing the bracket temporarily and attach the tension spring. Then tighten these screws so that the timing belt will be tightened. Tray lift motor (M38) Take off the ADF board with its bracket ( P.16-87 "[C] RADF control PC board (ADF board)"). Disconnect 1 connector and remove 2 screws. Then take off the tray lift motor with its bracket. Remove 2 gears and 2 screws to take off the tray lift motor from the bracket.
Screw
Connector
Screw
Screw
(5)
Document feed motor
Tension spring
Fig.16-121
(6) (7)
[E-2] (1) (2) (3)
Screw
Tray lift motor
Screw
Fig.16-122
16 - 90
[E-3] (1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
Read motor (M36) Take off the ADF rear cover ( P.16-86 "[B-2] ADF rear cover"). Remove the tension spring. Disconnect 1 connector. Remove 3 screws to take off the read motor with its bracket. Remove 2 screws to take off the read motor from its bracket.
Tension spring
Screw
<Installation procedure> When the read motor has been installed on the bracket, hang the timing belt over the pulley on the equipment side and the read motor pulley. Then pull the bracket downward to fix it temporarily with 2 screws. (7) Attach the tension spring. (8) Loosen the screws fixing the bracket temporarily. Then tighten these screws so that the timing belt will be tightened. Note: Be sure that the timing belt has been tightened completely. (6) [E-4] (1) (2) (3) (4) Small original exit motor (M40) Take off the ADF board with its bracket ( P.16-87 "[C] RADF control PC board (ADF board)"). Remove the tension spring. Disconnect 1 connector and remove 2 screws. Then take off the small original exit motor with its tension bracket. Remove 2 screws to take off the small original exit motor from its tension bracket.
Screw Read motor

Fig.16-123
Connector
Tension spring
Screw
<Installation procedure> When the small original exit motor has been installed on the tension bracket, fix the bracket temporarily with 2 screws at the position where the bracket is pulled to the down end of the right side, while the timing belt is hanged over the pulley of the motor. (6) Attach the tension spring. (7) Loosen the screws fixing the bracket temporarily. Then tighten these screws so that the timing belt will be tightened. Note: Be sure that the timing belt has been tightened completely. (5)
Screw

Fig.16-124
16
16 - 91
[E-5] (1) (2)
Large original exit motor (M39) Take off the ADF board with its bracket ( P.16-87 "[C] RADF control PC board (ADF board)"). Disconnect 1 connector and remove 1 spring.
Connector
Tension spring
Fig.16-125
(3) (4)
Loosen 2 screws to release the tension of the belt. Then tighten these screws temporarily. Remove 2 screws to take off the large original exit motor with its bracket.
Screw
Screw
Fig.16-126
(5)
Remove 2 screws to take off the large original exit motor from the bracket.
<Installation procedure> Hang the timing belt over the pulley of the large original exit motor. Then fix the bracket with 2 screws. (7) Attach 1 spring. (8) Loosen the screws fixing the bracket temporarily. Then tighten these screws so that the timing belt will be tightened. Note: Be sure that the timing belt has been tightened completely. (6)

Fig.16-127
16 - 92
[F] [F-1] (1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
Solenoid Small original exit solenoid (SOL4) Take off the large original exit motor ( P.16-92 "[E-5] Large original exit motor (M39)"). Disconnect 1 connector. Release the latch. Then remove the arm and plunger. Remove 1 screw to take off the small original exit solenoid with its bracket. Remove 2 screws to take off the small original exit solenoid from its bracket.
Screw
Fig.16-128
[F-2] (1)
Large original exit solenoid (SOL5)
Take off the ADF rear cover ( P.16-86 "[B-2] ADF rear cover"). Note: The jam access cover should be opened. Disconnect 1 connector to release the harness from the harness duct. Remove 1 screw to take off the large original exit solenoid with its bracket. Remove 1 screw to take off the large original exit solenoid from its bracket.
Screw
Harness duct
Connector
(2) (3) (4)

Fig.16-129
[F-3] (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
Large original exit roller release solenoid (SOL6) Take off the ADF rear cover ( P.16-86 "[B-2] ADF rear cover"). Then close the jam access cover. Remove the clip to take off the release solenoid linkage. Disconnect 2 connectors. Remove 1 screw, release 2 latches and take off the harness duct. Remove 1 screw to take off the large original exit roller release solenoid with its bracket. Remove 2 screws to take off the large original exit roller release solenoid from its bracket.
Release solenoid linkage
Clip
Harness duct
16
Connector
Screw Screw
Fig.16-130
16 - 93
[G] Sensor / Switch [G-1] Lifting tray upper limit detection sensor (S59) / Original empty sensor (S60) / Jam access cover sensor (S61)
(1)
Open the jam access cover. Then remove 2 screws to take off the upper guide cover. (2) Disconnect 1 connector for each to take off the lifting tray upper limit detection sensor, original empty sensor and jam access cover sensor. Note: Lift up the pickup unit before taking off the lifting tray upper limit detection sensor.
Jam access cover sensor Original empty sensor

Fig.16-131
[G-2] (1) (2)
Lifting tray lower limit detection sensor (S62) Take off the upper guide unit ( P.16-88 "[D-2] Separation roller"). Remove 2 screws to take off the upper guide stay.
Screw
Upper guide stay
Screw
Fig.16-132
(3)
Open the reverse guide. Then release the inserted portion on the front side of the guide to take it out to the front side. (4) Remove 4 screws to take off the lower guide. Note: 2 screws on the front side are stepped screws.
Inserted portion
Reverse guide
Stepped screw
Lower guide
Fig.16-133
Screw
16 - 94
(5)
Disconnect 1 connector to take off the lifting tray lower limit detection sensor.

Fig.16-134
[G-3] (1) (2) (3)
Original length detection sensor (S63) Take off the lower guide ( P.16-94 "[G-2] Lifting tray lower limit detection sensor (S62)"). Disconnect 1 connector and remove 1 screw. Then take off the original length detection sensor with its bracket. Remove 1 screw to take off the original length detection sensor from its bracket.
Original length detection sensor Screw
Fig.16-135
[G-4] (1) (2)
Jam access cover opening/closing switch (SW10) Take off the ADF rear cover ( P.16-86 "[B-2] ADF rear cover"). Remove 1 screw to take off the jam access cover opening/closing switch.
16
Screw Jam access cover opening/closing switch
Fig.16-136
16 - 95
[G-5] (1)
Original tray sensor (S53) / Original tray width sensor (S54) Lift up the tray and remove 3 screws to take off the tray back cover.
Tray back cover
Fig.16-137
(2)
Disconnect 1 connector to take off the original tray sensor.
Original tray sensor
Connector
Fig.16-138
(3)
Disconnect 1 connector and remove 1 screw. Then take of the original tray width sensor with its stay. (4) Remove the nut to take off the original tray width sensor from its stay. Note: When the original tray width sensor is installed, install it to match the markings on the rack and pinion each other.
Screw
Connector
Original tray width sensor

Fig.16-139
16 - 96
[G-6] (1) (2) (3)
APS operation sensor (S64) Take off the ADF rear cover ( P.16-86 "[B-2] ADF rear cover"). Disconnect 1 connector and remove 1 screw. Then take off the APS operation sensor with its bracket. Take off the APS sensor, separating the light shielding section of the sensor flag from the sensor.
APS operation sensor
Sensor flag
Screw
Fig.16-140
[G-7] (1) (2)
Original intermediate transport sensor (S70) Open the platen guide and then remove 1 screw fixing the band. Move the platen guide to the right side. Then release its support to take off the platen guide.
Screw
Fig.16-141
(3) (4)
Remove 2 screws to take off the post-scanning guide. Remove 4 screws and disconnect 1 connector. Then take off the small original transport guide.
Screw
Screw Small original transport guide
16
Post-scanning guide Screw Stepped screw
Fig.16-142
16 - 97
(5)
Disconnect 1 connector to take off the original intermediate transport sensor.
Small original transport guide

Fig.16-143
[G-8] (1)
RADF opening/closing switch (SW9)
Take off the ADF rear cover ( P.16-86 "[B-2] ADF rear cover"). (2) Disconnect 3 connectors. (3) Remove 1 screw to take off the RADF opening/closing switch with its bracket. (4) Remove 1 screw to take off the RADF opening/closing switch from its bracket. Note: Connect 3 connectors to the switch in the arrangement shown in the figure.
Blue Orange Brown
RADF opening/closing switch

Fig.16-144
Screw
[G-9] (1) (2) (3)
Large original exit sensor (S68) Open the jam access cover. Open the reverse guide. Then release the inserted portion on the front side to take out the guide to the front side. Open the scanning guide. Then take it out upward by holding its both ends.
Scanning guide
Fig.16-145
16 - 98
(4)
Remove 2 screws to take off the large original exit guide. Note: Be careful not to smudge the opening of the sensor.
Large original exit guide
Screw
Fig.16-146
(5) (6)
Remove 1 screw and disconnect 1 connector. Then take off the large original exit sensor with its holder. Remove 1 screw and take off the large original exit sensor from its bracket.
Screw
Fig.16-147
[G-10] Read sensor (S69) (1) (2) (3) Take off the ADF left cover ( P.16-86 "[B-3] ADF left cover"). Remove 1 screw to take off the read sensor with its bracket. Disconnect 1 connector and remove 1 screw. Then take off the read sensor from its bracket.
Screw
16
Read sensor
Fig.16-148
16 - 99
[G-11] Original registration sensor (S55) / Original width detection sensor-1/2/3 (S56 / S57 / S58) (1) (2) Take off the ADF left cover ( P.16-86 "[B-3] ADF left cover"). Open the jam access cover. Then remove 5 screws to take off the upper transport guide.
Screw
Upper transport guide
Screw
Screw
Fig.16-149
(3)
Disconnect the connector of each sensor. Then take off the original registration sensor and the original width detection sensors-1, -2 and -3.
Original width detection sensor-3

Fig.16-150
[G-12] RADF opening/closing sensor (S65) (1) (2) (3) Take off the ADF front cover ( P.16-85 "[B-1] ADF front cover"). Remove 1 screw to take off the RADF opening/closing sensor with its bracket. Disconnect 1 connector and remove 1 spring. Then take off the RADF opening/closing sensor.
RADF opening/closing sensor
Fig.16-151
16 - 100
[G-13] Small original exit sensor (S67) / Small original reverse sensor (S66) (1) (2) Take off the ADF right cover ( P.16-86 "[B-4] ADF right cover"). Remove 2 screws to take off the sensors with its bracket.
Bracket
Fig.16-152
(3) (4) (5)
Disconnect 1 connector to take off the small original exit sensor. Remove 1 screw to take off the sensor plate. Remove 1 screw to take off the small original reverse sensor.

Fig.16-153
[H] Platen guide (1) (2) (3) Remove 2 screws fixing the platen guide. Move the guide to the direction of the arrow in the figure so that the right edge of the guide can be seen. When its right edge is seen, take out the platen guide in the direction of the arrow in the figure.
Screw
16
Platen guide Screw
Fig.16-154
16 - 101
[I] [I-1]
Mylar and mirror seal Mirror seal for original length detection sensor (S63)
Ref. 0 ~ 0.5 mm Upper guide
0 ~ 0.5 mm
Mirror seal
Fig.16-155
16 - 102
[I-2]
Mylar for read sensor (S69)

Attach the Mylar aligning the edge of it with the corner end of the guide. Dispositioning from the corner end of the guide is not allowed. Ref.
0 ~ 0.5 mm
Platen outside guide
Attach the Mylar passing through the guide window to prevent twisting and too strong contact on the edge of the guide window.
Mylar
16
Fig.16-156
16 - 103
[I-3]
Mylar for large original exit sensor (S68)

Ref. 0 ~ 0.5 mm Large original exit guide Ref.
Attach the Mylar aligning the doublesided tape edge with the guide window edge. Double-sided tape must not be out of the guide window edge.
Attach the Mylar passing through the guide window to prevent twisting and too strong contact on the edge of the guide window.
Mylar
Fig.16-157
16 - 104
[I-4]
Mirror seal for small original reverse sensor (S66)

Ref. 0 ~ 0.5 mm
Attach the mirror seal with fitting the edge of it to the rib. Do not interfere the rib.
Ref. 0 ~ 0.5 mm
Under transport guide for small original
16
Fig.16-158
16 - 105
[I-5]
Mirror seal for read sensor (S69)

Reference hole: Attach the mirror seal with locating its edge to the reference hole position.
Mirror seal
Platen guide Reference hole
Mirror seal Ref. 0 ~ 0.5 mm
Fig.16-159
16 - 106
[I-6]
Mirror seal for large original exit sensor (S68)
Dispositioning from the edge of the guide is not allowed. Ref.
0 ~ 0.5 mm
Reverse guide Mirror seal
Attach the mirror seal between ribs. Do not interfere the rib.
Fig.16-160
16
16 - 107
16 - 108
17. POWER SUPPLY UNIT

17.1 Construction
The power supply unit consists of the AC filter and insulation type DC output circuit. (1) AC filter Eliminates noise from the outside and prevents the noise generated by the equipment from leaking to the outside. DC output circuit Converts AC voltage input from outside to DC voltage and supplies it to each electric part. The DC voltage is divided into the following two lines. a. Main switch line: Power supply used in the entire equipment during image forming process. Three kinds of voltage (+3.3 V, +5.1 V and +12 V) are output when the main switch of the equipment is turned ON. Power supply used in the entire equipment during image forming process, being supplied via the cover switch. Three kinds of voltage (+5.1 V, +24 V and +36 V) are output only when the main switch of the equipment is turned ON and the cover interlock switch is turned ON (front cover (lower) and left lower cover are closed).
(2)
b. Cover switch line:
17
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 POWER SUPPLY UNIT
17 - 1
17.2 Operation of DC Output Circuit

(1) Starting line output When the main switch of the equipment is turned ON, voltage starts supplying to all the lines. However, it starts supplying to the cover switch line only when 2 covers (front cover (lower) and left lower cover) are closed. Stopping line output When the main switch of the equipment is turned OFF, PWR-DN signal is output after the instantaneous outage insurance time (20 ms or more) elapses and then the supply of each voltage stops. If the supply of voltage of the main switch line (+3.3VA, +5.1VA, +12VA) stops earlier than the +24 V / +36 V line does, it may cause the damage of the electron device on each control circuit. To prevent this, the supply of these voltages stops after the PWR-DN signal is output and the minimum retaining time (+3.3VA/+5.1VA: 50 ms or more, +12VA : 5 ms or more) elapses. Output protection Each output system includes an overcurrent and overvoltage protection circuits (a fuse and internal protection circuit). This is to prevent the defectives (damage or abnormal operation of the secondary circuit) which may be caused by an overcurrent due to a short circuit or an overvoltage due to a short circuit between different voltages. If the protection circuit is activated (except the case the fuse is blown out), remove the causes such as short-circuit. Turn ON the power again 1 minute later to clear the overcurrent protection.
(2)
(3)
17 - 2
17.3 Output Channel

The following are 3 output channels for the main switch line. (1) +3.3 V +3.3VA : CN405 Pins 19 and 20 Output to the SYS board CN407 Pin 5 Output to the PLG board CN408 Pin 1 Output to the SLG board CN406 Pin 1 Output to the LGC board CN405 Pins 15 and 16 Output to the SYS board CN405 Pin 14 Output to the SYS board CN406 Pin 2 Output to the LGC board, external LCF (via LGC board), IPC board (finisher: via LGC board) CN408 Pins 3 and 4 Output to the SLG board CN407 Pin 1 Output to the PLG board CN407 Pin 2 Output to the PLG board CN409 Pin 1 Output to the finisher CN405 Pins 4 and 5 Output to the SYS board CN405 Pins 3 and 7 Output to the SYS board CN407 Pin 6 Output to the PLG board CN408 Pin 7 Output to the SLG board CN406 Pin 6 Output to the LGC board CN410 Pin 1 Output to the FAX board
+3.3VB : +3.3VC : +3.3VD : (2) +5.1 V +5.1VA
+5.1VB : +5.1VC : +5.1VD : +5.1V E : +5.1VF :
+5.1V G : (3) +12 V +12VA +12VB +12VC +12VD +12VE +12VF
: : : : : :
17
17 - 3
The following are 3 output channels for the cover switch line. (1) +5.1 V +5.1VH : +24 V +24VA +24VB +24VC +24VD +24VE +24VF +24VG (3) +36 V +36VA +36VB +36VC +36VD CN403 Pin 5 Output to the PLG board CN402 Pin 1 Output to the LGC board CN402 Pin 2 Output to the LGC board CN402 Pin 3 Output to the LGC board, external LCF (via LGC board) CN403 Pin 1 Output to the PLG board CN404 Pin 3 Output to the SLG board CN409 Pins 3 and 4 Output to the finisher CN404 Pins 5 and 7 Output to the ADF board (RADF) CN402 Pin 7 Output to the LGC board CN402 Pin 8 Output to the LGC board CN403 Pin 3 Output to the PLG board CN404 Pin 1 Output to the SLG board
(2)
: : : : : : :
: : : :
Output voltage by the type of connector Main switch line

Connector CN405 CN406 CN407 CN408 CN409 CN410 Destination For the SYS board For the LGC board, external LCF (via LGC board), finisher (via LGC board) For the PLG board For the SLG board For the finisher For the FAX board Voltage +3.3VA, +5.1VA, +5.1VB, +12VA, +12VB +3.3VD, +5.1VC, +12VE +3.3VB, +5.1VE, +5.1VF, +12VC +3.3VC, +5.1VD, +12VD +5.1VG +12VF
Cover switch line

Connector CN402 CN403 CN404 CN409 Destination For the LGC board, external LCF (via LGC board) For the PLG board For the SLG board, ADF board (RADF) For the finisher Voltage +24VA, +24VB, +24VC, +36VA, +36VB +5.1VH, +24VD, +36VC +24VE, +24VG, +36VD +24VF
17 - 4
17.4 Fuse
When the power supply secondary fuse is blown out, confirm that there is no abnormality with each part using the following table.
Voltage +24VA Board/unit Part LGC board Developer unit motor Fuser cooling fan Duct in fan Developer unit fan Laser unit cooling fan Switching regulator cooling fan-1 Switching regulator cooling fan-2 Drum separation finger solenoid Copy key card LGC board Web motor New toner supply motor New toner transport motor Hopper motor Recycle toner trans port motor Used toner transport motor Wire cleaner drive motor Cleaning brush drive motor Transfer belt cam motor Transport motor Exit motor Reverse motor Auto-toner sensor Drum surface potential sensor Main switch High-voltage transformer Discharge LED M10 M28 M30 M31 M32 M34 M35 SOL1 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8 M9 M12 M13 M15 M17 M18 M19 S12 S13 SW6 HVT ERS Fuse type F4 : 8A (Semi time-lag)
+24VB
F3 : 8A (Semi time-lag)
17
17 - 5
Voltage +24VC
+24VD +24VE +24VF +24VG
+36VA +36VB +36VC +36VD
Board/unit Part LGC board Registration motor Tray-up motor-1 Tray-up motor-2 Reverse section cooling fan-1 Reverse section cooling fan-2 IH board cooling fan Duct out fan Exit section cooling fan Tandem LCF tray-up motor Tandem LCF end fence motor Horizontal transport section driving clutch-1 Horizontal transport section driving clutch-2 Horizontal transport section driving clutch-3 Bypass feed clutch 1st drawer transport clutch 1st drawer feed clutch 2nd drawer transport clutch 2nd drawer feed clutch 3rd drawer transport clutch 3rd drawer feed clutch 4th drawer transport clutch 4th drawer feed clutch Gate solenoid Bypass pickup solenoid Tandem LCF pickup solenoid Tandem LCF end fence solenoid External LCF PLG board Polygonal motor (Only for e-STUDIO850 model) SLG board SLG board cooling fan Lamp inverter board Finisher ADF board Read motor Document feed motor Tray lift motor Large original exit motor Small original exit motor RADF opening/closing switch Jam access cover opening/closing switch Small original exit solenoid Large original exit solenoid Large original exit roller release solenoid LGC board Fuser motor Feed motor LGC board Drum motor Transfer belt motor PLG board Polygonal motor (Only for e-STUDIO520/600/720 model) SLG board Scan motor
M16 M21 M22 M24 M25 M26 M27 M29 M41 M42 CLT1 CLT2 CLT3 CLT4 CLT5 CLT6 CLT7 CLT8 CLT9 CLT10 CLT11 CLT12 SOL2 SOL3 SOL7 SOL8 M2 M23 INV-EXP M36 M37 M38 M39 M40 SW9 SW10 SOL4 SOL5 SOL6 M3 M20 M11 M14 M2 M1
Fuse type F3 : 8A (Semi time-lag)
F4 : 8A (Semi time-lag) F4 : 8A (Semi time-lag) F5 : 8A (Semi time-lag) F6 : 4A (Semi time-lag)
F7 : 8A (Semi time-lag) F7 : 8A (Semi time-lag) F7 : 8A (Semi time-lag) F7 : 8A (Semi time-lag)
17 - 6
Switching regulator Main switch CN401

1 4
NEUTRAL Noise filter Noise filter F2 Harmonic reactor +3.3VA +3.3VB +3.3VC +3.3VD Regulator +5.1VA +5.1VB +5.1VC +5.1VD +5.1VE +5.1VF +5.1VG CN405 CN407 CN408 CN406 SYS board PLG board SLG board LGC board PWR-EN CN405 SYS board PWR-DN CN405 CN406 CN407 CN408 SYS board LGC board PLG board SLG board
LIVE

CN405 SYS board CN405 SYS board CN406 LGC board, LCF (via LGC board), IPC board (Finisher: via LGC board) CN408 SLG board CN407 PLG board CN407 PLG board CN409 Finisher +12VA +12VB +12VC +12VD +12VE +12VF CN405 CN405 CN407 CN408 CN406 CN410 SYS board SYS board PLG board SLG board LGC board FAX board
3 6
Breaker
17.5 Configuration of Power Supply Unit
Fig.17-1
17 - 7
Noise filter F1 Harmonic reactor CN1 Switching regulator cooling fan-1
1 2
+5.1VH F3 F4
CN403 PLG board
Cover interlock switch
+24VB +24VC +24VA +24VD +24VE Regulator F5 F6 F7 +24VF +24VG +36VA +36VB +36VC +36VD
CN405 SYS board CN407 PLG board CN402 LGC board CN403 PLG board CN404 SLG board CN409 Finisher CN404 ADF board (RADF) CN402 CN402 CN403 CN404 LGC board LGC board PLG board SLG board
CN2 Switching regulator cooling fan-2

1 2
PWRFN-0A CN402 LGC board
17
17.6 Power Supply Sequence

ON
700ms or lower
OFF
AC input
0ms to 200ms -200ms 3.2V or higher 3.2V or higher 200ms
+3.3VA (Linked with main switch)

4.95V or higher 20ms or higher
10ms or lower 4.95V or higher
+5.1VA, B (Linked with main switch)
10ms or higher
20ms or 50ms or higher higher
10ms to 120ms 0ms to 200ms
PWR-DN
11.4V or higher 0ms to 20ms
5ms or higher
5ms or higher
11.4V or higher
+12VA, +12VB (Linked with main switch)
200ms or lower
PWR-EN
200ms or lower 0ms or higher 0ms or higher 0ms or higher
+3.3VB (Linked with main switch)

200ms or lower
0ms or higher
3.2V or higher
+5.1VC to +5.1VG (Linked with main switch)

4.95V or higher
+5.1VH (Linked with door switch) +12VC to +12VF (Linked with main switch) +24VA to +24VG (Linked with main switch) +36VA to +36VD (Linked with door switch)
0ms to 20ms
Lower limit of each rated voltage or higher +4.95V (R.V. +5.1V) +11.4V (R.V. +12V) +21.6V (R.V. +24V) +32.4V (R.V. +36V)
Fig.17-2
17 - 8
ASD/ASU/AUD/MJD/CND/KRD model of all equipment, TWD model of e-STUDIO850 Main switch

3 White White White
MJ-1029 only
White Black
NEUTRAL
White
Inlet (AC IN)

Black Black 2 Black 4
J657 1 1 J521 1 1 C D
J658 1 2
Finisher (Option)
N G L
LIVE 2 2 4 4
Noise Filter
Black Black
Breaker 10A
G E H F
Blue White Brown Black
FG Switching regulator
White Black

3 2 6 5 CN401 1 4 F2
White Black Blue
3 2 6 5
Blue White Brown Black
Switching regulator (Main switch line)
DC
NAD/SAD model of all equipment, TWD model of e-STUDIO600/720

FIL board
3 6 F1 CN440 4
White
CN441 1
J657 1
Cover interlock switch

Brown Blue
Switching regulator (Cover switch line)
DC
3
Brown
1 J L
Brown
17.7 AC Wire Harness
Black
Blue
Black White
1 2 J652 1 2
Fuser Fuser roller center thermostat

White Fuser roller Center IH coil
Fuser roller side thermostat
Brown Blue
White 1 Black 2 3
N NEUTRAL G L LIVE Black
Noise Filter
4
Side IH coil
Side IH coil
Black White
Brown Blue
Breaker 20A
1 2 1 2 Brown Blue Blue Brown J645 4 4 1 1 White Black 4 3 J523 4 3
FG
CN452 C CN607 CN450 1 L
CN453 S
CN454
White
Fig.17-3
17 - 9
Fuser detection switch
J654 3 1 2 J654 4 J638 White 1 1 Black 2 2 Black White Brown Blue 1 2 3 4 J655 1 2 3 4 White Blue J33 1 1 2 2 White Black Black Blue Brown J611 2 2 1 1 3 3 Blue Black Brown J637 DH-DRM-N 3 3 2 2 DH-DRM-L 1 1
IH board
IH coil control circuit
CN451 J608 N 1
ASD/ASU/AUD/CND/KRD/TWD model: Standard, NAD/MJD model: Option

Scanner damp heater Scanner damp heater thermostat
J34 J28 DH-SCN-N 1 1 DH-SCN-L 2 2 White Black White
J31 1 1 2 2 J32 1 1 2 2
Scanner damp heater (Left) Scanner damp heater (Right)
Dram damp heater

White Black Black 1 3 Black J839 2 2 1 1
Dram damp heater thermostat FUS board
Dram damp heater (Rear)

J840 1 1 2 2
Dram damp heater (Front)
17
17 - 10
18. PC BOARDS
1) PWA-F-SYS
Fig.18-1
18
e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 PC BOARDS
18 - 1
2) PWA-F-LGC
Fig.18-2
18 - 2
3) PWA-F-CCD
Fig.18-3
4) PWA-F-SLG
Fig.18-4
18
18 - 3
5) PWA-F-PLG
Fig.18-5
6) PWA-F-LDR
Fig.18-6
18 - 4
7) PWA-F-SNS * Only for e-STUDIO520/600/720
Fig.18-7
8) PWA-F-SNS * Only for e-STUDIO850
Fig.18-8
18
18 - 5
9) PWA-F-MOT
Fig.18-9
10)PWA-F-MOT2-MT/RV
Fig.18-10
18 - 6
11)PWA-F-DSP
Fig.18-11
12)PWA-F-KEY1
Fig.18-12
18
18 - 7
13)PWA-F-KEY2
Fig.18-13
14)PWA-F-FUS * Optional for NAD/MJD model, standard for other models
Fig.18-14
15)PWA-F-FIL * Only for NAD/SAD model of all equipments and TWD model of e-STUDIO600/700
Fig.18-15
18 - 8
16)PWA-F-ADF
Fig.18-16
18
18 - 9
18 - 10

e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

e-STUDIO520/600/720/850 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SERVICE MANUAL

MULTIFUNCTIONAL DIGITAL SYSTEMS

File No. SME040039B0 R04102168700-TTEC Ver02_2005-07

2005 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

GENERAL PRECAUTIONS REGARDING THE SERVICE FOR e-STUDIO520/600/720/850

1. SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES ......................................... 1-1

2. OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE ....................................................................................... 2-1

3. COPY PROCESS .......................................................................................................... 3-1

4. GENERAL OPERATION............................................................................................... 4-1

5. CONTROL PANEL........................................................................................................ 5-1

6. SCANNING SECTION................................................................................................... 6-1

7. IMAGE PROCESSING .................................................................................................. 7-1

8. LASER OPTICAL UNIT ................................................................................................ 8-1

9. PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM.......................................................................................... 9-1

10. PROCESS RELATED SECTION ................................................................................ 10-1

11. DRUM/CLEANER UNIT .............................................................................................. 11-1

12. DEVELOPER UNIT ..................................................................................................... 12-1

13. TRANSFER/TRANSPORT UNIT ................................................................................ 13-1

14. FUSER UNIT ............................................................................................................... 14-1

March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC

15. EXIT/REVERSE SECTION.......................................................................................... 15-1

16. REVERSING AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (RADF) ...................................... 16-1

17. POWER SUPPLY UNIT .............................................................................................. 17-1

18. PC BOARDS ............................................................................................................... 18-1

March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC

B4, FOLIO, LG, COMPUTER A3, LD

March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC

B4, FOLIO, LG, COMPUTER A3, LD

B4, FOLIO, LG, COMPUTER A3, LD

March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC

B4, FOLIO, LG, COMPUTER A3, LD

March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC

A4-R, B5-R, LT-R

B4, FOLIO, LG, COMPUTER A3, LD

Tolerance: Within -0.5 from +1

March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC

A4-R, B5-R, LT-R

B4, FOLIO, LG, COMPUTER A3, LD

Tolerance: Within -0.5 from +1

March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC

A4-R, B5-R, LT-R

B4, FOLIO, LG, COMPUTER A3, LD

Tolerance: Within -0.5 from +1

March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC

System copy speed

Weight Special paper

These special papers recommended by Toshiba Tec

March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC

March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC

March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC

March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC

Drum Developer Toner Toner bag

March 2005 TOSHIBA TEC

Staple cartridge STAPLE-700

Finisher guide rail KN-1017 Wireless LAN modude GN-1040

Bluetooth modude GN-2010

Finisher MJ-1027 Hole punch unit MJ-6003N/E/F/S

Staple cartridge STAPLE-600 FAX board GP-1170

PCI slot GO-1050